Intermec Technologies 700C-SMC45-1 Notepad Computer with 3 Radio Lans User Manual back let85x11

Intermec Technologies Corporation Notepad Computer with 3 Radio Lans back let85x11

UserManual.wiki >

Intermec Technologies >

700C-SMC45-1 User Manual >

User Manual HTML Version

User Manual

User’s Manual

700 Series Color

Mobile Computer

700 Series Color

Mobile Computer

User’s Manual

SNOTICE The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing

customers to operate and service Intermec manufactured equipment and is not to be released,

reproduced, or used for any other purpose without written permission of Intermec.

DisclaimerofWarranties.Thesamplesourcecodeincludedinthisdocumentispresentedfor

reference only. The code does not necessarily represent complete, tested programs. The code is

provided “ASISWITHALLFAULTS.”ALLWARRANTIESAREEXPRESSLY

DISCLAIMED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

We welcome your comments concerning this publication. Although every effort has been made to

keep it free of errors, some may occur. When reporting a specific problem, please describe it

briefly and include the book title and part number, as well as the paragraph or figure number and

thepagenumber.

Send your comments to:

Intermec Technologies Corporation

Publications Department

550 Second Street SE

Cedar Rapids, IA 52401

ANTARES, INTERMEC, NORAND, NOR*WARE, PEN*KEY, ROUTEPOWER,

TRAKKER, and TRAKKER ANTARES are registered trademarks and ArciTech, ENTERPRISE

WIRELESS LAN, i-gistics, INCA, Mobile Framework, MobileLAN, TE 2000, UAP, and

UNIVERSAL ACCESS POINT are trademarks of Intermec Technologies Corporation.

Acknowledgments

ActiveSync,ActiveX,Microsoft,MS,MS-DOS,Outlook,Pocket Outlook,Pocket PC,Windows,

Windows NT,andtheWindows logo are registered trademarks and MSDN,SQL Server,Visual

Basic,Visual C++,andWindows for Pen are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United

States and/or other countries. Microsoft products are licensed to OEMs by Microsoft Licensing,

Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of Microsoft Corporation.

Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A.

CDMA2000 is a trademark of the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA).

GSM is a registered trademark of the GSM Association.

Microclean II is a registered trademark of Foresight International.

MultiMediaCard is a trademark of Infineon Technologies AG, Germany, and is licensed to

MMCA (MultiMediaCard Association).

SanDisk is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation.

Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG. Siemens product names are either trademarks or

registered trademarks of Siemens or Siemens AG.

Sprint is a registered trademark of Sprint Communications Company L.P.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL

Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)

Contents

iii700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Contents

Before You Begin xv....................................................................

Warranty Information xv...................................................

Safety Summary xv........................................................

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes xvi...........................................

About This Manual xvi....................................................

Format Conventions for Input From a Keyboard or Keypad xvii......................

Related Publications xviii...................................................

Global Services and Support xviii.............................................

Web Support xviii........................................................

Introduction

About the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer 2...............................................

Audio System 2...........................................................

Speaker 2...................................................

Internal Microphone 2........................................

External Headset Jack 2........................................

Battery 2................................................................

Low Battery Shutdown 3.......................................

System Status Maintained 4....................................

CAB Files Within 700C Software Tools CD 4...................................

Modem Support 4.........................................................

Network Support 4........................................................

Removeable Card Support 5.................................................

CompactFlash Cards 5........................................

SecureDigital Cards 5.........................................

MultiMediaCards 5...........................................

Software Build Version 5....................................................

What’ s New 6.........................................................................

Contents

iv 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Pocket PC 2002

Introduction 8.........................................................................

Premium versus Professional Editions 8......................................................

Where to Find Information 10............................................................

Basic Skills 11.........................................................................

Buttons and Stylus 11......................................................

Today Screen 11..........................................................

Programs 13.............................................................

Navigation Bar and Command Bar 14.........................................

Pop-up Menus 15.........................................................

Notifications 15..........................................................

Enter Information on Your 700 Series Computer 16...............................

Typing With the Soft Keyboard 17...............................

Using Block Recognizer 17.....................................

Using Letter Recognizer 18.....................................

Using Transcriber 18..........................................

Selecting Typed Text 18........................................

Writing on the Screen 19....................................................

Selecting the Writing 19.......................................

Converting Writing to Text 20..................................

Drawing on the Screen 22...................................................

Creating a Drawing 22........................................

Selecting a Drawing 22........................................

Recording a Message 23....................................................

Creating a Recording 23.......................................

Using My Text 24.........................................................

Finding and Organizing Information 25........................................

Customizing Your 700 Series Computer 26......................................

Adjusting Settings 26.........................................

Adding or Removing Programs 26................................

Microsoft ActiveSync 29.................................................................

Microsoft Pocket Outlook 31.............................................................

Calendar: Scheduling Appointments and Meetings 31.............................

Creating an Appointment 32....................................

Using the Summary Screen 33..................................

Creating Meeting Requests 33...................................

Scheduling a Meeting 33.......................................

Contacts: Tracking Friends and Colleagues 34...................................

Creating a Contact 34.........................................

Finding a Contact 35.........................................

Using the Summary Screen 36..................................

Tasks: Keeping a To Do List 37...............................................

Creating a Task 38...........................................

Using the Summary Screen 39..................................

Notes: Capturing Thoughts and Ideas 40.......................................

Creating a Note 41...........................................

Contents

v700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Inbox: Sending and Receiving E-mail Messages 42................................

Synchronizing E-mail Messages 42...............................

Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server 42........................

Using the Message List 43......................................

Composing Messages 45.......................................

Managing E-mail Messages and Folders 46.........................

Folder Behavior With a Direct Connection to an E-mail Server 46.......

Companion Programs 47................................................................

Pocket Word 47...........................................................

Creating a Document 47.......................................

Typing Mode 49.............................................

Writing Mode 50............................................

Drawing Mode 51............................................

Recording Mode 51...........................................

Pocket Excel 52...........................................................

Creating a Workbook 52.......................................

Tips for Working in Pocket Excel 53..............................

MSN Messenger 53........................................................

Setting Up 54...............................................

Working with Contacts 54.....................................

Chatting with Contacts 55.....................................

Windows Media Player for Pocket PC 57.......................................

Microsoft Reader 58.......................................................

Getting Books on Your 700 Series Computer 58.....................

Using the Library 59..........................................

Reading a Book 60...........................................

Using Reader Features 61......................................

Removing a Book 61..........................................

Pocket Internet Explorer 62...............................................................

The Mobile Favorites Folder 62...............................................

Favorite Links 62..........................................................

Mobile Favorites 62........................................................

Using AvantGo Channels 64.................................................

Using Pocket Internet Explorer 65.............................................

Viewing Mobile Favorites and Channels 66........................

Browsing the Internet 66.......................................

Getting Connected 67...................................................................

Transferring Items Using Infrared 67...........................................

Sending Information 67.......................................

Receiving Information 67......................................

Connecting to an Internet Service Provider 68...................................

Creating a Modem Connection to an ISP 68.......................

Creating an Ethernet Connection to an ISP 69......................

Connecting to Work 70.....................................................

Creating a Modem Connection to Work 70........................

Creating an Ethernet Connection to Work 71.......................

Ending a Connection 72....................................................

Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server 72.....................................

Setting Up an E-mail Service 73..............................................

Contents

vi 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Installing Applications

Packaging an Application 76..............................................................

Installing Applications 76................................................................

Using Microsoft ActiveSync 77...............................................

Using the FTP Server 78....................................................

Using the Application Manager in Unit Manager 78...............................

Using a Storage Card 78....................................................

Copying to a CompactFlash Card 78.............................

Copying to a SecureDigital Storage Card 79........................

Updating the System Software 79..........................................................

Application Migration 80................................................................

Cabinet File Installation 82...............................................................

Network Support

CORE 84............................................................................

Network Adapters 85...................................................................

Ethernet Communications 86................................................

802.11b Communications 87................................................

Profiles 87..................................................

Import/Export 96............................................

Scan List 97.................................................

Network Selection APIs 98.....................................

Function Summary 101.......................................

802.11b Radio CORE Module 107..............................

WWAN Radio Options 110.................................................

GSM/GPRS 110.............................................

CDMA/1xRTT SB555 110....................................

WAN Radio CORE Module 111................................

AT Command Interface 115....................................

Wireless Printing 120......................................................

Documentation 120..........................................

Bluealps CORE Module 120....................................

AutoIP/DHCP 122.....................................................................

SNMP Configuration 123................................................................

The Focus was “Simple” 123.................................................

Using SNMP 123.........................................................

Retrieval of Management Information 124......................................

An Early Approach to Getting More than One Item at a Time 124...................

Conclusion 124...........................................................

SNMP Configuration on the 700 Series Computer 125............................

Management Information Base 125..............................

Object Identifiers 126.........................................

Configuring with SNMP 126...................................

Contents

vii700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Printer Support

Printing ASCII 128.....................................................................

Directly to a Port 128......................................................

Directly to a Generic Serial Port 128...........................................

IrDA Printer Driver 128.................................................................

NPCP Printer Driver 129................................................................

About NPCP 129.........................................................

NPCP Driver Installation and Removal 129.....................................

Opening the NPCP Driver 130..............................................

Closing the NPCP Driver 130...............................................

Reading from the NPCP Driver 130...........................................

Writing to the NPCP Driver 130.............................................

NPCP Driver I/O Controls 131..............................................

NPCP Printer Communications 132...........................................

Sample Code 132.........................................................

NPCP Error Codes 133....................................................

O’ Neil Printer Driver 134...............................................................

DTR Driver Installation and Removal 134......................................

Opening the DTR Driver 135...............................................

Closing the DTR Driver 135................................................

Writing to the DTR Driver 135..............................................

DTR Printer Communications 135............................................

Scanner Support

Scanner Control and Data Transfer 138.....................................................

Automatic Data Collection COM Interfaces 138..............................................

Multiple ADC COM Object Support 139......................................

How to Create and Use the ADC COM Interfaces 140............................

Read-Ahead Bar Code Data Access 140............................

Grid Data Filtering 141........................................

Filter Expression Values 142....................................

Editing Expression Values 144..................................

ADC Connection 145.........................................

2D Imager Overview 146...................................................

Data Collection Features 146...................................

Image Acquisition Features 147..................................

Create and Delete ADC COM Object Functions 149.............................

ITCDeviceOpen 149.........................................

ITCDeviceClose 150..........................................

Contents

viii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IADC Functions 151......................................................

IADC::CancelReadRequest 152.................................

IADC::Initialize 153..........................................

IADC::QueryAttribute 154....................................

IADC::QueryData 155........................................

IADC::Read 156.............................................

IADC::SetAttribute 157.......................................

IBarCodeReaderControl Functions 159........................................

IBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest 160...................

IBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED 161.........................

IBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize 162............................

IBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep 163...........................

IBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute 164.......................

IBarCodeReaderControl::Read 165...............................

IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute 167.........................

IBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner 171.......................

IS9CConfig Functions 172..................................................

IS9CConfig::GetCodabar 173...................................

IS9CConfig::SetCodabar 174...................................

Codabar Default Settings 175...................................

Codabar Enumerations 175....................................

IS9CConfig::GetCode39 176...................................

IS9CConfig::SetCode39 177....................................

Code 39 Default Settings 177...................................

Code 39 Enumerations 178....................................

IS9CConfig::GetCode93 179...................................

IS9CConfig::SetCode93 179....................................

Code 93 Default Settings 179...................................

Code 93 Enumerations 180....................................

IS9CConfig::GetCode128 180..................................

IS9CConfig::SetCode128 181...................................

Code 128/EAN 128 Default Settings 181..........................

Code 128 Enumerations 182...................................

IS9CConfig::GetI2of5 183.....................................

IS9CConfig::SetI2of5 184......................................

Interleaved 2 of 5 Default Settings 184............................

Interleaved 2 of 5 Enumerations 185..............................

IS9CConfig::GetMatrix2of5 185................................

IS9CConfig::SetMatrix2of5 186.................................

Matrix 2 of 5 Default Settings 186...............................

Matrix 2 of 5 Enumerations 186.................................

IS9CConfig::GetMSI 187......................................

IS9CConfig::SetMSI 187......................................

MSI Default Settings 187......................................

MSI Enumerations 188........................................

IS9CConfig::GetPDF417 188..................................

IS9CConfig::SetPDF417 189...................................

PDF 417 Default Settings 190..................................

PDF 417 Enumerations 190....................................

IS9CConfig::GetPlessey 192....................................

IS9CConfig::SetPlessey 192....................................

Plessey Default Settings 193....................................

Plessey Enumerations 193......................................

IS9CConfig::GetStandard2of5 194...............................

IS9CConfig::SetStandard2of5 195...............................

Contents

ix700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Standard 2 of 5 Default Settings 196..............................

Standard 2 of 5 Enumerations 196...............................

IS9CConfig::GetTelepen 197...................................

IS9CConfig::SetTelepen 197....................................

Telepen Default Settings 197....................................

Telepen Enumerations 198.....................................

IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan 198...................................

IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan 200...................................

UPC/EAN Default Settings 201.................................

UPC/EAN Enumerations 201...................................

IS9CConfig2 Functions 204.................................................

IS9CConfig2::GetCode11 205..................................

IS9CConfig2::SetCode11 205...................................

Code 11 Default Settings 206...................................

Code 11 Enumerations 206....................................

IS9CConfig2::GetCustomSymIds 207............................

IS9CConfig2::SetCustomSymIds 208.............................

Custom Identifier Assignments 209..............................

Custom Identifier Default Settings 210............................

Custom Identifier Example 210.................................

IS9CConfig2::GetGlobalAmble 211..............................

IS9CConfig2::SetGlobalAmble 212..............................

Postamble and Preamble Defaults 212.............................

IS9CConfig2::GetPDF417Ext 213...............................

IS9CConfig2::SetPDF417Ext 213...............................

PDF 417 Extended: Micro PDF 417 Default Settings 214.............

IS9CConfig2::GetSymIdXmit 214...............................

IS9CConfig2::SetSymIdXmit 214................................

Symbology ID Transmission Option 215..........................

IS9CConfig3 Functions 216.................................................

ISCP Commands 216.........................................

ISCP::GetConfig 217.........................................

ISCP::SetConfig 218..........................................

AIM Symbology ID Defaults 219.............................................

IImage Interface 221....................................................................

IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer 221...............................................

IImage::ReadSigCapFile 224.................................................

IImage::ReadImage 225....................................................

IImage::CancelReadImage 226...............................................

IImage::Start 226.........................................................

IImage::Stop 227..........................................................

IImage::Open 227.........................................................

IImage::Close 228.........................................................

Data Collection Configuration 229.........................................................

Contents

x 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Tethered Scanner 230...................................................................

Enabling and Disabling 230.................................................

Changing Comm Settings 231...............................................

Tethered Scanner 231.........................................

Sabre 1551E or 1553 Tethered Scanner 232........................

Welch Allyn 1470 Imager Settings 232............................

Error Message 232.........................................................

Scanner Cabling 232...................................................

Limitations and Capabilities 233..........................................

Programming

Creating CAB Files 236.................................................................

Creating Device-Specific CAB Files 236........................................

Creating an .INF File 236......................................

Sample .INF File 245.........................................

Using Installation Functions in SETUP.DLL 248.................................

After the CAB File Extraction 248............................................

Creating CAB Files with CAB Wizard 249......................................

Troubleshooting the CAB Wizard 250.........................................

FTP Server 251........................................................................

Configurable Parameters Via the Registry Editor 252..............................

BlockSize 252...............................................

DeviceName 253.............................................

DeviceURL 253.............................................

IDNATarget 254.............................................

ManifestName 254...........................................

PauseAtStartup 255...........................................

Root 255...................................................

Transferring Files Over TCP/IP Networks 256...................................

Stopping the FTP Server from Your Application 260...............................

Autostart FTP 260........................................................

Full Screen 262........................................................................

Kernel I/O Controls 264.................................................................

IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO 264.....................................

IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM 265.......................................

IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM 270...................................

IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID 272.........................................

IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO 273.....................................

IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO 274...........................

IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT 275............................................

IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT 275............................................

IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO 276.......................................

IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE 277.....................................

IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT 278...............................................

IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION 279..................................

IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID 280................................................

Contents

xi700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Reboot Functions 280...................................................................

IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT 280...............................................

IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT 280............................................

IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT 280............................................

Remapping the Keypad 281..............................................................

Unshifted Plane 281.......................................................

Gold Plane 281...........................................................

Alpha Plane 281..........................................................

Key Values 282...........................................................

How Key Values Are Stored in Registry 282.....................................

Change Notification 283....................................................

Advanced Keypad Remapping 283............................................

Scan Codes 283...........................................................

Sample View of Registry Keys 284............................................

Control Panel Applets

Configuration Parameters 286.............................................................

Changing a Parameter Setting 286............................................

About Configuration Parameters 287..........................................

Data Collection Control Panel Applet 288...................................................

Symbologies 289..........................................................

Code 39 290................................................

Standard 2 of 5 291...........................................

Codabar 292................................................

UPC/EAN 293..............................................

Code 93 294................................................

Code 128 295...............................................

Plessey 298.................................................

MSI 299...................................................

PDF 417 300...............................................

Interleaved 2 of 5 303.........................................

Matrix 2 of 5 304............................................

Telepen 305.................................................

Code 11 306................................................

QR Code 307...............................................

Data Matrix 308.............................................

Symbology Options 309....................................................

Symbology ID 309...........................................

Prefix 315..................................................

Suffix 316..................................................

Beeper/LED 317..........................................................

Beeper Volume 318...........................................

Beeper Frequency 320.........................................

Good Read Beeps 321.........................................

Good Read Beep Duration 322..................................

Imager 323..............................................................

Aimer LED duration 323......................................

Image Dimension 324.........................................

Contents

xii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Virtual Wedge 325........................................................

Virtual Wedge 325...........................................

Preamble 326...............................................

Postamble 327...............................................

Grid 328...................................................

Code Page 329..............................................

SNMP Control Panel Applet 330..........................................................

Security 331.............................................................

Read Only Community 331....................................

Read/Write Community 332....................................

Read Encryption 333.........................................

Write Encryption 334.........................................

Encryption Key 335..........................................

Tr a p s 336...............................................................

Authentication 336...........................................

Threshold 337...............................................

Identification 338.........................................................

Contact 338................................................

Name 339..................................................

Location 340................................................

Unit Information Control Panel Applet 341..................................................

Versions 342.............................................................

Battery Status 343.........................................................

CAB Files 344............................................................

Unit Manager

Data Collection 348....................................................................

Symbologies 348..........................................................

Symbology ID 349........................................................

Beeper/LED 349..........................................................

Imager 350..............................................................

Virtual Wedge 350........................................................

SNMP 350...........................................................................

Security 350.............................................................

Tr a p s 351...............................................................

Identification 351.........................................................

Unit 352.............................................................................

Date/Time 352...........................................................

Backlight Timeout 353.....................................................

Key Clicks 354...........................................................

Automatic Shutoff 355.....................................................

Volume 356..............................................................

Using Reader Commands 357.............................................................

Change Configuration 357..................................................

Set Time and Date 358.....................................................

Contents

xiii700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Bar Codes

Bar Code Symbologies 360...............................................................

UPC 362................................................................

EAN 362................................................................

Codabar 362.............................................................

Code 11 363.............................................................

Code 39 363.............................................................

Encoded Code 39 (Concatenation) 363........................................

Encoded Code 39 (Full ASCII) 363...........................................

Code 93 364.............................................................

Code 128 364............................................................

I 2 of 5 (Interleaved) 366...................................................

S2of5(Standard2of5) 366................................................

Plessey 367..............................................................

MSI Code (Variant of Plessey) 367............................................

Bar Code Labels 368....................................................................

Audio Volume 368........................................................

Automatic Shutoff 369.....................................................

Backlight Timeout 369.....................................................

Key Clicks 370...........................................................

Virtual Wedge Grid, Preamble, Postamble 371...................................

Grid 371...................................................

Preamble 371...............................................

Postamble 371...............................................

IIndex

Classes and Functions 374...............................................................

General Index 377......................................................................

Files Index 398........................................................................

Contents

xiv 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Before You Begin

xv700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Before You Begin

This section introduces you to standard warranty provisions, safety

precautions, warnings and cautions, document formatting conventions,

and sources of additional product information. A documentation roadmap

is also provided to guide you in finding the appropriate information.

Warranty Information

To receive a copy of the standard warranty provision for this product, con-

tact your local Intermec support services organization. In the U.S. call

1-800-755-5505, and in Canada call 1-800-668-7043. If you live outside

of the U.S. or Canada, you can find your local Intermec support services

organization on the Intermec Web site at www.intermec.com.

Note: Opening this product may void the warranty. The internal workings

of this product can only be accessed by Intermec service personnel. Radio

replacements and upgrades require Intermec service personnel.

Safety Summary

Your safety is extremely important. Follow these guidelines:

SRead and follow all warnings and cautions in this book before handling

and operating Intermec equipment. You can be seriously injured, and

equipment and data can be damaged if you do no follow the safety

warnings and cautions.

SDo not repair or adjust energized equipment alone under any circum-

stances. Someone capable of providing first aid must always be present

foryoursafety.

SAlways obtain first aid or medical attention immediately after an injury.

Never neglect an injury, no matter how slight it seems.

SBegin resuscitation immediately if someone is injured and stops breath-

ing. Any delay could result in death. To work on or near high voltage,

you should be familiar with approved industrial first aid methods.

SNever work on energized equipment unless authorized by a responsible

authority. Energized electrical equipment is dangerous. Electrical shock

from energized equipment can cause death. If you must perform autho-

rized emergency work on energized equipment, be sure that you comply

strictly with approved safety regulations.

Before You Begin

xvi 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

The warnings, cautions, and notes in this manual use this format:

A warning alerts you of an operating procedure, practice, condition, or

statement that must be strictly observed to avoid death or serious injury

to the persons working on the equipment.

Attention Danger: Un avertissement vous avertit d’une procédure de

fonctionnement, d’une méthode, d’un état ou d’un rapport qui doit être

strictement respecté pour éviter l’occurrence de mort ou de blessures

graves aux personnes manupulant l’équipement.

A caution alerts you to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or

statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage or

destruction, or corruption or loss of data.

Attention: Une précaution vous avertit d’une procédure de

fonctionnement, d’une méthode, d’un état ou d’un rapport qui doit être

strictement respecté pour empêcher l’endommagement ou la destruction

de l’équipement, ou l’altération ou la perte de données.

Note: Notes are statements that either provide extra information about a

topic or contain special instructions for handling a particular condition or

set of circumstances.

About This Manual

The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’ s Manual provides you with

information about the features of the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer

and how to configure, troubleshoot, and support it. You must be familiar

with your host PC, your network, and your other Intermec equipment.

SChapter 1 — Introduction

Introduces the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer.

SChapter 2 — Pocket PC 2002

Introduces the Pocket PC 2002 operating system from Microsoft Cor-

poration, and explains how to use its Outlook, ActiveSync, Internet Ex-

plorer, and other companion programs.

SChapter 3 — Installing Applications

Provides methods to install applications and CAB files, also covers ap-

plication migration.

SChapter 4 — Network Support

Introduces the CORE application, network adapters such as Ethernet,

802.11b radios, GSM/GPRS or CDMA/1xRTT embedded radio mod-

ules, and wireless printing equipped with a Bluetooth module, SNMP

configuration, and Network Selection APIs.

SChapter 5 — Printer Support

Provides information on printing ASCII to either a port or to a generic

serial port, and on working with IrDA, NPCP, and O’ Neil printer driv-

ers.

Before You Begin

xvii700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SChapter 6 — Scanner Support

Provides Automatic Data Collection COM and IImage interfaces and

lists settings via Data Collection parameters.

SChapter 7 — Programming

Programming information that includes creating CAB files, the FTP

Server, Full Screen, Kernel I/O Control Functions, Reboot Functions,

and remapping the keypad.

SAppendix A — Control Panel Applets

Contains detailed information about the Data Collection, SNMP, and

Unit Information control panel applets.

SAppendix B — Unit Manager

Describes how to configure some parameters via the Unit Manager ap-

plication and includes reader commands.

SAppendix C — Bar Codes

Describes some of the more common bar code symbologies and includes

bar code labels that can be scanned to configure your 700 Series Com-

puter.

Format Conventions for Input From a Keyboard or Keypad

This table describes the formatting conventions for input from PC or host

computer keyboards and device keypads.

Format Conventions

Convention Description

Special text Shows the command as you should enter it into the device.

Italic text Indicates a variable that you must replace the parameter with a value.

Bold text Indicates the keys you must press on a PC or host computer key-

board. For example, “press Enter” means you press the key labeled

“Enter” on the PC or host computer keyboard.

where This word introduces a list of parameters and explains the values you

can specify for them.

Before You Begin

xviii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Related Publications

To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local In-

termec representative or distributor. Following are related Intermec

manuals, CD-ROMs, and part numbers (P/N). For other versions and

languages, consult your Intermec sales representative.

S700 Series Color Mobile Computer Quick Start Guide

(P/N: 962-054-053)

S700 Color Recovery CD PPC 2002 Professional Edition WWE

(P/N: 235-100-001 Kit)

S700 Color Recovery CD PPC 2002 Premium Edition WWE

(P/N: 235-101-001 Kit)

S700 Series Color Software Tools CD (P/N: 235-099-001)

SWindows 95 and Windows CE Configuration Utilities Reference Manual

(P/N: 978-054-010)

Global Services and Support

Select any of the following services available from Intermec Technologies

Corporation:

SFactory Repair and On-site Repair

To request a return authorization number for one of our authorized ser-

vice centers, or to request an on-site repair technician, call

1-800-755-5505, then select option 1.

STechnical Support

For technical support on your Intermec product, call 1-800-755-5505,

then select option 2.

SService Contract Status

To inquire about an existing contract, or to renew a contract, call

1-800-755-5505, then select option 3.

SSchedule Site Surveys or Installations

To schedule a site survey, or to request a product or system installation,

call 1-800-755-5505, then select option 4.

Web Support

Visit our Web site at http://www.intermec.com to download many of our

current manuals in PDF format.

Visit our technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) at

http://intermec.custhelp.com to review technical information or to request

technical help for all Intermec products.

1700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Introduction

This chapter introduces the 700 Series Color (700C) Mobile Computer,

developed by Intermec Technologies Corporation to enhance wireless con-

nectivity needs.

IntroductionChapter —1

2 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

About the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer

Audio System

Speaker

A speaker capable of variable volume levels is located on the back of the

computer. This speaker has a transducer volume of 85 dB min at 10 CM

and a frequency range of 1-8 KHz.

Internal Microphone

The internal microphone is located on the bottom of the unit to the left of

the hirose connector.

External Headset Jack

The external headset jack connects a mono headset to your mobile com-

puter for use in noisy environments. The jack is a 2.5 mm, three-conduc-

tor jack, with autosensing of the headset jack insertion which disables the

internal speaker and microphone. The external headset jack is located on

the bottom of the mobile computer to the right of the hirose connector.

Battery

The 700 Series Computer comes equipped with a nominal 14.4

Watt-hour, 7.2V (two 2000 mAh cells), replaceable Lithium-Ion (LiIon)

battery. To view the status of this battery from the 700 Series Computer,

tap Start →Settings →the System tab →the Power icon to view the

current status of both the main battery and the backup battery. Tap ok to

exit this information.

Introduction—Chapter 1

3700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Note: The Unit Information control panel applet is only available in the

700 Series Computer if Intermec Content is enabled, the Plus region is

enabled and installed, and a laser scanner is installed.

You can also view the battery status for the 700 Series Computer by

accessing the Unit Information control panel applet. Tap the Unit

Information icon, then tap the Battery Status tab to view the current

status. Tap ok to exit this information.

Low Battery Shutdown

If your computer shuts down because of low battery conditions, your com-

puter will not operate. This is done to ensure that data is protected. Al-

though the battery will protect the data against loss for several hours, you

should connect your computer to a power source when you first detect a

low battery condition.

Your computer contains an internal super capacitor, a temporary power

storage device, that protects data for up to ten minutes. This is to give you

time to replace the main battery pack before that data is lost. Be sure to put

the computer in a suspend mode before doing so.

The battery power fail level is set so that after the system shuts down in a

low battery condition, there is still sufficient charge to allow the unit to

remain configured, keep proper time, and maintain DRAM (Dynamic

Random Access Memory) for at least 72 hours at room temperature if the

main battery remains in the mobile computer. The configuration and time

are lost if:

SThe battery discharges beyond this level.

SThe battery is removed when the computer is not in suspend mode.

SA cold reset is performed on the computer.

IntroductionChapter —1

4 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

System Status Maintained

System status is maintained in “suspend” when the main battery is re-

moved:

S10 minutes for 64 MB low-power chips

S5 minutes for 128 MB low-power chips

CAB Files Within 700C Software Tools CD

If you leave the default destination while you install the “\700 Color

Mgmt Tools” directory onto your desktop PC, then “C:\Intermec\Inter-

mec 700 Color Mgmt Tools\Cab Files” will be the default directory. There

are folders within the “\Cab Files” directory that contain demos and pro-

gram files. See the 700 Series Color Software Tools CD User’ s Manual for

more information about these files.

Modem Support

Modem PC Cards are not supported by the 700 Series Computer. Howev-

er, modem options do include the following:

SSwitchable dock that includes a built-in modem and a serial port be-

tween which an application can switch.

SMini-Landline Modem that can be tethered to the port on the bottom

of the 700 Series Computer.

SOther external modems that may be connected to the bottom of the

700 Series Computer or to the dock.

Network Support

Radio CompactFlash Cards cannot be installed by a user. The 700 Series

Computer must be serviced to install or replace radios. See Chapter 4,

“Network Support” for more information.

S802.11b radio

SIntegrated GSM/GPRS radio

SCDPM/1xRTT radio

SWireless printing equipped with a Bluetooth qualified module by Socket

Communications

Introduction—Chapter 1

5700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Removeable Card Support

To access either the CompactFlash (CF) or SecureDigital (SD) card slot,

locate the access door at the top of the 700 Series Computer, remove its

two screws, then remove the door.

CompactFlash Cards

Support is limited to one CompactFlash (CF) Storage Card in the 700 Se-

ries Computer, either for storage or for the 802.11b radio.

SecureDigital Cards

Support is limited to one SecureDigital (SD) Storage Card in the 700 Se-

ries Computer for storage.

MultiMediaCards

MultiMediaCards (MMCs) are not supported in the 700 Series Comput-

ers because current technology shows that SD cards will quickly surpass

MMC cards in storage capacity.

Software Build Version

To check to see if your 700 Series Computer has the latest build, select

Start →Internet Explorer →the Intermec logo.

The latest software build version is displayed beneath the Patent Informa-

tion title. This information will be useful should you need customer assis-

tance.

Note: The Unit Information control panel applet is only available in the

700 Series Computer if Intermec Content is enabled, the Plus region is

enabled and installed, and a laser scanner is installed.

IntroductionChapter —1

6 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

You can also view the latest software build version on your 700 Series

Computer by accessing the Unit Information control panel applet. Select

Start →Settings →the System tab →the Unit Information icon →the

Versions tab to view the current build version on your 700 Series

Computer.

What’s New

The newest functionality is available in software build versions 1.30 or

greater. The following changes have occurred since the last release of this

manual:

SApplied new publications standards to this manual.

SAdapted instructions using Ethernet connections to fit Intermec require-

ments in Chapter 2, “Pocket PC 2002.”

SMoved “Updating System Software” and “EFlash” information to the Re-

covery CD User’ s Manual from Chapter 3, “Installing Applications.”

SRemoved several 802.11 APIs not related to the 700 Series Color Com-

puter from Chapter 4, “Network Support.”

SAdded the Siemens MC45 radio module to Chapter 4, “Network Sup-

port.”

SAdded tethered scanner information to Chapter 6, “Scanner Support.”

SAdded CAB extraction information and FTP Server parameters to

Chapter 7, “Programming.”

SAdded imager option information via the Data Collection control panel

applet to Appendix A, “Control Panel Applets.”Note that this is for 700

Series Computers using an imager.

7700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Pocket PC 2002

This chapter introduces the Pocket PC 2002 operating system from

Microsoft Corporation.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

8 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Introduction

Congratulations on purchasing a Pocket PC. Due to the size and capabili-

ties of this 700 Series Color Mobile Computer, you can keep your most

important business and personal information up-to-date and close at hand.

Microsoft ActiveSync increases the power of your 700 Series Computer by

allowing you to synchronize the information on your desktop or laptop

computer with your 700 Series Computer. Picture yourself in the follow-

ing situations:

SA Calendar reminder alerts you that it is time to catch the bus. You grab

your 700 Color Pocket PC Mobile Computer and catch the bus just in

time. Because ActiveSync keeps the information on your 700 Series

Computer up-to-date, you leisurely review your task list, make notes

about the new books and CDs you want to buy, and read and respond

to e-mail messages. When you get back to the office, ActiveSync trans-

fers any task changes you made, your notes, and your e-mail message

responses to your desktop computer. For more information on Active-

Sync, see “Microsoft ActiveSync” on page 29.

SWhile walking with a colleague, your 700 Color Pocket PC Mobile

Computer rings. You look at the caller ID and see it is your manager

who is calling. She asks if you two are free this afternoon for an emer-

gency meeting. While your colleague fumbles through his paper orga-

nizer, you press a button on your 700 Series Computer and instantly see

a list of today’ s appointments and meetings. You are quickly able to tell

your manager your available times, and make a note of the new meeting

while on the call. You hang up, send an e-mail with a schedule request

for the three of you at the desired location. For more information on

scheduling appointments and meetings, see “Microsoft Pocket Outlook”

on page 31.

SYou are meeting your friends tonight for dinner and a movie. You

download the latest movie information from the Internet to your desk-

top computer and then synchronize it with your 700 Series Computer.

At dinner, you pull out your 700 Color Pocket PC Mobile Computer

and review your movie options with your friends. For more information

on downloading Web pages to your 700 Series Computer, see “Pocket

Internet Explorer” on page 62.

Premium versus Professional Editions

Your 700 Series Computer will have either the Premium Edition or the

Professional Edition of Pocket PC 2002. Do the following to determine

which edition of Pocket PC 2002 is on your unit.

1Select Start →Internet Explorer →the Intermec logo.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

9700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

2Note the “Software Build” information displayed beneath the Version

Information title.

Note: If you have an older software build, your unit may say either

“PREM” (which indicates the Premium Edition) or “PRO” (which indicates

the Professional Edition).

3Tap t he Close icon in the top right corner to exit the Internet Explorer.

Below is a list of components for each edition of Pocket PC 2002:

Component

Premium

Edition

Professional

Edition

Microsoft ActiveSync Client (page 29) XX

Microsoft Pocket Outlook (page 31) X X

Pocket Word (page 47) XX

Pocket Excel (page 52) X X

MSN Messenger (page 53) X

Windows Media Player for Pocket PC (page 57) XRAM

Microsoft Reader (page 58) XRAM

Pocket Internet Explorer (page 62) X X

Note: Components marked with “RAM” are provided on a Companion

CD for download into RAM rather than burned into Flash ROM.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

10 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Where to Find Information

This chapter describes your 700 Series Computer hardware, provides an

overview of the programs on your 700 Series Computer, and explains how

to connect your 700 Series Computer to a desktop computer, a network,

or the Internet. For instructions on setting up your 700 Series Computer

and installing ActiveSync, see the Quick Start Card. The following is a

guide to more information to assist you use your 700 Series Computer.

For information on: See this source:

Programs on your mobile computer. This chapter and mobile computer Help. To view Help,

tap Start →Help.

Additional programs that can be installed on the mobile

computer.

The Pocket PC Companion CD.

Connecting to and synchronizing with a desktop com-

puter.

The Quick Start Card or AutoSync Help on your desktop

computer. To view Help, click Help →Microsoft Acti-

veSync Help.

Last-minute updates and detailed technical information. The Read Me files, located in the Microsoft ActiveSync

folder on the desktop computer and on the Pocket PC

Companion CD.

Up-to-date information on your Pocket PC. http://www.microsoft.com/mobile/pocketpc

Pocket PC and many of the technologies supported by the 700 Series

Computer are not from Intermec Technologies. Many of the utilities and

features on a Pocket PC device come directly from Microsoft without any

modification from Intermec Technologies. There may be certain Micro-

soft-specific issues that Intermec Technologies would not be able to sup-

port, so you will have to contact Microsoft Corporation. Use these URLs

to determine your Microsoft support options:

Shttp://msdn.microsoft.com/support/

Shttp://support.microsoft.com/

Snews://news.microsoft.com (a free support option)

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

11700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Basic Skills

Learning to use your 700 Series Computer is easy. This describes the basic

concepts of using and customizing your 700 Series Computer.

Buttons and Stylus

Your 700 Series Computer has hardware buttons that control actions and

scroll functions, and a stylus for selecting items and entering information.

On the 700 Series Computer, the stylus replaces the mouse.

STap:

Touch the screen once with the stylus to open items and select options.

SDrag:

Hold the stylus on the screen and drag across the screen to select text

and images. Drag in a list to select multiple items.

STap and hold:

Tap and hold the stylus on an item to see a list of actions available for

that item. On the pop-up menu that appears, tap the action to be per-

formed.

Today Screen

When you turn on your 700 Series Computer for the first time each day

(or after four hours of inactivity), you will see the Today screen. You can

also display it by tapping the Start flag (shown left) and then Today.On

the Today screen, you can see at a glance important information for the

day.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

12 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Following are some of the status icons you may see:

Status Icon Meaning:

Turns all sounds on and off.

Backup battery is low.

Main batteries are charging.

Main batteries are low.

Main batteries are very low.

Main batteries are full.

Connection is active.

Synchronization is beginning or ending.

Synchronization is occurring.

Notification or one or more instant messages received.

Notification of one or more e-mail messages received.

If more notification icons need to be displayed than there is

room to display them, the Notification icon (shown left) will

display. Tap the icon to view all notification icons.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

13700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Programs

You can switch from one program to another by selecting it from the Start

menu. (You can customize which programs you see on this menu. For

information, see “Adjusting Settings” on page 26.) To access some

programs, tap Start →Programs, and then the program name.

You can also switch to some programs by pressing a program button. Your

700 Series Computer has one or more program buttons located on the

front or side of the computer. The icons on the buttons identify the pro-

grams to which they switch.

Note: Some programs have abbreviated labels for check boxes and drop-

down menus. To see the full spelling of an abbreviated label, tap and hold

the stylus on the label. Drag the stylus off the label so that the command is

not carried out.

The following is a partial list of programs that are on your 700 Series

Computer. Look on the Pocket PC Companion CD for additional pro-

grams that you can install onto your 700 Series Computer.

ActiveSync

Synchronize information between your 700 Series Computer and desktop

computer.

Calendar

Keep track of your appointments and create meeting requests.

Contacts

Keep track of your friends and colleagues.

Inbox

Send and receive e-mail messages.

Pocket Internet Explorer

Browse Web and WAP (Wireless Application Protocol) sites, and download

new programs and files from the Internet.

Notes

Create handwritten or typed notes, drawings, and recordings.

Tasks

Keep track of your tasks.

Pocket Excel

Create new workbooks or view and edit Excel workbooks created on your

desktop computer.

MSN Messenger

Send and receive instant messages with your MSN Messenger contacts.

Pocket Word

Create new documents or view and edit Word documents created on your

desktop computer.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

14 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Navigation Bar and Command Bar

The navigation bar is located at the top of the screen. It displays the active

program and current time, and allows you to switch to programs and close

screens.

Use the command bar at the bottom of the screen to perform tasks in pro-

grams. The command bar includes menu names, buttons, and the Input

Panel button. To create a new item in the current program, tap New.To

see the name of a button, tap and hold the stylus on the button. Drag the

stylus off the button so that the command is not carried out.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

15700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Pop-up Menus

With pop-up menus, you can quickly choose an action for an item. For

example, you can use the pop-up menu in the contact list to quickly delete

a contact, make a copy of a contact, or send an e-mail message to a con-

tact. The actions in the pop-up menus vary from program to program. To

access a pop-up menu, tap and hold the stylus on the item name that you

want to perform the action on. When the menu appears, lift the stylus,

and tap the action you want to perform. Or tap anywhere outside the

menu to close the menu without performing an action.

Notifications

Your 700 Series Computer reminds you in a variety of ways when you

have something to do. For example, if you have set up an appointment in

Calendar, a task with a due date in Tasks, or an alarm in Clock, you will be

notified in any of the following ways:

SA message box appears on the screen.

SA sound, which you can specify, is played.

SA light flashes on your 700 Series Computer.

SA vibrator resonates from the 700 Series Computer.

To choose reminder types and sounds for your 700 Series Computer, tap

Start →Settings →the Personal tab →Sounds & Notifications. The

options you choose here apply throughout the 700 Series Computer.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

16 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Enter Information on Your 700 Series Computer

You have several options for entering new information:

SUse the input panel to enter typed text, either by using the soft key-

board or other input method.

SWrite directly on the screen.

SDraw pictures on the screen.

SSpeak into your 700 Series Computer microphone to record a message.

SUse Microsoft ActiveSync to synchronize or copy information from

your desktop computer to your 700 Series Computer. For more infor-

mation on ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help on your desktop computer.

Use the input panel to enter information in any program on your 700

Series Computer. You can either type using the soft keyboard or write

using Block Recognizer,Letter Recognizer,orTranscriber. In either case,

the characters appear as typed text on the screen.

To show or hide the input panel, tap the Input Panel button. Tap the

arrow next to the Input Panel button to see your choices.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

17700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

When you use the input panel, your 700 Series Computer anticipates the

word you are typing or writing and displays it above the input panel.

When you tap the displayed word, it is inserted into your text at the

insertion point. The more you use your 700 Series Computer, the more

words it learns to anticipate.

Note: To change word suggestion options, such as the number of words

suggested at one time, tap Start →Settings →the Personal tab →Input

→the Word Completion tab.

Typing With the Soft Keyboard

1Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button, and then Keyboard.

2On the soft keyboard that is displayed, tap the keys with your stylus.

Using Block Recognizer

With Block Recognizer, you can input character strokes using the stylus

that are similar to those used on other 700 Series Computers.

1Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button, then Block Recognizer.

2Write a letter in the box.

When you write a letter, it is converted to typed text that appears on the

screen. For specific instructions on using Block Recognizer, with Block

Recognizer open, tap the question mark next to the writing area.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

18 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Using Letter Recognizer

With Letter Recognizer, you can write letters using the stylus just as you

would on paper.

1Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button, then Letter Recognizer.

2Write a letter in the box.

When you write a letter, it is converted to typed text that appears on the

screen. For specific instructions on using Letter Recognizer, with Letter

Recognizer open, tap the question mark next to the writing area.

Using Transcriber

With Transcriber, you can write anywhere on the screen using the stylus

just as you would on paper. Unlike Letter Recognizer and Block Recogniz-

er, you can write a sentence or more of information. Then, pause and let

Transcriber change the written characters to typed characters.

1Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button, and then Transcriber.

2Write anywhere on the screen.

For specific instructions on using Transcriber, with Transcriber open, tap

the question mark in the lower right hand corner of the screen.

Selecting Typed Text

If you want to edit or format typed text, you must select it first.

SDrag the stylus across the text you want to select.

You can cut, copy, and paste text by tapping and holding the selected

words and then tapping an editing command on the pop-up menu, or by

tapping the command on the Edit menu.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

19700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Writing on the Screen

In any program that accepts writing, such as the Notes program, and in

the Notes tab in Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks, you can use your stylus to

write directly on the screen. Write the way you do on paper. You can edit

and format what you have written and convert the information to text at a

later time.

STap t he Pen button to switch to writing mode. This action displays lines

on the screen to help you write.

Note: Some programs that accept writing may not have the Pen button.

See the documentation for that program to find out how to switch to writ-

ing mode.

Selecting the Writing

If you want to edit or format writing, you must select it first.

1Tap and hold the stylus next to the text you want to select until the in-

sertion point appears.

2Without lifting, drag the stylus across the text you want to select.

If you accidentally write on the screen, tap Tools →Undo and try again.

You can also select text by tapping the Pen button to deselect it and then

dragging the stylus across the screen.

You can cut, copy, and paste written text in the same way you work with

typed text: tap and hold the selected words and then tap an editing com-

mand on the pop-up menu, or tap the command on the Edit menu.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

20 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Converting Writing to Text

STap Tools →Recognize.

If you want to convert only certain words, select them before tapping Rec-

ognize on the Tools menu (or tap and hold the selected words and then tap

Recognize on the pop-up menu). If a word is not recognized, it is left as

writing.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

21700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

If the conversion is incorrect, you can select different words from a list of

alternates or return to the original writing. To do so, tap and hold the in-

correct word (tap one word at a time). On the pop-up menu, tap Alterna-

tes. A menu with a list of alternate words appears. Tap the word you want

to use, or tap the writing at the top of the menu to return to the original

writing.

Tips for getting good recognition:

SWrite neatly.

SWrite on the lines and draw descenders below the line. Write the cross

of the “t” and apostrophes below the top line so that they are not con-

fused with the word above. Write periods and commas above the line.

SFor better recognition, try increasing the zoom level to 300% using the

Tools menu.

SWrite the letters of a word closely and leave big gaps between words so

that the 700 Series Computer can easily tell where words begin and end.

SHyphenated words, foreign words that use special characters such as ac-

cents, and some punctuation cannot be converted.

SIf you add writing to a word to change it (such as changing a “3” to an

“8”) after you attempt to recognize the word, the writing you add will

not be included if you attempt to recognize the writing again.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

22 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Drawing on the Screen

You can draw on the screen in the same way that you write on the screen.

The difference between writing and drawing on the screen is how you se-

lect items and how they can be edited. For example, selected drawings can

be resized, while writing cannot.

Creating a Drawing

SCross three ruled lines on your first stroke. A drawing box appears. Sub-

sequent strokes in or touching the drawing box become part of the dra-

wing. Drawings that do not cross three ruled lines will be treated as

writing.

Note: You may want to change the zoom level so that you can more easily

work on or view your drawing. Tap Tools and then a zoom level.

Selecting a Drawing

If you want to edit or format a drawing, you must select it first.

STap and hold the stylus on the drawing until the selection handle ap-

pears. To select multiple drawings, deselect the Pen button and then

drag to select the drawings you want.

You can cut, copy, and paste selected drawings by tapping and holding the

selected drawing and then tapping an editing command on the pop-up

menu, or by tapping the command on the Edit menu. To resize a drawing,

make sure the Pen button is not selected, and drag a selection handle.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

23700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Recording a Message

In any program where you can write or draw on the screen, you can also

quickly capture thoughts, reminders, and phone numbers by recording a

message. In Calendar, Tasks, and Contacts, you can include a recording in

the Notes tab. In the Notes program, you can create a stand-alone record-

ing or include a recording in a written note. If you want to include the re-

cording in a note, open the note first. In the Inbox program, you can add a

recording to an e-mail message.

Creating a Recording

1Hold your computer’ s microphone near your mouth or source of

sound.

2Press and hold the Record hardware button on your 700 Series Com-

puter until you hear a beep.

3While holding down the Record button, make your recording.

4To stop recording, release the Record button. Two beeps will sound.

The new recording appears in the note list or as an embedded icon.

Note: You can also make a recording by tapping the Record button on the

Recording toolbar.

To play a recording, tap it in the list or tap its icon in the note.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

24 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Using My Text

When using Inbox or MSN Messenger, use My Text to quickly insert pre-

set or frequently used messages into the text entry area. To insert a mes-

sage, tap My Text and tap a message.

Note: You can add text after inserting a My Text message before sending

it.

To edit a My Text message, in the Tools menu, tap Edit →My Text Mes-

sages. Select the message you wish to edit and make desired changes.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

25700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Finding and Organizing Information

The Find feature on your 700 Series Computer helps you quickly locate

information.

Tap Start →Find. Enter the text you want to find, select a data type, and

then tap Go to initiate the search.

Note: To quickly find information that is taking up storage space on your

700 Series Computer, select Larger than 64 KB in Type.

You can also use the File Explorer to find files on your 700 Series Comput-

er and to organize these files into folders. Tap Start →Programs →File

Explorer.

Note: You can move files in File Explorer by tapping and holding the item

you want to move, and then tapping Cut or Copy and Paste on the pop-

up menu.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

26 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Customizing Your 700 Series Computer

You can customize your 700 Series Computer by adjusting settings and

installing additional software.

Adjusting Settings

You can adjust settings to suit the way you work. To see available options,

tap Start →Settings →either the Personal tab or the System tab located at

the bottom of the screen. You might want to adjust the following:

SClock:

To change the time or to set alarms.

SMenus:

To customize what appears on the Start menu, and to enable a pop-up

menu from the New button.

SOwner Information:

To enter your contact information.

SPassword:

To limit access to your 700 Series Computer.

SPower:

To maximize battery life.

SToday:

To customize the look and information displayed on the Today screen.

Adding or Removing Programs

Programs added to your 700 Series Computer at the factory are stored in

ROM (Read Only Memory). You cannot remove this software, and you

will never accidentally lose ROM contents. ROM programs can be up-

dated using special installation programs with a *.XIP extension. All other

programs and data files added to your 700 Series Computer after factory

installation are stored in RAM (Random Access Memory).

You can install any program created for your 700 Series Computer, as long

as your 700 Series Computer has enough memory. The most popular place

to find software for your 700 Series Computer is on the Pocket PC Web

site (http://www.microsoft.com/mobile/pocketpc).

Adding Programs Using ActiveSync

You will need to install the appropriate software for your 700 Series Com-

puter on your desktop computer before installing it on your 700 Series

Computer.

1Determine your 700 Series Computer and processor type so that you

know which version of the software to install. Tap Start →Settings →

the System tab →About →the Version tab, then make a note of the

information in Processor.

2Download the program to your desktop computer (or insert the CD or

disk that contains the program into your desktop computer). You may

see a single *.XIP, *.EXE, or *.ZIP file, a SETUP.EXE file, or several

versions of files for different 700 Series Computer types and processors.

Be sure to select the program designed for the Pocket PC and your 700

Series Computer processor type.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

27700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

3Read any installation instructions, Read Me files, or documentation that

comes with the program. Many programs provide special installation

instructions.

4Connect your 700 Series Computer and desktop computer.

5Double-click the *.EXE file.

SIf the file is an installer, the installation wizard will begin. Follow the

directions on the screen. Once the software has been installed on your

desktop computer, the installer will automatically transfer the soft-

ware to your 700 Series Computer.

SIf the file is not an installer, you will see an error message stating that

the program is valid but it is designed for a different type of comput-

er. You will need to move this file to your 700 Series Computer. If

you cannot find any installation instructions for the program in the

Read Me file or documentation, use ActiveSync Explore to copy the

program file to the Program Files folder on your 700 Series Comput-

er. For more information on copying files using ActiveSync, see Acti-

veSync Help.

Once installation is complete, tap Start →Programs, and then the pro-

gram icon to switch to it.

Adding a Program Directly from the Internet

1Determine your 700 Series Computer and processor type so that you

know which version of the software to install. Tap Start →Settings →

the System tab →About →the Version tab, then make a note of the

information in Processor.

2Download the program to your 700 Series Computer straight from the

Internet using Pocket Internet Explorer. You may see a single *.XIP,

*.EXE, or *.ZIP file, a SETUP.EXE file, or several versions of files for

different 700 Series Computer types and processors. Be sure to select the

program designed for the Pocket PC and your 700 Series Computer

processor type.

3Read any installation instructions, Read Me files, or documentation that

comes with the program. Many programs provide installation instruc-

tions.

4Tap the file, such as a *.XIP or *.EXE file. The installation wizard will

begin. Follow the directions on the screen.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

28 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Adding a Program to the Start Menu

Tap Start →Settings →Menus →the Start Menu tab, and then the check

box for the program. If you do not see the program listed, you can either

use File Explorer on the 700 Series Computer to move the program to the

Start Menu folder, or use ActiveSync on the desktop computer to create a

shortcut to the program and place the shortcut in the Start Menu folder.

SUsing File Explorer on the 700 Series Computer:

Tap Start →Programs →File Explorer, and locate the program (tap the

folder list, labeled My Documents by default, and then My Device to

see a list of all folders on the 700 Series Computer). Tap and hold the

program and tap Cut on the pop-up menu. Open the Start Menu fold-

er located in the Windows folder, tap and hold a blank area of the win-

dow, and tap Paste on the pop-up menu. The program will now appear

on the Start menu. For more information on using File Explorer, see

“Finding and Organizing Information” on page 25.

SUsing ActiveSync on the desktop computer:

Use the Explorer in ActiveSync to explore your 700 Series Computer

files and locate the program. Right-click the program, and then click

Create Shortcut. Move the shortcut to the Start Menu folder in the

Windows folder. The shortcut now appears on the Start menu. For

more information, see ActiveSync Help.

Removing Programs

STap Start →Settings →the System tab →Remove Programs.

If the program does not appear in the list of installed programs, use File

Explorer on your 700 Series Computer to locate the program, tap and hold

the program, and then tap Delete on the pop-up menu.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

29700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Microsoft ActiveSync

Visit the following Microsoft Web site for the latest in updates, technical

information, and samples:

Shttp://www.microsoft.com/mobile/pocketpc/downloads/activesync.asp

Using Microsoft ActiveSync, you can synchronize the information on your

desktop computer with the information on your 700 Series Computer.

Synchronization compares the data on your 700 Series Computer with

your desktop computer and updates both computers with the most recent

information. For example:

SKeep Pocket Outlook data up-to-date by synchronizing your 700 Series

Computer with Microsoft Outlook data on your desktop computer.

SSynchronize Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel files between your

700 Series Computer and desktop computer. Your files are automatically

converted to the correct format

Note: By default, ActiveSync does not automatically synchronize all types

of information. Use ActiveSync options to turn synchronization on and off

for specific information types.

With ActiveSync, you can also:

SBack up and restore your 700 Series Computer data.

SCopy (rather than synchronize) files between your 700 Series Computer

and desktop computer.

SControl when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization

mode. For example, you can synchronize continually while connected to

your desktop computer or only when you choose the synchronize com-

mand.

SSelect which information types are synchronized and control how much

data is synchronized. For example, you can choose how many weeks of

past appointments you want synchronized.

Before you begin synchronization, install ActiveSync on your desktop

computer from the Pocket PC Companion CD. For more information on

installing ActiveSync, see your Quick Start card. ActiveSync is already

installed on your 700 Series Computer.

After installation is complete, the ActiveSync Setup Wizard helps you con-

nect your 700 Series Computer to your desktop computer, set up a part-

nership so you can synchronize information between your 700 Series

Computer and your desktop computer, and customize your synchroniza-

tion settings. Your first synchronization process will automatically begin

when you finish using the wizard.

After your first synchronization, take a look at Calendar, Contacts, and

Tasks on your 700 Series Computer. You will notice that information you

have stored in Microsoft Outlook on your desktop computer has been

copied to your 700 Series Computer, and you did not have to type a word.

Disconnect your 700 Series Computer from your computer and you are

ready to go!

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

30 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Once you have set up ActiveSync and completed the first synchronization

process, you can initiate synchronization from your 700 Series Computer.

To switch to ActiveSync on your 700 Series Computer, tap Start →

ActiveSync. Note that if you have a wireless LAN card, you can

synchronize remotely from your 700 Series Computer.

For information about using ActiveSync on your desktop computer, start

ActiveSync on your desktop computer, and then see ActiveSync Help.

For more information about ActiveSync on your 700 Series Computer,

switch to ActiveSync, then tap Start →Help.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

31700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Microsoft Pocket Outlook

Note: The Professional Edition of Microsoft Pocket Outlook does not in-

clude a spell checker.

Microsoft Pocket Outlook includes Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, Inbox, and

Notes. You can use these programs individually or together. For example,

e-mail addresses stored in Contacts can be used to address e-mail messages

in Inbox.

Using ActiveSync, you can synchronize information in Microsoft Outlook

or Microsoft Exchange on your desktop computer with your 700 Series

Computer. You can also synchronize this information directly with a

Microsoft Exchange server. Each time you synchronize, ActiveSync

compares the changes you made on your 700 Series Computer and desk-

top computer or server and updates both computers with the latest in-

formation. For information on using ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help on

the desktop computer.

You can switch to any of these programs by tapping them on the Start

menu.

Calendar: Scheduling Appointments and Meetings

Use Calendar to schedule appointments, including meetings and other

events. You can check your appointments in one of several views (Agenda,

Day, Week, Month, and Year) and easily switch views by using the View

menu.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

32 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Note: You can customize the Calendar display, such as changing the first

day of the week, by tapping Options on the Tools menu.

Creating an Appointment

1If you are in Day or Week view, tap the desired date and time for the

appointment.

2Tap New.

3Using the input panel, enter a description and a location. Tap first to

select the field.

4If needed, tap the date and time to change them.

5Enter other desired information. You will need to hide the input panel

to see all available fields.

6To add notes, tap the Notes tab. You can enter text, draw, or create a

recording. For more information on creating notes, see “Notes: Capturing

Thoughts and Ideas” on page 40.

7When finished, tap OK to return to the calendar.

Note:IfyouselectRemind me in an appointment, your 700 Series Com-

puter will remind you according to the options set in Start →Settings →

the Personal tab →Sounds & Reminders.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

33700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Using the Summary Screen

When you tap an appointment in Calendar, a summary screen is displayed.

To change the appointment, tap Edit.

Creating Meeting Requests

You can use Calendar to set up meetings with users of Outlook or Pocket

Outlook. The meeting request will be created automatically and sent either

when you synchronize Inbox or when you connect to your e-mail server.

Indicate how you want meeting requests sent by tapping Tools →

Options. If you send and receive e-mail messages through ActiveSync,

select ActiveSync.

Scheduling a Meeting

1Create an appointment.

2In the appointment details, hide the input panel, and then tap

Attendees.

3From the list of e-mail addresses you have entered in Contacts, select the

meeting attendees.

The meeting notice is created automatically and placed in the Outbox

folder.

For more information on sending and receiving meeting requests, see Cal-

endar Help and Inbox Help on the 700 Series Computer.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

34 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Contacts: Tracking Friends and Colleagues

Contacts maintains a list of your friends and colleagues so that you can

easily find the information you are looking for, whether you are at home

or on the road. Using the 700 Series Computer infrared (IR) port, you can

quickly share Contacts information with other 700 Series Computer users.

Note: To change the way information is displayed in the list, tap Tools →

Options.

Creating a Contact

1Tap New.

2Using the input panel, enter a name and other contact information. You

will need to scroll down to see all available fields.

3To assign the contact to a category, scroll to and tap Categories and se-

lect a category from the list. In the contact list, you can display contacts

by category.

4To add notes, tap the Notes tab. You can enter text, draw, or create a

recording. For more information on creating notes, see “Notes: Capturing

Thoughts and Ideas” on page 40.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

35700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

5When finished, tap OK to return to the contact list.

Finding a Contact

There are four ways to find a contact:

SIn the contact list, enter a contact name in the box under the navigation

bar. To show all contacts again, clear text from the box or tap the button

to the right of the box.

SIn the contact list, tap the category list (labeled All Contacts by default)

and select the type of contact that you want displayed. To show all con-

tacts again, select All Contacts. To view a contact not assigned to a cate-

gory, select None.

STo view the names of companies your contacts work for, in the contact

list, tap View →By Company. The number of contacts that work for

that company will be displayed to the right of the company name.

STap Start →Find, enter the contact name, select Contacts for the type,

and then tap Go.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

36 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Using the Summary Screen

When you tap a contact in the contact list, a summary screen is displayed.

To change the contact information, tap Edit.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

37700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Tasks: Keeping a To Do List

Use Tasks to keep track of what you have to do.

Note: To change the way information is displayed in the list, tap Tools →

Options.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

38 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Creating a Task

1Tap New.

2Using the input panel, enter a description.

3You can enter a start date and due date or enter other information by

first tapping the field. If the input panel is open, you will need to hide it

to see all available fields.

4To assign the task to a category, tap Categories and select a category

from the list. In the task list, you can display tasks by category.

5To add notes, tap the Notes tab. You can enter text, draw, or create a

recording. For more information on creating notes, see “Notes: Capturing

Thoughts and Ideas” on page 40.

6When finished, tap OK to return to the task list.

Note: To quickly create a task with only a subject, tap Entry Bar on the

Tools menu. Then, tap Tap here to add a new task and enter your task

information.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

39700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Using the Summary Screen

When you tap a task in the task list, a summary screen is displayed. To

change the task, tap Edit.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

40 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Notes: Capturing Thoughts and Ideas

Quickly capture thoughts, reminders, ideas, drawings, and phone numbers

with Notes. You can create a written note or a recording. You can also in-

clude a recording in a note. If a note is open when you create the record-

ing, it will be included in the note as an icon. If the note list is displayed, it

will be created as a stand-alone recording.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

41700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Creating a Note

1Tap New.

2Create your note by writing, drawing, typing, and recording. For more

information about using the input panel, writing and drawing on the

screen, and creating recordings, see “Basic Skills” on page 11.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

42 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Inbox: Sending and Receiving E-mail Messages

Use Inbox to send and receive e-mail messages in either of these ways:

SSynchronize e-mail messages with Microsoft Exchange or Microsoft

Outlook on your desktop computer.

SSend and receive e-mail messages by connecting directly to an e-mail

server through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or a network.

Synchronizing E-mail Messages

E-mail messages can be synchronized as part of the general synchronization

process. You will need to enable Inbox synchronization in ActiveSync. For

information on enabling Inbox synchronization, see ActiveSync Help on the

desktop computer. During synchronization:

SMessages are copied from the mail folders of Exchange or Outlook on

your desktop computer to the ActiveSync folder in Inbox on your 700

Series Computer. By default, you will receive messages from the past

three days only, the first 100 lines of each message, and file attachments

of less than 100 KB in size.

SE-mail messages in the Outbox folder on your 700 Series Computer are

transferred to Exchange or Outlook, and then sent from those pro-

grams.

SE-mail messages in subfolders must be selected in ActiveSync on your

desktop computer in order to be transferred.

Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server

In addition to synchronizing e-mail messages with your desktop computer,

you can send and receive e-mail messages by connecting to an e-mail server

using a modem or network card connected to your 700 Series Computer.

You will need to set up a remote connection to a network or an ISP, and a

connection to your e-mail server. For more information, see “Getting Con-

nected” on page 67.

When you connect to the e-mail server, new messages are downloaded to

the 700 Series Computer Inbox folder, messages in the 700 Series Com-

puter Outbox folder are sent, and messages that have been deleted on the

e-mail server are removed from the 700 Series Computer Inbox folder.

Messages that you receive directly from an e-mail server are linked to your

e-mail server rather than your desktop computer. When you delete a mes-

sage on your 700 Series Computer, it is also deleted from the e-mail server

the next time you connect based on the settings selected in ActiveSync.

You can work online or offline. When working online, you read and re-

spond to messages while connected to the e-mail server. Messages are sent

as soon as you tap Send, which saves space on your 700 Series Computer.

When working offline, once you have downloaded new message headers or

partial messages, you can disconnect from the e-mail server and then de-

cide which messages to download completely. The next time you connect,

Inbox downloads the complete messages you have marked for retrieval and

sends the messages you have composed.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

43700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Using the Message List

Messages you receive are displayed in the message list. By default, the most

recently received messages are displayed first in the list.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

44 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

When you receive a message, tap it to open it. Unread messages are dis-

played in bold.

When you connect to your e-mail server or synchronize with your desktop

computer, by default, you will receive messages from the last five days

only, the first 100 lines of each new message, and file attachments of less

than 100 KB in size. The original messages remain on the e-mail server or

your desktop computer.

You can mark the messages that you want to retrieve in full during your

next synchronization or e-mail server connection. In the message list, tap

and hold the message you want to retrieve. On the pop-up menu, tap

Mark for Download. The icons in the Inbox message list give you visual

indications of message status.

You specify your downloading preferences when you set up the service or

select your synchronization options. You can change them at any time:

SChange options for Inbox synchronization using ActiveSync options.

For more information, see ActiveSync Help.

SChange options for direct e-mail server connections in Inbox on your

700 Series Computer. Tap Tools →Options →the Service tab, then

tap the service you want to change. Tap and hold the service and select

Delete to remove a service.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

45700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Composing Messages

To compose a message:

1Tap New.

2In the To field, enter an e-mail or SMS address of one or more recipi-

ents, separating them with a semicolon, or select a name from the con-

tact list by tapping the Address Book button. All e-mail addresses en-

tered in the e-mail fields in Contacts appear in the Address Book.

3Compose your message. To enter preset or frequently used messages, tap

My Text and select a message.

4Tap Send when you have finished the message. If you are working of-

fline, the message is moved to the Outbox folder and will be sent the

next time you connect.

If you are sending an SMS message and want to know if it was received,

tap Edit →Options →Request SMS text message delivery notification

before sending the message.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

46 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Managing E-mail Messages and Folders

By default, messages are displayed in one of five folders for each service

you have created: Inbox, Deleted Items, Drafts, Outbox, and Sent Items.

The Deleted Items folder contains messages that have been deleted on the

700 Series Computer. The behavior of the Deleted and Sent Items folders

depends on the options you have chosen. In the message list, tap Tools →

Options →the Message tab, then select your options.

If you want to organize messages into additional folders, tap Tools →

Manage Folders to create new folders. To move a message to another fold-

er, in the message list, tap and hold the message and then tap Move to on

the pop-up menu.

Folder Behavior With a Direct Connection to an E-mail Server

The behavior of the folders you create depends on whether you are using

ActiveSync, SMS, POP3, or IMAP4.

SIf you use ActiveSync:

E-mail messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook will automatically be

synchronized with your 700 Series Computer. You can select to syn-

chronize additional folders by designating them for ActiveSync. The

folders you create and the messages you move will then be mirrored on

the server. For example, if you move two messages from the Inbox fold-

er to a folder named Family, and you have designated Family for syn-

chronization, the server creates a copy of the Family folder and copies

the messages into that folder. You can then read the messages while away

from your desktop computer.

SIf you use SMS:

Messages are stored in the Inbox folder.

SIf you use POP3:

and you move e-mail messages to a folder you created, the link is broken

between the messages on the 700 Series Computer and their copies on

the mail server. The next time you connect, the mail server will see that

the messages are missing from the 700 Series Computer Inbox and de-

lete them from the server. This prevents you from having duplicate cop-

ies of a message, but it also means that you will no longer have access to

messages that you move to folders created from anywhere except the

700 Series Computer.

SIf you use IMAP4:

The folders you create and the e-mail messages you move are mirrored

on the server. Therefore, messages are available to you anytime you con-

nect to your mail server, whether it is from your 700 Series Computer

or desktop computer. This synchronization of folders occurs whenever

you connect to your mail server, create new folders, or rename/delete

folders when connected.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

47700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Companion Programs

The companion programs consist of Microsoft Pocket Word, Microsoft

Pocket Excel, Windows Media Player for Pocket PC, and Microsoft

Reader. To switch to a companion program on your 700 Series Computer,

tap Start →Programs, then tap the program name.

Pocket Word

Pocket Word works with Microsoft Word on your desktop computer to

give you easy access to copies of your documents. You can create new doc-

uments on your 700 Series Computer, or you can copy documents from

your desktop computer to your 700 Series Computer. Synchronize docu-

ments between your desktop computer and your 700 Series Computer so

that you have the most up-to-date content in both locations.

Creating a Document

Use Pocket Word to create documents, such as letters, meeting minutes,

and trip reports. To create a new file, tap Start →Programs →Pocket

Word →New. A blank document appears. Or, if you have selected a tem-

plate for new documents in the Options dialog box, that template appears

with appropriate text and formatting already provided. You can open only

one document at a time; when you open a second document, you will be

asked to save the first. You can save a document you create or edit in a va-

riety of formats, including Word (.DOC), Pocket Word (.PSW), Rich Text

Format (.RTF), and Plain Text (.TXT).

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

48 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Pocket Word contains a list of the files stored on your 700 Series Comput-

er. Tap a file in the list to open it. To delete, make copies of, and send files,

tap and hold a file in the list. Then, select the appropriate action on the

pop-up menu.

You can enter information in Pocket Word in one of four modes (typing,

writing, drawing, and recording), which are displayed on the View menu.

Each mode has its own toolbar, which you can show and hide by tapping

the Show/Hide Toolbar button on the command bar.

Note: You can change the zoom magnification by tapping View →Zoom,

then select the percentage you want. Select a higher percentage to enter

text and a lower one to see more of your document.

If you are opening a Word document created on a desktop computer, select

Wrap to Window on the View menu so that you can see the entire

document.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

49700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Typing Mode

Using the input panel, enter typed text into the document. For more infor-

mation on entering typed text, see “Basic Skills” on page 11.

To format existing text and to edit text, first select the text. You can select

text as you do in a Word document, using your stylus instead of the mouse

to drag through the text you want to select. You can search a document to

find text by tapping Edit →Find/Replace.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

50 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Writing Mode

In writing mode, use your stylus to write directly on the screen. Ruled

lines are displayed as a guide, and the zoom magnification is greater than

in typing mode to allow you to write more easily. For more information on

writing and selecting writing, see “Basic Skills” on page 11.

Note: If you cross three ruled lines in a single stylus stroke, the writing

becomes a drawing, and can be edited and manipulated as described in

“Drawing Mode” on the next page.

Written words are converted to graphics (metafiles) when a Pocket Word

document is converted to a Word document on your desktop computer.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

51700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Drawing Mode

In drawing mode, use your stylus to draw on the screen. Grid lines appear

as a guide. When you lift your stylus off the screen after the first stroke,

you will see a drawing box indicating the boundaries of the drawing. Every

subsequent stroke within or touching the drawing box becomes part of the

drawing. For more information on drawing and selecting drawings, see

“Basic Skills” on page 11.

Recording Mode

In recording mode, embed a recording into your document. Recordings are

saved as .WAV files. For more information on recording, see “Basic Skills”

on page 11.

For more information on using Pocket Word, tap Start →Help.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

52 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Pocket Excel

Pocket Excel works with Microsoft Excel on your desktop computer to

give you easy access to copies of your workbooks. You can create new

workbooks on your 700 Series Computer, or you can copy workbooks

from your desktop computer to your 700 Series Computer. Synchronize

workbooks between your desktop computer and your 700 Series Comput-

er so that you have the most up-to-date content in both locations.

Creating a Workbook

Use Pocket Excel to create workbooks, such as expense reports and mileage

logs. To create a new file, tap Start →Programs →Pocket Excel →New.

A blank workbook appears. Or, if you have selected a template for new

workbooks in the Options dialog box, that template appears with

appropriate text and formatting already provided. You can open only one

workbook at a time; when you open a second workbook, you will be asked

to save the first. You can save a workbook you create or edit in a variety of

formats, including Pocket Excel (.PXL) and Excel (.XLS).

Pocket Excel contains a list of the files stored on your 700 Series Comput-

er. Tap a file in the list to open it. To delete, make copies of, and send files,

tap and hold a file in the list. Then select the appropriate action from the

pop-up menu.

Pocket Excel provides fundamental spreadsheet tools, such as formulas,

functions, sorting, and filtering. To display the toolbar, tap View →

Toolbar.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

53700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Note: If your workbook contains sensitive information, you can protect it

with a password. To do so, open the workbook, tap Edit →Password.Ev-

ery time you open the workbook, you will need to enter the password, so

choose one that is easy for you to remember but hard for others to guess.

Tips for Working in Pocket Excel

Note the following when working in large worksheets in Pocket Excel:

SView in full-screen mode to see as much of your worksheet as possible.

Tap View →Full Screen. To exit full-screen mode, tap Restore.

SShow and hide window elements. Tap View and then tap the elements

youwanttoshoworhide.

SFreeze panes on a worksheet. First select the cell where you want to

freeze panes. Tap View →Freeze Panes. You might want to freeze the

top and leftmost panes in a worksheet to keep row and column labels

visible as you scroll through a sheet.

SSplit panes to view different areas of a large worksheet. Tap View →

Split. Then drag the split bar to where you want it. To remove the split,

tap View →Remove Split.

SShow and hide rows and columns. To hide a hidden row or column, se-

lect a cell in the row or column you want to hide. Then tap Format ,

Row or Column →Hide. To show a hidden row or column, tap Tools

→Go To, and then type a reference that is in the hidden row or co-

lumn. Then tap Format →Row or Column →Unhide.

For more information on using Pocket Excel, tap Start →Help.

MSN Messenger

Note: MSN Messenger is only available on the Premium Edition of Pocket

PC 2002.

MSN Messenger on your 700 Series Computer is an instant messaging

program that lets you:

SSee who is online.

SSend and receive instant messages.

SHave instant message conversations with groups of contacts.

To use MSN Messenger, you must have a Microsoft Passport account or a

Microsoft Exchange e-mail account. You must have a Passport to use MSN

Messenger Service. If you have a Hotmail or MSN account, you already

have a Passport. Once you have obtained either a Microsoft Passport or a

Microsoft Exchange account, you are ready to set up your account.

SSign up for a Microsoft Passport account at http://www.passport.com.

SGet a free Microsoft Hotmail e-mail address at http://www.hotmail.com.

To switch to MSN Messenger, tap Start →Programs →MSN Messenger.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

54 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Setting Up

Before you can connect, you must enter Passport or Exchange account in-

formation. To set up an account and sign in:

1In the Tools menu, tap Options.

2In the Accounts tab, enter your Passport or Exchange account informa-

tion.

3To sign in, tap the sign-in screen and enter your e-mail address and pass-

word.

Note: If you already use MSN Messenger on your desktop computer, your

contacts will show up on your 700 Series Computer without being added

again.

Working with Contacts

The MSN Messenger window shows all of your messenger contacts at a

glance, divided into Online and Not Online categories. From this view,

while connected, you can chat, send e-mail, block the contact from chat-

ting with you, or delete contacts from your list using the pop-up menu.

Note: To see others online without being seen, in the Tools menu, tap My

Status →Appear Offline.

If you block a contact, you will appear offline but will remain on the

blocked contact’ s list. To unblock a contact, tap and hold the contact, then

tap Unblock on the pop-up menu.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

55700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Chatting with Contacts

Tap a contact name to open a chat window. Enter your message in the text

entry area at the bottom of the screen, or tap My Text to enter a preset

message, and tap Send. To invite another contact to a multi-user chat, in

the Tools menu, tap Invite and tap the contact you want to invite.

Note: To switch back to the main window without closing a chat, tap the

Contacts button. To revert back to your chat window, tap Chats and select

the person whom you were chatting with.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

56 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

To know if the contact you are chatting with is responding, look for the

message under the text entry area.

For more information on using MSN Messenger, tap Start →Help.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

57700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Windows Media Player for Pocket PC

Use Microsoft Windows Media Player for Pocket PC to play digital audio

and video files that are stored on your 700 Series Computer or on a net-

work. To switch to Windows Media Player for Pocket PC, tap Start →

Programs →Windows Media.

Use Microsoft Windows Media Player on your desktop computer to copy

digital audio and video files to your Pocket PC. You can play Windows

Media and MP3 files on your Pocket PC.

For more information about using Windows Media Player for Pocket PC,

tap Start →Help.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

58 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Microsoft Reader

Use Microsoft Reader to read eBooks on your 700 Series Computer.

Download books to your desktop computer from your favorite eBook Web

site. Then, use ActiveSync to copy the book files to your activated 700 Se-

ries Computer. The books appear in the Reader Library, where you can tap

them in the list to open them. Each book consists of a cover page, an op-

tional table of contents, and the pages of the book. You can:

SPage through the book by using the Up/Down control on your 700 Se-

ries Computer or by tapping the page number on each page.

SAnnotate the book with highlighting, bookmarks, notes, and drawings.

SSearch for text and look up definitions for words.

The Guidebook contains all the information you will need to use the soft-

ware. To open the Guidebook, tap Help on the Reader command bar. Or,

on a book page, tap and hold on the book title, and then tap Help on the

pop-up menu. To switch to Microsoft Reader, tap Start →Programs →

Microsoft Reader.

Getting Books on Your 700 Series Computer

You can download book files from the Web. Just visit your favorite eBook

retailer and follow the instructions to download the book files.

Sample books and a dictionary are also included in the MSReader folder in

the Extras folder on the Pocket PC Companion CD.

Use ActiveSync to download the files from your desktop computer to your

activated mobile computer as described in the Read Me file in the

MSReader folder.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

59700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Using the Library

The Library is your Reader home page; it displays a list of all books stored

on your 700 Series Computer or storage card. To open the Library:

1On the Reader command bar, tap Library.

2On a book page, tap the book title, then tap Library on the pop-up

menu.

3To open a book, tap its title in the Library list.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

60 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Reading a Book

Each book consists of a cover page, an optional table of contents, and the

pages of the book. Navigation options are listed in the bottom portion of

the cover page.

The first time you open a book, you will probably want to go to the first

page or to the table of contents, if there is one. Subsequently, whenever

you open the book, you will be automatically taken to the last page read.

In addition to the text, each book page includes a page number and book

title.

You can also page through a book by using the Up/Down control on your

700 Series Computer.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

61700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Using Reader Features

Reading a book electronically gives you several options not available with

paper books. These options are available from any book page.

Select text by dragging across the text on the page. Then, tap an option on

the pop-up menu, as described here:

SSearching for Text

Find text in a book by tapping Find on the pop-up menu. Enter the

word you want to search for, and tap the desired Find option. Reader

highlights found text on the page. To close Find, tap outside the box.

To return to your original page, tap the title and then tap Return on the

pop-up menu.

SCopying Text

You can copy text from books that support this feature into any pro-

gram that accepts text. On a book page, select the text you want to copy.

Then, tap Copy Text on the pop-up menu. The text can be pasted into

the program of your choice.

SAdding Bookmarks

When you add a bookmark to a book, a color-coded bookmark icon

appears in the right margin. You can add multiple bookmarks to a book.

Then, from anywhere in the book, tap the bookmark icon to go to the

bookmarked page.

SHighlighting Text

When you highlight text, it appears with a colored background.

SAttaching Notes to Text

When you attach a note to text, you enter the text in a notepad that ap-

pears on top of the book page. A Note icon will display in the left mar-

gin. To show or hide the note, tap the icon.

SAdding Drawings

When you add a drawing, a Drawing icon appears in the bottom-left

corner of the page, and drawing tools appear across the bottom of the

page. Draw by dragging your stylus.

SAnnotations Index

To see a list of a book’ s annotations, including bookmarks, highlights,

text notes, and drawings, tap Annotations Index on the book’ s cover

page. You can tap an entry in the list to go to the annotated page.

Removing a Book

When you finish reading a book, you can delete it to conserve space on

your 700 Series Computer. If a copy of the book is stored on your desktop

computer, you can download it again at any time.

To remove a book from your 700 Series Computer, tap and hold the title

in the Library list, and then tap Delete on the pop-up menu.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

62 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Pocket Internet Explorer

Note: The Professional Edition of Pocket Internet Explorer does not sup-

port WAP pages.

Use Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer to view Web or WAP pages in ei-

ther of these ways:

SDuring synchronization with your desktop computer, download your

favorite links and mobile favorites that are stored in the Mobile Favor-

ites subfolder in Internet Explorer on the desktop computer.

SConnect to an ISP or network and browse the Web. To do this, you will

need to create the connection first, as described in “Getting Connected”

on page 67.

When connected to an ISP or network, you can also download files and

programs from the Internet or intranet.

To switch to Pocket Internet Explorer, tap Start →Internet Explorer.

The Mobile Favorites Folder

Only items stored in the Mobile Favorites subfolder in the Favorites folder

in Internet Explorer on your desktop computer will be synchronized with

your 700 Series Computer. This folder was created automatically when

you installed ActiveSync.

Favorite Links

During synchronization, the list of favorite links in the Mobile Favorites

folder on your desktop computer is synchronized with Pocket Internet Ex-

plorer on your 700 Series Computer. Both computers are updated with

changes made to either list each time you synchronize. Unless you mark

the favorite link as a mobile favorite, only the link will be downloaded to

your 700 Series Computer, and you will need to connect to your ISP or

network to view the content. For more information on synchronization,

see ActiveSync Help on the desktop computer.

Mobile Favorites

If you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or later on your desktop

computer, you can download mobile favorites to your 700 Series Comput-

er. Synchronizing mobile favorites downloads Web content to your 700

Series Computer so that you can view pages while you are disconnected

from your ISP and desktop computer.

Use the Internet Explorer plug-in installed with ActiveSync to create mo-

bile favorites quickly. To create a mobile favorite:

1In Internet Explorer on your desktop computer, click Tools →Create

Mobile Favorite.

2To change the link name, enter a new name in the Name box.

3Optionally, in Update, select a desired update schedule.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

63700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

4Click OK. Internet Explorer downloads the latest version of the page to

your desktop computer.

5If you want to download the pages that are linked to the mobile favorite

you just created, in Internet Explorer on the desktop computer,

right-click the mobile favorite just created and then click Properties.In

the Download tab, specify the number of links deep you want to

download. To conserve 700 Series Computer memory, go only one level

deep.

6Synchronize your 700 Series Computer and desktop computer. Mobile

favorites that are stored in the Mobile Favorites folder in Internet Ex-

plorer are downloaded to your 700 Series Computer.

Note: If you did not specify an update schedule in step 3 above, you will

need to manually download content to keep the information updated on

your desktop computer and 700 Series Computer. Before synchronizing

with your 700 Series Computer, in Internet Explorer on your desktop

computer, click Tools →Synchronize. You will see the last time content

was downloaded to the desktop computer, and you can manually download

content if needed.

You can add a button to the Internet Explorer toolbar for creating mobile

favorites. In Internet Explorer on your desktop computer, click View →

Toolbars →Customize.

Mobile favorites take up storage memory on your 700 Series Computer.

To minimize the amount of memory used:

SIn the settings for the Favorites information, type in ActiveSync options,

turn off pictures and sounds, or stop some mobile favorites from being

downloaded to the 700 Series Computer. For more information, see Ac-

tiveSync Help.

SLimit the number of downloaded linked pages. In Internet Explorer on

the desktop computer, right-click the mobile favorite you want to

change and then Properties.IntheDownload tab, specify “0” or “1” for

the number of linked pages you want to download.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

64 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Using AvantGo Channels

AvantGo is a free interactive service that gives you access to personalized

content and thousands of popular Web sites. You subscribe to AvantGo

channels directly from your 700 Series Computer. Then, you synchronize

your 700 Series Computer and desktop computer, or connect to the Inter-

net to download the content. For more information, visit the AvantGo

Web site. To sign up for AvantGo:

1In ActiveSync options on the desktop computer, turn on synchroniza-

tion for the AvantGo information type.

2In Pocket Internet Explorer on your 700 Series Computer, tap the Fa-

vorites button to display your list of favorites.

3Tap t he AvantGo Channels link.

4Tap t he Activate button.

5Follow the directions on the screen. You will need to synchronize your

700 Series Computer with your desktop computer and then tap the My

Channels button to complete the AvantGo setup.

When synchronization is complete, tap the AvantGo Channels link in

your list of favorites to see a few of the most popular channels. To add or

remove channels, tap the Add or Remove link.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

65700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Using Pocket Internet Explorer

You can use Pocket Internet Explorer to browse mobile favorites and chan-

nels that have been downloaded to your 700 Series Computer without

connecting to the Internet. You can also connect to the Internet through

an ISP or a network connection and browse the Web.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

66 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Viewing Mobile Favorites and Channels

1Tap t he Favorites button to display your list of favorites.

2Tap the page you want to view.

You will see the page that was downloaded the last time you synchronized

with your desktop computer. If the page is not on your 700 Series Com-

puter, the favorite will be dimmed. You will need to synchronize with your

desktop computer again to download the page to your 700 Series Comput-

er, or connect to the Internet to view the page.

Browsing the Internet

1Set up a connection to your ISP or corporate network using Connec-

tions, as described in “Getting Connected” on page 67.

2To connect and start browsing, do one of the following:

STap t he Favorites button, and then tap the favorite you want to view.

STap View →Address Bar. In the address bar that appears at the top

of the screen, enter the Web address you want to visit and then tap

Go. Tap the arrow to choose from previously entered addresses.

Note: To add a favorite link while using the 700 Series Computer, go to

the page you want to add, tap and hold on the page, and tap Add to

Favorites.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

67700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Getting Connected

You can use your 700 Series Computer to exchange information with oth-

er 700 Series Computers as well as your desktop computer, a network, or

the Internet. You have the following connection options:

SUse the infrared (IR) port on your 700 Series Computer to send and

receive files between two 700 Series Computers. If this is the method

you want to use, see “Transferring Items Using Infrared”below.

SConnect to your ISP. Once connected, you can send and receive e-mail

messages by using Inbox and view Web or WAP pages by using Pocket

Internet Explorer. The communication software for creating an ISP con-

nection is already installed on your 700 Series Computer. Your service

provider will provide software needed to install other services, such as

paging and fax services. If this is the method you want to use, see “Con-

necting to an Internet Service Provider” on page 68.

SConnect to the network at your company or organization where you

work. Once connected, you can send and receive e-mail messages by

using Inbox, view Web or WAP pages by using Pocket Internet Explorer,

and synchronize with your desktop computer. If this is the method you

want to use, see “Connecting to Work” on page 70.

SConnect to your desktop computer to synchronize remotely. Once con-

nected, you can synchronize information such as your Pocket Outlook

information. If this is the method you want to use, see ActiveSync Help

on your desktop computer or Connections Help on the 700 Series

Computer.

Transferring Items Using Infrared

Using infrared (IR), you can send and receive information, such as con-

tacts and appointments, between two 700 Series Computers.

Sending Information

1Switch to the program where you created the item you want to send and

locate the item in the list.

2Align the IR ports so that they are unobstructed and within a close

range.

3Tap and hold the item, and tap Beam Item on the pop-up menu.

Note: You can also send items, but not folders, from File Explorer. Tap

and hold the item you want to send, and then tap Beam File on the pop-

up menu.

Receiving Information

1Align the IR ports so that they are unobstructed and within a close

range.

2Have the owner of the other 700 Series Computer send the information

to you. Your 700 Series Computer will automatically receive it.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

68 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Connecting to an Internet Service Provider

You can connect to your ISP, and use the connection to send and receive

e-mail messages and view Web or WAP pages. You can connect to your

ISP in one of two ways:

SCreate a modem connection. If this is the method you want to use, see

“Creating a Modem Connection to an ISP”below.

SUse an Ethernet card and a net tap to connect to the network. If this is

the method you want to use, see “Creating an Ethernet Connection to an

ISP” on page 69.

Creating a Modem Connection to an ISP

1Obtain the following information from your ISP. Some ISPs require in-

formation in front of the user name, such as MSN/username.

SISP dial-up access telephone number

SUser name

SPassword

STCP/IP settings

2If your 700 Series Computer does not have a built-in modem, install a

modem card, or use or use a NULL modem cable and appropriate

adapters to connect an external modem to your 700 Series Computer

through the serial port.

3Tap Start →Settings →the Connections tab →Connections.Under

The Internet settings, select Internet Settings →Modify.

4In the Modem tab, tap New.

5Enter a name for the connection, such as “ISP Connection.”

6In Select a modem list, select your modem type. If your modem type

does not appear, try reinserting the modem card. If you are using an ex-

ternal modem that is connected to your 700 Series Computer with a

cable, select “Hayes Compatible on COM1.”

7You should not need to change any settings in Advanced.MostISPs

now use a dynamically-assigned address. If the ISP you are connecting

to does not use a dynamically-assigned address, tap Advanced →the

TCP/IP tab, then enter the address. When finished, tap OK →Next.

8Enter the access phone number, and tap Next.

9Select other desired options, and tap Finish.

10 In the Dialing Locations tab, specify your current location and phone

type (most phone lines are tone). These settings will apply to all connec-

tions you create.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

69700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

To start the connection, simply start using one of the following programs.

Your 700 Series Computer will automatically begin connecting. Once con-

nected, you can:

SSend and receive e-mail messages by using Inbox. Before you can use

Inbox, you need to provide the information it needs to communicate

with the e-mail server. For specific instructions, see “Connecting Directly

to an E-mail Server” on page 72.

SVisit Web and WAP pages by using Pocket Internet Explorer. For more

information, see “Pocket Internet Explorer” on page 62.

SSend and receive instant messages with MSN Messenger. For more in-

formation, see “MSN Messenger” on page 53.

Creating an Ethernet Connection to an ISP

1You do not need to create a new connection on your 700 Series Com-

puter. Instead, you must purchase a dock to enable on-board Ethernet

or purchase a CompactFlash Ethernet card that is compatible with your

700 Series Computer.

2Obtain the following information from your ISP:

SUser name

SPassword

SDomain name

3Insert the Ethernet card into your 700 Series Computer. For instruc-

tions on inserting and using the Ethernet card, see the owner’ s manual.

If using an on-board Ethernet, place your 700 Series Computer in a dock,

tap Start →Today, then look in the System Tray for the Ethernet icon

(shown left). If not there, then tap the antenna icon for the NDISTRAY

pop-up menu and select Built-in Ethernet from the menu.

4The first time you insert the card, Network Settings will appear

automatically so that you can configure the Ethernet card. Most

networks use DHCP, so you should not have to change these settings

unless your network administrator instructs you to do so. Tap OK.(Ifit

does not appear or to change settings later, tap Start →Settings →the

Connections tab →Network, tap the adapter you want to change, and

then tap Properties.)

SIf using an on-board Ethernet, then select Start →Settings →the

Connections tab →Network Adapters. Select “NE2000 Compatible

Ethernet Driver” from the list of adapters installed, then tap Proper-

ties to configure the Ethernet driver.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

70 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

5Connect the Ethernet card or dock to the network by using a network

cable. For information, see your owner’ s manual.

6Tap Start →Settings →the Connections tab →Connections.From

the My network card connects to list, select “Internet.”

To start the connection, simply start using one of the programs listed in

the preceding section. Once connected, you can perform the same activi-

ties as listed in the preceding section.

Connecting to Work

If you have access to a network at work, you can send e-mail messages,

view intranet pages, synchronize your 700 Series Computer, and possibly

access the Internet. You can connect to work in one of two ways:

SCreate a modem connection by using a RAS (Remote Access Server) ac-

count. Before you can create this modem connection, your network ad-

ministrator will need to set up a RAS account for you. If this is the

method you want to use, see “Creating a Modem Connection to Work”

below. Your network administrator may also give you VPN settings.

SUse an Ethernet card and a net tap to connect to the network. If this is

the method you want to use, see “Creating an Ethernet Connection to

Work” on page 71.

Creating a Modem Connection to Work

1Get the following information from your network administrator:

SDial-up access telephone number

SUser name

SPassword

SDomain name

STCP/IP settings

2If your 700 Series Computer does not have a built-in modem, install a

modem card.

3Tap Start →Settings →the Connections tab →Connections.Under

The Internet settings, select Internet Settings and tap Modify.

4In the Modem tab, tap New.

5Enter a name for the connection, such as “Company Connection.”

6In the Select a modem list, select your modem type. If your modem

type does not appear, try reinserting the modem card. If you are using

an external modem that is connected to your 700 Series Computer with

a cable, select “Hayes Compatible on COM1.”

7You should not need to change any settings in Advanced. Most servers

now use a dynamically-assigned address. If the server you are connecting

to does not use a dynamically-assigned address, tap Advanced →the

TCP/IP tab and then enter the address. When finished, tap OK →

Next.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

71700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

8Enter the access phone number, and tap Next.

9Select other desired options, and tap Finish.

10 In the Dialing Locations tab, specify your current location and phone

type (most phone lines are tone). These settings will apply to all connec-

tions you create.

To start the connection, start using one of the following programs. Your

700 Series Computer will automatically begin connecting. Once con-

nected, you can:

SSend and receive e-mail messages by using Inbox. Before you can use

Inbox, you need to provide the information it needs to communicate

with the e-mail server. For specific instructions, see “Connecting Directly

to an E-mail Server” on page 72.

SVisit Internet or intranet Web or WAP pages via Pocket Internet Explor-

er.

SSend and receive instant messages with MSN Messenger. For more in-

formation, see “MSN Messenger” on page 53.

SSynchronize. For more information, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop

computer.

Creating an Ethernet Connection to Work

1You do not need to create a new connection on your 700 Series Com-

puter. Instead, you must purchase a dock to enable on-board Ethernet

or purchase a CompactFlash Ethernet card that is compatible with your

700 Series Computer.

2Obtain the following information from your ISP:

SUser name

SPassword

SDomain name

3Insert the Ethernet card into your 700 Series Computer. For instruc-

tions on inserting and using the Ethernet card, see the owner’ s manual.

SIf using an on-board Ethernet, place your 700 Series Computer in a

dock, tap Start →Today, then look in the System Tray for the Ether-

net icon (shown left). If not there, then tap the antenna icon for the

NDISTRAY pop-up menu and select Built-in Ethernet from the

menu.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

72 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

4The first time you insert the card, Network Settings will appear

automatically so that you can configure the Ethernet card. Most

networks use DHCP, so you should not have to change these settings

unless your network administrator instructs you to do so. Tap OK.(Ifit

does not appear or to change settings later, tap Start →Settings →the

Connections tab →Network, tap the adapter you want to change, and

then tap Properties.)

SIf using an on-board Ethernet, then select Start →Settings →the

Connections tab →Network Adapters. Select “NE2000 Compatible

Ethernet Driver” from the list of adapters installed, then tap Proper-

ties to configure the Ethernet driver.

5Connect the Ethernet card or dock to the network by using a network

cable. For information, see your owner’ s manual.

6To synchronize your 700 Series Computer, tap Start →ActiveSync.In

the Tools menu, tap Options.→the PC tab, select Include PC when

synchronizing remotely and connect to, and select your computer’ s

name. Remote synchronization with a desktop computer will work only

if a partnership is set up with that computer through ActiveSync and

ActiveSync is set to allow remote connections. Other restrictions apply.

For more information, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop computer.

To start the connection, simply start using one of the programs listed in

the preceding section. Once connected, you can perform the same activi-

ties as listed in the preceding section.

Ending a Connection

To disconnect, do one of the following:

SWhen connected via dial-up or VPN, tap the Connection icon (shown

left) on your navigation bar, and then tap End.

SWhen connected via cable or cradle, detach your 700 Series Computer

from the cable or cradle.

SWhen connected via Infrared, move the 700 Series Computer away

from the PC.

SWhen connected via a network (Ethernet) card, remove the card from

your 700 Series Computer.

Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server

You can set up a connection to an e-mail server so that you can send and

receive e-mail messages by using a modem or network connection and In-

box on your 700 Series Computer.

Note: The ISP or network must use a POP3 or IMAP4 e-mail server and

an SMTP gateway.

You can use multiple e-mail services to receive your messages. For each e-

mail service you intend to use, first set up and name the e-mail service. If

you use the same service to connect to different mailboxes, set up and

name each mailbox connection.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 2

73700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Setting Up an E-mail Service

SIn Inbox on your 700 Series Computer, tap Services →New Service.

Follow the directions in the New Service wizard.

For an explanation of a screen, tap Start →Help. When finished, to con-

nect to your e-mail server, tap Services →Connect. For more information

on using the Inbox program, see “Inbox: Sending and Receiving E-mail Mes-

sages” on page 42.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —2

74 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

75700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Installing Applications

There are multiple ways to get an application to your 700 Series Color

Mobile Computer; just as there are multiple ways to package the applica-

tion for delivery.

Installing ApplicationsChapter —3

76 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Packaging an Application

Use any of the following methods to package an application for installa-

tion:

SFor very simple applications, the application itself might be the only file

that needs to be delivered.

SIt could be a directory structure that contains the application, support-

ing files like ActiveX controls, DLLs, images, sound files, and data files.

SVia a CAB file.

Consider either of the following when choosing a location into which to

store your application:

SIn the basic 700 Series Computer, there are no built-in storage options

other than the Object Store. The Object Store is RAM that looks like a

disk. Anything copied here will be deleted when a cold-boot is per-

formed on the 700 Series Computer.

SIf the optional SecureDigital or CompactFlash storage card is in the sys-

tem, then consider this card the primary location for placing an applica-

tions install files. The following folders represent either card:

SThe SecureDigital storage card creates the “\SDMMC Disk” folder.

SThe CompactFlash storage card creates the “\Storage Card” folder.

SFiles copied to either of these locations will be safe when a cold-boot is

performed on a 700 Series Computer - providing the AutoRun system is

installed onto the storage card. You can find this system on the Recovery

CD. Copying a CAB file to the “\CABFILES” folder on one of these

cards will automatically extract that CAB file on every cold boot to en-

sure that your system is properly set up. See page 82 for more details on

how this works.

Installing Applications

Consider any of the following options to get the package to the preferred

location on your 700 Series Computer.

SMicrosoft ActiveSync

SFTP Server (page 78)

SApplication Manager in Unit Manager (page 78)

SSecureDigital or CompactFlash storage card (page 78)

Installing Applications—Chapter 3

77700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Using Microsoft ActiveSync

Note: These instructions assume that the 700 Color Management Tools

portion of the 700 Series Color Software Tools CD was installed onto your

desktop.

The Microsoft ActiveSync tool is located on the 700C Companion CD,

which contains Microsoft products, such as Outlook and ActiveSync. See

Chapter 2, “Pocket PC 2002,” for information about this tool as provided

by Microsoft Corporation.

This can be a serial, USB, Ethernet, InfraRed, or 802.11b ActiveSync con-

nection. Files can then be copied using File Explorer on a PC or a laptop

computer. This option is usually only good when updating a few 700 Se-

ries Computers.

These instructions assume that Microsoft ActiveSync had been installed

onto your desktop computer and is up and running. If not, go to Chapter

2, “Pocket PC 2002,” for an URL from which you can download the latest

application.

1Connect your 700 Series Computer to your desktop computer via an

ActiveSync cable or IrDA.

2Wait for a “Connected” message to appear in the Microsoft ActiveSync

application to signal a connection to the 700 Series Computer. If neces-

sary, select File →Get Connected to initiate a connection.

3Click Explore to access the Mobile Device directory on your 700 Series

Computer.

Installing ApplicationsChapter —3

78 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

4From your desktop, select Start →Windows Explorer, then browse the

applicable path for any of the system files needed for your 700 Series

Computer (listed with their paths). Select to highlight the appropriate

file, right-click the file for a pop-up menu, then select Copy.

SBase operating system files:

“C:\Intermec\Intermec 700 Color Mgmt Tools\Drive Images”

SCAB files:

“C:\Intermec\Intermec 700 Color Mgmt Tools\Cab Files”

5Within the Mobile Device directory, go to the directory where you want

the files located on the 700 Series Computer, do a right-click for a pop-

up menu, then select Paste.

6When all of the files are pasted, perform a warm-boot on the 700 Series

Computer. When the computer reboots, wait for the LED on the top

left of your keypad to stop blinking. Tap Start →Programs →File Ex-

plorer to locate the newly copied executable files, then tap these files to

activate their utilities.

Using the FTP Server

The 700 Series Computer has a built-in FTP Server that connects to a net-

work via Ethernet or 802.11b. This “ftp”s to the IP address of the 700 Se-

ries Computer and places files. The benefit of using FTP is that a script

can be created that will automate the process of copying files to the 700

Series Computer. This option is good for when a large number of 700 Se-

ries Computers need to be updated. See Chapter 7, “Programming,” for

more information.

Using the Application Manager in Unit Manager

This requires the 700 Series Computer to connect to the network via

Ethernet or 802.11b. The process is still manual so it would take longer

than the FTP method but it would still be a better option than ActiveSync

where many 700 Series Computers need to be updated. The Unit Manager

applications are available on the 700 Series Color Unit Manager CD-ROM.

For more information, consult your Intermec sales representative.

Using a Storage Card

The following steps pertain to installing an application using a storage

card.

Copying to a CompactFlash Card

Follow the steps below to install your application on the device using a

CompactFlash storage card:

1Suspend the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer and remove its Com-

pactFlash drive, which holds a SanDisk CompactFlash storage card.

2Using a CompactFlash Adapter card, place the CompactFlash Drive in

your desktop PC card drive.

Installing Applications—Chapter 3

79700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

3Create a subdirectory on the PCMCIA CompactFlash drive in which to

store your application.

4Add the autorun system to the storage card using the CEImager

application. See the Software Tools User’ s Manual for information about

CEImager.

5Copy your application, data files, and all required DLLs and drivers to

the subdirectory created on the CompactFlash drive.

6Add your application to the AUTOUSER.DAT file on the

“\Storage Card\2577” directory that contains the following statement,

where your directory is the directory on the CompactFlash storage card

where the application was installed, and yourapp.exe is the name of your

application. Finish the “RUN=” statement with a carriage return line-

feed combination. There may be multiple run statements in the file.

RUN=\<your directory>\<yourapp.exe>

7Remove the CompactFlash drive from your desktop computer and rein-

stall it into the 700 Series Computer.

8Warm-boot the 700 Series Computer to add these files to the Compact-

Flash storage card.

If the AUTOUSER.DAT file is found and the “RUN=” statement is cor-

rect, then the task manager will launch and execute your program on start-

up.

Copying to a SecureDigital Storage Card

Do the same steps as for the CompactFlash storage Card, except replace

the “\Storage Card\2577” directory with the “\SDMMC Disk\2577” direc-

tory.

Updating the System Software

You can use the Recovery CD to reinstall or update the operating system

software on the 700 Series Color Computer. For more information, con-

tact your Intermec sales representative.

Installing ApplicationsChapter —3

80 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Application Migration

Note: These instructions assume that the 700 Color Management Tools

portion of the 700C Software Tools CD was installed onto your desktop

and that a storage card has been added to the base configuration of the 700

Color Computer.

The following steps are required to ensure that the following will happen

on a cold-boot:

SCAB files can be restored,

Sapplications will automatically start,

Sand the registry will be restored.

Do the following for the cold-boot procedure:

1From your desktop, double-click the Intermec CE Imager desktop icon

to access the Intermec CEImager application. If this icon is not on your

desktop, then double-click the CEIMAGER.EXE executable from the

“C:\Intermec\Intermec 700 Color Mgmt Tools\Tools\CEImager” folder.

2Click Default under Components List to activate the components.

3Click (+) to expand the AutoRun System component, click (+) to ex-

pand the Destination Media option, then select either the Compact-

Flash Card option or the SecureDigital Card option. Do not select both

storage cards, as the AutoRun files copied will work for one storage card, but

not work on the other storage card.

Installing Applications—Chapter 3

81700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

4Click Install to install the AUTORUN files onto the storage card.

5Create a “\Cabfiles” folder on the storage card. Copy any CAB files that

are to be extracted on every startup into this folder.

6In the “\2577” directory, add your custom AUTOUSER.DAT file. See

the Recovery Help for more information on how to set up an

AUTOUSER.DAT file.

7If you are using the RegFlushKey() API, the application must use a spe-

cial API to make sure the registry is written to the appropriate card; or

you can use the Utilities control panel applet, as follows:

aFrom the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Settings →the System

tab →the Utilities icon →the Registry Save tab.

bTap Enable Registry Storage, then tap either of the following:

SSD

To write the registry to the SecureDigital storage card.

SCF

To write the registry to the CompactFlash storage card.

cTap ok to save your entry and exit the Utilities control panel applet.

Note: If you are using a SecureDigital storage card, you must change any

disk access from “Storage Card” to “SDMMC Disk.”

8Remove the storage card from the desktop PC and install the card into

the 700 Series Color Computer.

9Perform a cold-boot on the 700 Series Color Computer. Files will

automatically install from the storage card upon reboot. Any calls to the

RegFlushKey() API will automatically write the registry to the

appropriate location.

Installing ApplicationsChapter —3

82 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

When converting a 700 Series Monochrome Computer application to run

on the 700 Series Color Computer, most APIs should work without chan-

ges. Below are a few exceptions:

SThe 700 Series Monochrome Computer used the “\Storage Card” folder

for nonvolatile storage. You may need to change the application to store

data in a volatile location or onto the “SDMMC Disk” if a SecureDigi-

tal storage card is present in the system.

SIf the application uses the RegFlushKey() API, it must first verify that

the proper media is available in the system and call the special API men-

tioned in Step 7 on the previous page.

SIf the application will be using the 700 Color switchable dock, use the

API to set the proper port on the dock before communications.

SSome WAN radio options have changed. Review the WAN radio section

to determine if any changes will be required in your application.

SThe arrow and tab keys are swapped from the way they were on the 700

Series Monochrome Computers. Keyboard remapping is available on

the 700 Series Color Computer if these keys need to be changed. See

page 79 for more details.

SNo special SDK is needed to compile applications for the Xscale proces-

sor. Targeting the SA1110 processor will create applications that run on

the 700 Series Color Computer.

Cabinet File Installation

CAB files (short for cabinet files) are like .ZIP files, plus they register DLLs,

create shortcuts, modify registry entries, and run custom set up programs.

Tap a CAB file to extract that file or place the CAB file on one of the ap-

proved storage devices in the “\Cab Files” folder, then perform a warm-

boot on the 700 Series Computer. There are two methods available to ex-

tract a CAB file:

STap a CAB file to extract it. When using this method, the CAB file is

automatically deleted when the extraction process is successful, unless

the CAB file is set with the read-only attribute.

SUse the AUTOCAB method where all files are extracted when a cold-

boot is performed on the 700 Series Computer. This AutoCab applica-

tion is on the Recovery CD, see its “Recovery Help” for more informa-

tion.

83700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Network Support

The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer can integrate up to three radios in

a single unit, and will automatically install the appropriate software for ra-

dio use when the unit is powered on. The Intermec CORE application

defaults to the most recently used module. If a module has not yet been

used or set, CORE will default to the first module as listed alphabetically.

The following communication options on the 700 Series Computer pro-

vide wired and wireless connectivity:

SOnboard wired Ethernet (standard)

SWireless Local Area Network (LAN)

This 802.11b radio option provides up to 11 Mb/sec throughput.

SWireless Wide Area Network (WAN)

Includes support for GSM/GPRS and CDMA/1xRTT radios.

SWireless Printing

This allows for cable-free communications with peripheral devices, such

as printers, over a ten-meter range. This compatibility is provided via a

Bluetooth qualified module by Socket Communications.

Network SupportChapter —4

84 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

CORE

The Intermec Common Object Resource Environment (CORE) applica-

tion provides a framework for various modules that let you configure and

manage your Intermec products. These modules are software plug-ins that

can be configuration tools, such as the 802.11b radio configuration mod-

ule, or they can provide information on your environment, such as a bat-

tery life module.

CORE is built into the operating system of every 700 Series Computer.

On the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Programs →the Intermec

CORE icon to access this application.

CORE modules are collections of specific information. This information is

usually related to a particular radio technology, but not always. Each

module can display general and detailed information. Tap the General and

Details tabs near the bottom to switch between general and detailed

information. Note that not all modules will have detailed information.

To learn more about this application, see its online help. Tap Start →

Help from the menu to see the CORE online help.

Note: Once CORE is running, you can return to it by tapping its icon

from the System Tray via the Today screen. Tap Start →Today →the

Intermec CORE three-ring icon (circled in the following illustration).

Network Support—Chapter 4

85700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Network Adapters

Your 700 Series Computer can have up to three radios installed. The de-

fault network adapter or radio is dependent on what card is inserted in

your 700 Computer. Below are the the network adapters that exist as of

this publication. See the Developer’s Support web site for the latest infor-

mation on network adapters for your unit.

Ethernet Communications (LAN9000) - page 86.

802.11b Radios (802.11b Wireless LAN driver) - page 87.

WWAN (Wireless WAN) - page 110.

Wireless Printing (PAN) - page 120.

Note that the tip of the antenna attached to your 700 Series Computer is

color-coded to identify its radio type. Refer to the following to determine

your radio type:

Green

802.11b diversity

Red

CDMA (non-Sprint networks)

White

GPRS US/Canada and CDMA Sprint networks

Blue

GPRS International

Network SupportChapter —4

86 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Ethernet Communications

Follow the steps below to start Ethernet communications on the 700 Series

Computer. If your system does not contain an 802.11b radio, then

Ethernet networking using DHCP will be selected as the default.

When “Built-in Ethernet” is selected from the NDISTRY pop-up menu,

then the antenna shown to the left will appear in the System Tray. When

“No networking” is selected, then this icon will appear with a red “X”

above it.

From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Settings →the Connections

tab →Network Adapters to access the network connections for this unit.

Make the changes necessary for your network, then tap ok when finished.

Note: “LAN9000” is for Ethernet and ”802.11b Wireless LAN” is for

802.11b radios.

Network Support—Chapter 4

87700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

802.11b Communications

The 700 Series Computer can integrate the 802.11b radio module along

with either the GSM/GPRS or the CDMA/1xRTT radio and the Wireless

Printing option. The 802.11b radio module accommodates any Wireless

LAN (WLAN) requirements, such as using WLAN access points for cross-

docking or load-planning applications.

When “Wireless 802.11” is selected via the NDISTRY pop-up menu, then

the antenna shown to the left will appear in the System Tray.

To start 802.11b communications on the 700 Series Computer, tap Start

→Settings →the System tab →the Wireless Network icon to access the

Profile Wizard for the 802.11b radio module. The Profile Wizard defaults

to the Profiles page.

Profiles

Use the Profiles page to add, edit, or delete multiple networking environ-

ments for this 802.11b radio. To add a profile from this screen, enter up to

32 alphanumeric characters in the Profile field, then tap Add.See“Basic”

on page 89 and “Security” on page 90 for more information.

Leave Use Profile Name for SSID checked for the SSID (or Network

Name) to use this profile name. If this is cleared (check mark removed),

the SSID will default to using the factory-assigned “INTERMEC” net-

work name.

Network SupportChapter —4

88 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

STo add a profile:

Tap Add, enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters to name this profile if

you have not already entered a description in the Profiles page, configu-

re the basic and security information for this profile, then click Done to

configure its basic and security information.

SLeave Use Profile Name for SSID checked for the SSID to use this as-

signed profile name. If this is cleared (check mark removed), the SSID

will default to using the factory-assigned “INTERMEC” network name.

Go to the next page to continue.

STo edit a profile:

Select an existing profile from the Profile drop-down list, tap Edit,

make the changes needed for this profile (starting in the next para-

graph), then tap OK to return to the Profiles page.

STo delete a profile:

Select a profile from the Profile drop-down list, tap Delete,thentapYes

to remove the selected profile.

Network Support—Chapter 4

89700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Basic

Use the Basic page to set the network type and radio channel for this pro-

file. Click OK to return to the Profiles page.

SNetwork type:

Tap the drop-down list to select either Infrastructure or Ad-hoc.

SSSID (Network Name):

This assumes the profile name when Use Profile Name for SSID is

checked on the previous screen, unless another name is entered in this

field. If you want to connect to the next available network or are not

familiar with the network name, enter “ANY” in this field. Consult your

LAN administrator for network names.

SChannel:

If “Ad-hoc” were selected as the network type, then this is enabled. Tap

the drop-down list to select a channel, from 1-15, through which to

handle connections (default is 3).

SEnable Power Management:

Check this box to conserve battery power (default), or clear this box to

disable this feature.

Network SupportChapter —4

90 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Security

Use the Security page to set this profile as read-only or to enable WEP

(Wired Equivalent Privacy) encryption. Click OK to return to the Profiles

page. The following securities are available from the Security Method

drop-down list. Note that the last three methods are available if you have pur-

chased the security package. Contact your Intermec Representative for more in-

formation.

S802.11 WEP Encryption (next page)

S802.1x TLS (page 92)

S802.1x TTLS (page 93)

SLEAP (page 93)

Network Support—Chapter 4

91700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

802.11 WEP Encryption:

WEP keys are only needed if they are expected by your clients. There are

two types available: 64-bit (5-character strings, 12345) (default) and

128-bit (13-character strings, 1234567890123). These can be entered as

either ASCII (12345) or Hex (0x3132333435).

To enter WEP keys, select “802.11 WEP Encryption” from the Security

Method drop-down list. Select a data transmission key from the Data TX

Key drop-down list near the bottom of this screen, then enter the encryp-

tion key for that data transmission in the appropriate Key # field.

Network SupportChapter —4

92 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

802.1x TLS (Transport Layer Security):

TLS is a protocol that ensures privacy between communicating applica-

tions and their users on the Internet. To use this protocol, select “802.1x

TLS” from the Security Method drop-down list, then enter the following:

SClient Key File:

Enter the file location where the certificate for your identity is stored.

SPassword:

Enter the password for the certificate in this field.

SSupplicant ID:

Enter the user ID associated with this certificate.

SServer Cert CN (Certificate Common Name):

Enter the common name of your authentication server.

SCA List (Certificate Authority):

Enter the file location, or path, of the server certificates.

Network Support—Chapter 4

93700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

802.1x TTLS (EAP-Tunneled TLS):

To use this protocol, select “802.1x TTLS” from the Security Method

drop-down list, then enter the following:

SUsername:

Enter your user name for this security protocol.

SPassword:

Enter your password for this security protocol.

SSupplicant ID:

Enter “anonymous” unless your administrator indicates otherwise.

SServer Cert CN (Certificate Common Name):

Enter the common name of your authentication server.

SCA List:

Enter the file location, or path, of the server certificates.

LEAP (Cisco Wireless EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol)):

Enter your unique user name and password to use this protocol.

Network SupportChapter —4

94 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Advanced

Use this page to secure the configuration for this profile or to make all

fields read-only.

SMake Profile Read-Only:

Check this box, then enter and reenter a password to “lock” or render

“read-only” all configurations for this profile. To reverse this step, clear

the check box, then enter the password assigned with the “read-only”

status.

SCertificates:

If “802.1x TLS,” “802.1x TTLS,” or “LEAP” were enabled via the Se-

curity tab, then this button will appear. Tap this button to configure the

available certificates. See “Certificates” on the next page for more infor-

mation.

Network Support—Chapter 4

95700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Certificates

Use this page to view, modify, or remove certificates assigned to your

particular security method. Note that you can also access this page by tapping

Start →certificates from the Today screen.

SCA Name/IP:

Enter a valid CA name or IP address assigned to the certificate in ques-

tion. This allows you to enroll the certificate or to browse for its latest

information.

SEnroll File Name:

Enter the file name of the certificate to be enrolled.

SStore Location:

Enter the path where the certificate is to be stored within your 700 Se-

ries Computer.

SEnroll:

Tap this to assign the file entered in Enroll File Name to the location

specified in Store Location.

SCA Vert:

Tap this to view the contents of the certificate via the Internet Explorer.

SView:

Tap this to view information about the certificate, such as to whom this

certificate was issued, who issued the certificate, and the span of time

the certificate is valid.

SRemove:

Select a file from the list, then tap this button to delete that file.

Network SupportChapter —4

96 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Import/Export

Use this page to send a profile or to retrieve a profile to or from another

location within your 700 Series Computer.

STo export a profile:

Select to highlight a profile, then tap Export. Select from the drop-down

lists, the folder, type of files, and location within the folder where the

profile is to go, tap OK to export the profile, tap ok to close the con-

firmation screen, then tap OK again to exit the Profile Wizard.

Network Support—Chapter 4

97700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

STo import a profile:

Tap Import to access the Open screen, from the drop-down lists, select a

folder and file type, then tap a profile from the list provided. Tap ok to

close the confirmation screen, then tap OK again to exit the Profile

Wizard.

Scan List

Use this Scan List page to monitor network connections, and if lost, to at-

tempt to reestablish connections with these networks.

Selected Profile

Select this option to use the profile defined in the Profiles page, then tap

OK to exit the Profile Wizard. When connections are lost, attempts will be

made to connect to the specified profile.

Network SupportChapter —4

98 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Scan List

Use this option to select a number of profiles with which to establish con-

nections. When connections are lost, attempts will be made to contact each

of the profiles listed, in the order they appear in the list.

1Tap this option, then tap Edit Scan List.

2Select profiles from the Available Profiles drop-down list, then tap Add

to include each selection in the Scan List.

3To arrange the hierarchy of profiles, tap to select a profile, then tap ei-

ther Move Up or Move Down to move each profile. To remove a pro-

file from the list, tap to select that profile, then tap Delete.

4Click either ok or Close to return to the Scan List page, then click OK

to exit the Profile Wizard.

Network Selection APIs

The Network Selection APIs allow the user to change network adapter

configuration programmatically. Both drivers support the same IOCTL

function numbers for loading and unloading the drivers.

Loading and unloading of the 802.11b driver is performed by the FWV1:

device in the system by performing DeviceIOControl() calls to the driver.

Loading and unloading of the driver for the built-in Ethernet adapter is

performed by the SYI1: device in the system by performing DeviceIO-

Control() calls to the driver.

SFor loading an NDIS driver associated with an adapter, the IOCTL is

IOCTL_LOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT.

SFor unloading NDIS drivers associated with an adapter the IOCTL is

IOCTL_UNLOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT.

Network Support—Chapter 4

99700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

#include <winioctl.h>

#include “sysio.h”

void DoLoad(int nDevice) {

LPTSTR devs[] = { _T(“SYI1:”), _T(“FWV1:”) };

HANDLE hLoaderDev;

DWORD bytesReturned;

hLoaderDev = CreateFile(devs[nDevice], GENERIC_READ|GENERIC_WRITE, 0,

NULL, OPEN_EXISTING, 0, NULL);

if (hLoaderDev != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) {

if (!DeviceIoControl( hLoaderDev, IOCTL_LOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT, NULL, -1, NULL, 0,

&bytesReturned, NULL)){

MessageBox(NULL, TEXT(“SYSIO IoControl Failed”), TEXT(“Network

loader”),MB_ICONHAND);

if (hLoaderDev!=INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);

hLoaderDev = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE; // bad handle

}else {

CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);

}

void DoUnload(int nDevice) {

LPTSTR devs[] = { _T(“SYI1:”), _T(“FWV1:”) };

HANDLE hLoaderDev;

DWORD bytesReturned;

hLoaderDev = CreateFile(devs[nDevice], GENERIC_READ|GENERIC_WRITE, 0,

NULL, OPEN_EXISTING, 0, NULL);

if (hLoaderDev != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) {

if (!DeviceIoControl( hLoaderDev, IOCTL_UNLOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT, NULL, -1, NULL, 0,

&bytesReturned, NULL)){

MessageBox(NULL, TEXT(“SYSIO IoControl Failed”),TEXT(“Network

loader”),MB_ICONHAND);

if (hLoaderDev!=INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);

hLoaderDev = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE; // bad handle

}else {

CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);

}

Network SupportChapter —4

100 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

The API provided by Intermec Technologies exposes a limited set of rou-

tines that allows a programmer to access and affect the 802.11b network

interface card from within their application. The routines provided will

also read/write values to the CE registry that pertain to the 802.11b radio

driver. By using the provided functions, a programmer can alter the

802.11b parameters of Network Name (SSID), WEP Keys, Infrastructure

Modes, Radio Channel, and Power Management Modes. A programmer

can also retrieve network connect status and signal strength indication

from the RF network card.

The API is contained within the 80211API.DLL file that should be pres-

ent in any load that has the 802.11b networking installed.

SNETWLAN.DLL

This file is the 802.11b driver. It will be present in all 700 CE loads that

use the 802.11b network interface card.

S80211API.DLL

This file is an Intermec authored file that provides the programmer with

a set of API calls to configure or monitor status of the 802.11b network.

SMOD80211.DLL

The CORE module for the 802.11b NIC. It provides the 802.11b sta-

tus information displayed when the CORE application is running.

S80211CONF.EXE

This is the “Control Panel” for configuring the 802.11b network para-

meters. Note that it is an EXE file and is actually called by

CPL802.CPL (see below). It is also called by the CORE application

when the “Configuration” button is pressed.

SCPL802.CPL

A control panel application that does nothing but call

80211CONF.EXE.

S80211SCAN.EXE

Internally manages the Scan List activity.

The 80211API.DLL supports an unlimited number of radio configuration

profiles. These profiles are the same as those set by the Wireless Network

control panel applet that runs on the Windows CE unit. You can configure

different 802.11b profiles and switch between them using the 802.11 API.

See the ConfigureProfile() function on page 106 for more information.

Network Support—Chapter 4

101700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Function Summary

Below are functions available for the 700 Series Color Computer when

enabled with the 802.11b radio module.

RadioConnect()

Connects to the available radio. Use this function if you plan on using a

lot of API calls that talk directly to the radio.

Syntax: UINT RadioConnect( );

Parameters: None.

Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, otherwise

ERR_CONNECT_FAILED.

RadioDisconnect()

Cleans up the connection from the RadioConnect() function after an ap-

plication closes.

Syntax: UINT RadioDisconnect( );

Parameters: None.

Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, otherwise

ERR_CONNECT_FAILED.

GetMac()

Gets the radio MAC address.

Syntax: UINT GetMac( TCHAR * );

Parameters: Pointer to a character array, which is populated with MAC addresses.

Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,

ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or

ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

GetBSSID()

Gets the associated access point name, the BSSID.

Syntax: UINT GetBSSID( TCHAR * );

Parameters: Pointer to a character array, which is populated with the current BSSID.

Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,

ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or

ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed

GetSSID()

Gets the current SSID (network name).

Syntax: UINT GetSSID( TCHAR * );

Parameters: Pointer to a character array, which is populated with the current SSID.

Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,

ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or

ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

Network SupportChapter —4

102 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

GetLinkSpeed()

Retrieves the current link speed of the radio connection.

Syntax: UINT GetLinkSpeed( int &);

Parameters: &References an integer.

Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,

ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or

ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

GetNetworkType()

Retrieves the network type.

Syntax: UINT GetNetworkType( ULONG &);

Parameters: &References a ULONG value, populated with one of the following:

NDIS_NET_TYPE_FH Frequency Hopping Radio

NDIS_NET_TYPE_DS Direct Sequence Radio

NDIS_NET_TYPE_UNDEFINED

Unknown or information not available.

Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,

ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or

ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

GetTXPower()

Gets the current TX power of the radio in milliwatts.

Syntax: UINT GetTXPower( ULONG &);

Parameters: &References a ULONG value, populated with one of the following

in milliwatts (mW):

NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_63 63 mW.

NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_30 30 mW.

NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_15 15 mW.

NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_5 5mW.

NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_1 1mW.

NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_UNKNOWN

Unknown Value or Error.

Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,

ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or

ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

Network Support—Chapter 4

103700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

GetNetworkMode()

Retrieves the network mode.

Syntax: UINT GetNetworkMode( ULONG &);

Parameters: &References a ULONG value, populated with one of the following:

NDIS_NET_MODE_IBSS 802.11 Ad-Hoc Mode.

NDIS_NET_MODE_ESS 802.11 Infrastructure Mode.

NDIS_NET_MODE_UNKNOWN Unknown Value or Error.

NDIS_NET_AUTO_UNKNOWN

Automatic Selection. Use of this option is not recommended.

Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,

ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or

ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

SetNetworkMode()

Sets the radio and updates the CE registry.

Syntax: UINT SetNetworkMode( ULONG &);

Parameters: &References a ULONG value, populated with one of the values defined

in GetNetworkMode().

Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,

ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or

ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

AddWep()

Adds a WEP key to the radio configuration.

Syntax: UINT AddWep( ULONG 1, BOOL 2, TCHAR * 3);

Parameters: ULONG Pointer that identifies what key to be set.

BOOL Specifies whether the key being set is the default TX key.

TCHAR Pointer that specifies the key data either in hex (string

lengths of 10 or 26) or ASCII (string lengths of 5 or 13).

Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,

ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or

ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

GetRSSI()

Sets the current RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

Syntax: UINT GetRSSI( ULONG & );

Parameters: &References a ULONG value.

Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,

ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or

ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

Network SupportChapter —4

104 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

GetAssociationStatus()

Gets the current connection, or association status.

Syntax: UINT GetAssociationStatus( ULONG &);

Parameters: &References a ULONG value, a current connection status as follows:

NDIS_RADIO_ASSOCIATED Radio is associated w/access point.

NDIS_RADIO_SCANNING Radio is scanning for network.

Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,

ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or

ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

GetWepStatus()

Gets the current WEP status.

Syntax: UINT GetWepStatus( ULONG &);

Parameters: &References a ULONG status value which include the following:

NDIS_RADIO_WEP_ENABLED WEP is currently enabled.

NDIS_RADIO_WEP_DISABLED WEP is currently disabled.

NDIS_RADIO_WEP_ABSENT WEP key is absent.

NDIS_RADIO_WEP_NOT_SUPPORTED

WEP is not supported.

Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,

ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or

ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

GetAuthenticationMode()

Gets the current authentication mode.

Syntax: UINT GetAuthenticationMode( ULONG &);

Parameters: &References a ULONG value which include the following current

authentication mode:

NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_OPEN Open System is in use.

NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_SHARED Shared Key is in use.

NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_AUTO Automatic Detection.

NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_ERROR Unknown value/Error.

Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,

ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or

ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

SetAuthenticationMode()

Sets the radio authentication mode with a value defined in the

GetAuthenticationMode() function.

Syntax: UINT SetAuthenticationMode( ULONG );

Parameters: Passes in a ULONG set to one of the values as defined in

GetAuthenticationMode().

Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,

ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or

ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

Network Support—Chapter 4

105700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SetChannel()

Sets the radio channel, ranging from 1 to 14.

Syntax: UINT SetChannel( USHORT );

Parameters: USHORT set to a desired channel (1-14).

Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,

ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or

ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

EnableWep()

Enables or disables WEP encryption.

Syntax: UINT EnableWep( BOOL );

Parameters: Set to TRUE (0) to enable WEP encryption or FALSE (1) to disabled

WEP encryption.

Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,

ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or

ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

GetPowerMode()

Gets the current power management mode of the radio.

Syntax: UINT GetPowerMode( ULONG &);

Parameters: &References a ULONG value which include the following current radio

power management mode:

NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_CAM

Continuous Access Mode (uses most power).

NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_MAX

Maximum Power Savings.

NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_PSP

Power Saving Mode, best balance of power and performance.

NDIS_RADIO_POWER_UNKNOWN

Unknown mode reported or error.

Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,

ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or

ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

SetSSID()

Passes the desired SSID (network name).

Syntax: UINT SetSSID( TCHAR * );

Parameters: Pointer to a character array that contains the desired SSID.

Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,

ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or

ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

Network SupportChapter —4

106 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

isOrinoco()

Confirms whether the present radio is an ORiNOCO radio.

Syntax: UINT isOrinoco( );

Parameters: None.

Returns: TRUE when an ORiNOCO radio.

FALSE when other than an ORiNOCO radio.

EncryptWepKeyForRegistry()

Encrypts a key for registry storage. Requires TCHAR pointers for a des-

tination and a source.

Syntax: UINT EncryptWepKeyForRegistry( TCHAR * szDest, TCHAR *

szSource );

Parameters: szDest String for the destination.

szSource String for the source.

Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,

ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or

ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

SetRTSThreshold()

Sets the radio RTS (Request To Send) threshold.

Syntax: UINT SetRTSThreshold( USHORT &);

Parameters: &References a USHORT value.

Returns: None.

GetRTSThreshold()

Gets the radio RTS threshold.

Syntax: UINT GetRTSThreshold( USHORT &);

Parameters: &References a USHORT value.

Returns: None.

ConfigureProfile()

If using the Intermec 802.11b Profile Management system, you can pro-

gram the API to configure the radio to a specific profile by passing the pro-

file name.

Syntax: UINT ConfigureProfile( TCHAR * );

Parameters: Pointer to a string that contains the name of the profile to be activated.

Returns: None.

Network Support—Chapter 4

107700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

StartScanList()

If a scan list is configured, this will start the API looking for a network on

that scan list and configuring the radio appropriately. This call can take a

long time to process.

Syntax: UINT StartScanList( );

Parameters: None.

Returns: None.

802.11b Radio CORE Module

The 802.11b radio CORE module displays helpful information about the

802.11b radio option built into your 700 Series Computer.

Note that you can configure the 802.11b radio module from this CORE

application. Select Configure →Configure 802.11 CF from the bottom

menu bar to access the Profile Wizard application. Information about this

application starts on page 87.

Select Modules →Intermec 802.11 CF Help for more information on

the contents of this CORE module.

General

Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-

vided via the General tab, reading from top to bottom starting on the left.

SESS 802.11 Station:

This identifies the type of network to which you are attached, either an

ESS (Embedded Security Subsystem) Station, or Ad-hoc.

SAdapter MAC:

This identifies the MAC address for this 802.11b adapter.

SScanning:

Status of association. When connected to a network, this changes to

“Connected to NET” with NET being the name of the network to

which you are connected.

Network SupportChapter —4

108 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SEncryption:

This indicates whether WEP encryption is “Enabled” or “Disabled

(Open).” See page 90 for more information.

SLink:

This indicates the speed at which a connection is made.

STX Power:

This shows the speed (in milliwatts) at which transmissions are made.

SSignal:

This identifies the radio signal strength (in dBm).

SAntenna:

This identifies the antenna being used with the assigned profile.

SAP Mac:

This identifies the MAC address of the access point to which this 700

Series Computer is connected.

SIP:

This provides the IP address which can be set as either DHCP (Dynam-

ic Host Configuration Protocol) or statically.

SPower:

This indicates the power status of this 700 Series Computer: “Always

On” is the default.

SHistory:

This bar graph displays an active history of this radio module’ s quality

of connections.

SFriendly Indicator:

If the radio stack is loaded, then all three dots are filled. These dots are

left empty if the stack is not loaded. These dots do vary based on the

CORE application’ s perception of the overall connection quality.

Network Support—Chapter 4

109700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Details

Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-

vided via the Details tab, reading from top to bottom.

SAttach-Roam Cnt:

This includes the number of new associations made during the current

session, including any found roaming.

SScanlist:

This indicates whether the Scan List option was enabled or disabled. See

page 97 for more information.

SWatchdog Status:

This monitors the activity of the Scan List: “Running” or “Stopped.”

SSupplicant:

This monitors the 802.1x security activity on the client: “Running” or

“Stopped.”

Network SupportChapter —4

110 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

WWAN Radio Options

The 700 Series Computer can integrate either the GSM/GPRS or the

CDMA/1xRTT radio along with the 802.11b radio and the Wireless

Printing option. The WWAN radio option accommodates any Wireless

WAN requirements, such as taking the 700 Series Computer off the prem-

ises in a delivery vehicle to cover a much larger area.

GSM/GPRS

The GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) and GPRS (Gen-

eral Packet Radio Service) wireless infrastructure increases voice capacity,

enables personalized “user-aware” services, and creates networking efficien-

cies to help wireless service providers drive reduced operating costs.

SGSM is an open, nonproprietary system. One of its great strengths is

the international roaming capability. This provides seamless and same-

standardized same-number contactability world-wide. GSM satellite

roaming has extended service access to areas with unavailable terrestrial

coverage.

SGPRS is the high-speed data evolution of GSM. GPRS supports Inter-

net Protocol (IP), enabling access to Internet and intranet content and

applications from GPRS wireless devices. The anticipated data rate for

GPRS is 115 Kbps and throughput rates of 30-60 Kbps have been

achieved initially. This high speed capability enables vehicle applications

to become real-time and to use the Internet for access to corporate data

or information in the form of traffic or navigation.

CDMA/1xRTT SB555

Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) is a form of “spread-spectrum,” a

family of digital communication techniques used in military applications

for years. The core principle of spread-spectrum is the use of noise-like

carrier waves, and, as the name implies, bandwidths much wider than that

required for simple point-to-point communication at the same data rate.

S1XRTT, the first phase of CDMA2000, is designed to support up to

144 KB per second packet data transmission and to double the voice

capacity of current generation CDMA networks.

SSB555 Embedded Module, from Sierra Wireless, provides complete

wireless functionality and integrates easily into the most compact and

slender mobile applications with its small flexible design. The SB555

offers maximum coverage and access to entire CDMA networks.

Network Support—Chapter 4

111700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

WAN Radio CORE Module

The WAN radio CORE module displays helpful information about either

the GSM/GPRS radio or the CDMA/1xRTT radio option built into your

700 Series Computer. The following illustrations are for a GSM/GPRS

GEM350X radio.

General

Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-

vided via the General tab, reading from top to bottom starting on the left.

The information applies to both the GSM/GPRS and the CDMA/1xRTT ra-

dio modules unless otherwise indicated.

SNetwork Type:

This is the network type which would list either “GSM-GPRS” or

“CDMA-1XRTT.” Scatternets are not supported.

SIWS (GSM/GPRS) or Sprint PCS Network (CDMA/1xRTT):

This lists the name of the wireless network provider, such as T-Mobile,

Voicestream, AT&T Wireless, etc. “IWS” is short for the Iowa Wireless

Service carrier.

SRegistered on home network:

If the WAN radio module has registered with a service provider net-

work, then one of the following will appear:

SRegistered on home network:

The radio module is registered on its “home” network.

SRegistered on roamed network:

The radio module is registered on another service provider’ s network.

SRadio Not Registered:

There is no network within range of this radio module.

SRadio ESN:

This displays the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) assigned to this radio

module or lists “Unavailable” if a number cannot be read from the ra-

dio.

Network SupportChapter —4

112 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SRSSI:

This displays the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) frequency or

lists “Unavailable” if there is no signal or the signal cannot be retrieved

from the radio module.

SBER (GSM/GPRS GEM 350X, CDMA/1xRTT):

This shows the Bit Error Rate (BER), the percentage of bits with errors

divided by the total number of bits transmitted, received, or processed

over a given period of time.

Sf/w:

This identifies the firmware version, if available.

Sh/w:

This identifies the hardware version, if available.

SSerial Status:

This indicates whether serial communications passed (“Serial com OK”)

or failed (“Serial com FAIL”) in its last transaction. A status of “Serial

com FAIL” typically indicates that the 700 Series Computer is unable to

establish communication with the radio module installed within.

SXircom GEM3503 (GSM/GPRS),Siemens MC45 (GSM/GPRS),or

Sierra Wireless SB555 (CDMA/1xRTT):

This identifies the product name for this radio module.

SBand (GSM/GPRS) or Channel (CDMA/1xRTT):

This identifies the bandwidth or channel available for this radio module,

if any.

SHistory:

This bar graph displays an active history of this radio module’ s quality

of connections.

SFriendly Indicator:

Usually indicates the signal strength for this radio module. Three filled

dots indicate a high quality or strong signal. Three empty dots indicate

that the signal is out of range or there is no signal detected.

Network Support—Chapter 4

113700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Details

Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-

vided via the Details tab, reading from top to bottom. Most of this is simi-

lar to what is shown under the General tab. The information applies to both

the GSM/GPRS and the CDMA/1xRTT radio modules unless otherwise indi-

cated.

SSerial Status:

This indicates whether serial communications passed (“PASS”) or failed

(“FAIL”) in its last transaction. A status of “FAIL” typically indicates

that the 700 Series Computer is unable to establish communication

with the radio module installed within.

SManufacturer:

This lists the name of the manufacturer that developed this radio mod-

ule, such as “Xircom, an Intel Corporation,” “Siemens,” or “Sierra Wire-

less.”

SModel:

This identifies the product name for this radio module, such as

“SB555,” “GEM350X,” or “MC45.”

SIMEI # (GSM/GPRS):

This is the IMEI (International Mobile station Equipment Identity) se-

rial number of the GSM/GPRS radio module.

SRSSI:

This displays the RSSI frequency or lists “Unavailable” if there is no sig-

nal or the signal cannot be retrieved from the radio module.

SOperator:

This lists the name of the service providing the network support.

SSIM Status (GSM/GPRS MC45):

Identifies whether a Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card is installed

in this 700 Series Computer.

Network SupportChapter —4

114 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SBand (CDMA/1xRTT):

This identifies the frequency bands used by this radio module.

SIMSI # (GSM/GPRS):

This shows the IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) number

assigned to the SIM card installed in this 700 Series Computer.

SRadio Temp (CDMA/1xRTT):

This identifies the temperature of the radio module, or lists “Unavail-

able degrees” if there is no information or the temperature cannot be

measured.

SFirmware Rev:

This identifies the firmware version, if available.

SFirmware Date (GSM/GPRS):

This provides the last date when this firmware was updated, if available.

Terminal Application

Tap Terminal App from the Details page to send standard AT commands.

Information about these AT commands are available under “AT Command

Interface” on page 115.

Select an AT command from the drop-down list, then tap Send. The re-

sults of each test appears in the text box. Tap Exit or ok to close this screen

and return to the Details page.

Network Support—Chapter 4

115700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Phone Application

With the WAN radio module installed in your 700 Series Computer, you

can send and receive telephone calls. Use the speaker on the back of the

computer as your earpiece and use the connector on the bottom of the

computer for your mouthpiece.

Tap Phone App from the Details page to access the application which will

process your phone calls. Tap Exit or ok to close this application and

return to the Details page.

STap the numbers for a phone call, using Clear to erase each digit, then

tap Send to initiate the call.

STap Answer to receive an incoming call.

STap End to disconnect a transaction.

STap Vol ^ or Vol v to adjust the speaker volume.

STap Mic ^ or Mic v to adjust the microphone sensitivity.

AT Command Interface

This interface specification is based on the following recommendation:

SETSI GSM 07.05:

European Digital Cellular Telecommunication System (phase 2)

Use of DTE-DCE interface for Short message and cell broadcast service.

SETSI GSM 07.07:

European Digital Cellular Telecommunication System (phase 2)

AT command set for GSM Mobile Equipment.

SITU-T Recommendation V.25 ter

Serial asynchronous automatic dialing and control.

Network SupportChapter —4

116 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Note: You will need the Adobe Acrobat Reader application to view a PDF

document.Goto“http://www.adobe.com/prodindex/acrobat/readstep.html”

to install or download the latest Adobe Acrobat Reader according to

Adobe’ s instructions.

Command Set for Sierra Wireless SB555

Use the AT command interface from Sierra Wireless to program the

CDMA/1xRTT SB555 radio module. Documentation for this interface is

available via the following URL. Click the “General AT command refer-

ence” link for a PDF document, which is 680 KB in size. Note that this

URL is subject to change.

http://www.sierrawireless.com/ProductsOrdering/embedded_docs.html

Command Set for Xircom/Intel GEM350X

Use the GEM350X AT command list from Intel Corporation to program

the GPRS/GSM GEM350X radio module. The “GEM350X Programmer’ s

Reference” is available either from Intermec Technologies or from Intel

Corporation. Contact either your Intermec representative or the Intel Cor-

poration support personnel at the following URL for more information.

Note that this URL is subject to change.

http://support.intel.com/sites/support/index.htm?iid=intelhome1+support&

Command Set for Siemens MC45

Use the MC45 AT command interface from Siemens AG to program the

GPRS/GSM MC45 radio module. The “MC45 Siemens Cellular Engine

AT Command Set” is available either from Intermec Technologies or from

Siemens AG. Contact either your Intermec representative or the Siemens

AG support personnel at the following URL for more information. Note

that this URL is subject to change.

http://www.siemens-mobile.com/btob/CDA/presentation/ap_btob_cda_presentation_fron

tdoor/0,2950,12,FF.html

Network Support—Chapter 4

117700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Testing the AT Commands

These commands can be sent to either WAN radio by setting up a dial-up

networking connection to COM4. Do the following to initiate this con-

nection and test these commands to your radio:

1From the 700 Series Computer, select Start →Settings →the

Connections tab →the Connections icon.

2Tap Modify beneath the Internet Settings drop-down list.

3Tap New.. to make a new connection.

Network SupportChapter —4

118 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

4Enter a name for the connection, select “WANA on COM4” from the

Select a modem drop-down list, and select “115200” from the Baud

rate drop-down list. Tap Advanced to continue.

5On the Port Settings tab, check Enter dialing commands manually,

then tap ok,Next, then Finish to return to the Internet Settings screen

with your new connection.

Network Support—Chapter 4

119700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

6Press and hold the new connection for a pop-up menu, then tap

Connect to initiate the connection. Wait for about ten seconds for the

Network Log On screen, then tap OK.Note: You do not need to enter any

information within the Network Log On screen.

7Use either the onscreen keyboard, or press the keys to type any of the

AT commands provided by Sierra Wireless. Press or tap Enter to send

each command. The results of each command sent will print onscreen -

see the sample illustration below. Note that each “AT” command must

start with either the “at” or “at+” characters.

STo see what you typed onscreen, type “ate1” to initiate the AT Echo

command, then press Enter.

Network SupportChapter —4

120 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Wireless Printing

The 700 Series Computer can integrate the Wireless Printing option

(which is equipped with a Bluetooth qualified module by Socket Communica-

tions) along with either the GSM/GPRS or the CDMA/1xRTT radio and

the 802.11b radio. This option uses the network to print information

stored on the 700 Series Computer.

“Bluetooth” is the name given to a technology standard using short-range

radio links, intended to replace the cables connecting portable and fixed

electronic devices. The standard defines a uniform structure for a wide

range of devices to communicate with each other, with minimal user ef-

fort. Its key features are robustness, low complexity, low power, and low

cost. The technology also offers wireless access to LANs, the mobile phone

network, and the internet for a host of home appliances and portable

hand-held interfaces.

Documentation

Information about additional “Bluetooth” software, including the Blue-

tooth Device Manager and the BTctrl program, can be found within the

Wireless Printing SDK. This is located on the 700C Software Tools CD,

via the directory off the root of the toolkit called “Wireless Printing SDK.”

It also can be found in the Wireless Printing Development Guide,alsoonthe

700C Tools CD.

Bluealps CORE Module

The Bluealps CORE module displays helpful information about this Wire-

less Printing option within your 700 Series Computer. Below are descrip-

tions and meanings for each piece of information provided via the General

tab, reading from top to bottom starting on the left.

Network Support—Chapter 4

121700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SBluetooth Point to Point:

This is the network type. “Point to Point” is the type of connection sup-

ported as of this publication. Scatternets are not supported. The only sup-

ported application is wireless printing to Intermec wireless printers, such

as the 781T Belt-Mount Printer.

SDevice Address:

This provides the network address, which in this case, will be replaced

by the device address of the Bluetooth compatible module within your

700 Series Computer. Note that this address is universally unique.

SDiscoverable:

The following is displayed depending on whether the 700 Series Com-

puter is configured to be discoverable:

“Gen” Generally discoverable

“Lim” Limited discovery

“No” Not discoverable

SConnectable:

This defines whether the 700 Series Computer is able to accept other

devices with Bluetooth compatible modules connecting to it. “Yes” if the

connection is doable, “No” if not.

SBondable:

This defines the security element of the 700 Series Computer, which is

the bondable setting. If the unit is bondable, then “Yes” is displayed,

otherwise “No” is displayed.

SModule Firmware:

This reflects the firmware (hardware) version of the 700 Series Comput-

er. When the CORE module first installs onto the unit, the firmware

level is unknown, thus “...reading” is displayed. Once the firmware level

is read from the unit, then a three-digit decimal is displayed.

SStack [Stack Version] [loaded/not loaded]:

[Stack Version] displays the Bluetooth stack version, which appears in the

“1.2.3.4” format. If the stack is loaded, then “loaded” is displayed after

the stack version, otherwise “not loaded” is displayed.

SDevice Name:

This displays the device name as assigned to the Bluetooth compatible

module by the end-user. If the configured name is longer than the space

allowed, it will be truncated.

SBTpak Version:

This displays the driver version of additional Bluetooth components

within the 700 Series Computer and is usually presented in the “1.2.3”

format. The version may also contain a letter at either end.

SHistory:

This bar graph displays an active history of this wireless printer driver’ s

quality of connections.

SFriendly Indicator:

If the Bluetooth stack is loaded, then all three dots are filled. These dots

are left empty if the stack is not loaded. These dots do vary based on the

CORE application’ s perception of the overall connection quality.

Network SupportChapter —4

122 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

AutoIP/DHCP

Automatic Private IP Addressing (AutoIP) is enabled by default in Pocket

PC 2002. To remain compatible with other Pocket PC devices, this setting

needs to be enabled. You can configure the registry settings in the

following to set the required AutoIP/DHCP behavior:

SFor Ethernet: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Comm\LAN9001\TcpIp

SFot 802.11b: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Comm\NETWLAN1\TcpIp

Other registry keys that can modify the behavior of AutoIP are as follows.

You can find the appropriate settings and behavior of each of these keys in

Microsoft Help.

SAutoInterval

SAutoMask

SAutoSubnet

SAutoIP

SAutoSeed

When a TCP/IP client cannot find a DHCP server, it generates an AutoIP

address from the 169.254.xxx.xxx block. The client then tries to check for

a DHCP server every 300 seconds (5 minutes) and if a DHCP server is

found, the client drops the AutoIP address and uses the address from the

DHCP server.

In the MSDN Windows CE documentation, see “Automatic Client Config-

uration” for more information on AutoIP.

To disable AutoIP, set the AutoCfg registry entry to “0.” If a DHCP server

cannot be found, instead of using AutoIP, the system will display the “Un-

able to obtain a server assigned IP address” message.

Note: If AutoIP is defined using CAB files, the EnableDHCP registry key

must also be defined and set to “1” before the system will attempt to ob-

tain a DHCP address.

To extend the number of attempts that a DHCP client makes to get a

DHCP address, use the DhcpRetryDialogue and DhcpMaxRetry registry

settings.

Change the AutoInterval registry key value to make the client retry more

often to obtain a DHCP address.

Network Support—Chapter 4

123700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SNMP Configuration

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) was developed in the late

1980s to provide a general-purpose internetworking management protocol.

Its primary goal was to be simple so nothing would stand in the way of its

ubiquitous deployment. To this end, it has been very successful as it is cur-

rently deployed in almost every major internetworking product on the

market. However, like many achieved goals, the primary strength can also

become a weakness.

The Focus was “Simple”

An extreme example of simplicity versus power can be realized by compar-

ing SNMP against the Common Management Information Protocol

(CMIP), the ISO entry to the standard management protocol world.

CMIP has a very rich set of primitives and a core set of data elements.

However, to implement CMIP, a subset of the protocol must be selected.

Then, to achieve interoperability, this subset must be agreed upon with

other implementors. As SNMP was specified completely and with no op-

tions, one implemented what was there and interoperability was assured.

Returning to simplicity, SNMP was built simply for a number of reasons

other than time to market: robustness in the face of network failure, low

overhead in the devices running the protocol; and ease of debugging the

protocol itself (the last thing you want to debug is the management protocol

that is supposed to be helping you debug your network). Thus, the SNMP

limited itself to the User Datagram Protocol (UDP). This gave the

implementor the ability and responsibility to manage lost packets and

perform any necessary retransmissions. As network debugging in the face

of changing routes will certainly mean losing packets, retaining this control

from the transport service (layer 4) was considered essential. Since a

network management protocol will run continuously, it is mandatory that

it consume as minimal a network resource as possible. UDP allows the

necessary control over packet transmissions, packet size and content

(packetization). It is a natural choice.

Using SNMP

SNMP has three control primitives that initiate data flow from the

requester (get, get-next, and set). There are two control primitives the

responder uses to reply. One is used in response to the requester’ s direct

query (get-response) and the other is an asynchronous response to obtain

the requester’ s attention (trap). All five of these primitives are carried by

UDP and are thus limited in size by the amount of data that can fit into a

single UDP packet. The relatively small message size was a goal of the

design but for some reasonable set of network management functions, it

imposes a limitation.

Often in network management, it is necessary to obtain bulk information

without knowing at first what is in that bulk. In one case, there is a set of

problems having to do with packets not going where they are supposed to,

due to device misconfiguration that prevents proper protocol operation

where one needs to view the entire set of data.

Network SupportChapter —4

124 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Retrieval of Management Information

SNMP has the get-next primitive which permits the viewing of data

without requiring prior knowledge. If you know what you are looking for,

the get primitive will return it. When you want an entire table of

information, the get-next primitive will obtain it. However, unless

employed with care, the get-next primitive can be extremely

resource-intensive in real time, network bandwidth, and the agent’ s CPU

time. The simplest use of the get-next primitive is to start at the beginning

of a table, await the response and then issue another get-next with the

name returned. As an example, say you wanted the next-hop address,

next-hop interface, and route-type from a routing table containing 1000

entries. Using the simplest form of get-next, this would require 2x3x1000

or 6000 packets (get-next and get-response packets, columns, and rows).A

straight-forward optimization would be to request the three columns in a

single packet. This puts the number of packets at 2x1000 or 2000 packets.

In real time, it is the product of the round trip by the number of request.

In agent CPU time, this is still 6000 lookups in the routing table for both

cases.

An Early Approach to Getting More than One Item at a Time

The ability to retrieve only one piece or object at a time has been a

problem for SNMP. This is particularly an issue with the use of this

protocol in wireless environments where the wireless datapipe is small and

overhead due to network management it is considered overhead. One

approach creates multiple get-next requests running concurrently. A second

algorithm, reduces the packet count by combining the multiple concurrent

get-nexts into a single packet. Neither approach has been implemented

which makes network management in wireless environment, though

essential to the success of the operation, tenuous. The issue has been

resolved in SNMP V2 protocol where a get-bulk primitive has been

defined.

Conclusion

Software development moves forward by evolving the unknown into the

known and wireless environments are moving from vertical only

application to wide spread implementation. At the time of the SNMP

inception, it was not possible to conceive of a reliable transport based

network management protocol. Today’ s problems require more

sophisticated data to analyze a problem. This puts the burden back on the

protocol to send and receive data quickly and efficiently. Work continues

in subcommittees to improve SNMP and resolve the issues that are

developing with new applications and new network architectures.

Network Support—Chapter 4

125700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SNMP Configuration on the 700 Series Computer

In short, SNMP is an application-layer protocol that facilitates the ex-

change of management information between network devices. The 700

Series Computer is such an SNMP-enabled device. Use SNMP to control

and configure the 700 Series Computer anywhere on an SNMP-enabled

network.

The 700 Series Computer supports four proprietary Management Infor-

mation Bases (MIBs) and Intermec Technologies provides SNMP support

for MIB-II through seven read-only MIB-II (RFC1213-MIB) Object

Identifiers (OIDs).

Note: You can only query these seven OIDs through an SNMP manage-

ment station, these are not available in the Unit Manager applications.

Management Information Base

The Management Information Base is a database that contains information

about the elements to be managed. The information identifies the manage-

ment element and specifies its type and access mode (Read-Only, Read-

Write). MIBs are written in ASN.1 (Abstract Syntax Notation.1) - a ma-

chine independent data definition language. Note: Elements to be managed

are represented by objects. The MIB is a structured collection of such objects.

You will find the following MIB files either on the 700C Tools CD or on

the web via http://www.intermec.com:

SINTERMEC.MIB

Defines the root of the Intermec MIB tree.

SITCADC.MIB

Defines objects for Automated Data Collection (ADC), such as bar code

symbologies.

SITCSNMP.MIB

Defines objects for Intermec SNMP parameters and security methods,

such as an SNMP security IP address.

SITCTERMINAL.MIB

Defines objects for 700 Series parameters, such as key clicks.

Network SupportChapter —4

126 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Object Identifiers

Each object has a unique identifier called an OID. OIDs consist of a se-

quence of integer values represented in dot notation. Objects are stored in

a tree structure. OIDs are assigned based on the position of the object in

the tree. Seven MIB OIDs are shown in the followig table.

Example

The internet OID = 1.3.6.1.

MIB Object Identifiers

MIB-II Item OID Group or Table Description

ifNumber 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.1.0 Interfaces Group Indicates the number of adapters

present in the system. For the 700

Series Computer, if one adapter is

present in the system, then ifNum-

ber =1andifIndex=1.

ifIndex 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.ifIndex Interfac es Tab le (ifTab le) A unique value for each interface.

The value ranges between 1 and the

value of ifNumber.

ifDescr 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.2.ifIndex Interfaces Table (ifTable) A textual string containing informa-

tion about the interface.

ifType 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.3.ifIndex In ter faces Table (ifTable) An integer containing information

about the type of the interface. It is

equal to 1 for Other.

ipAdEntAddr 1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.1.IpAddress IP address Table

(ipAddrTable)

The IP address to which this entry’ s

addressing information pertains

(same as 700 IP address), where IP

Address is the valid non-zero IP ad-

dress of the 700 Series Computer.

ipAdEntIfIndex 1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.2.IpAddress IP address Table

(ipAddrTable)

The index value that uniquely iden-

tifies the interface to which this

entry is applicable (same as ifIndex).

ipAdEntNetMask 1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.3.IpAddress IP address Table

(ipAddrTable)

The subnet mask associated with

the IP address of this entry (same as

Subnet Mask).

Configuring with SNMP

The community string allows an SNMP manager to manage the 700 Series

Computer with a specified privilege level. The default read-only communi-

ty string is “public” and “private” is the default read/write community

string. See the specific configuration parameter to find its OID. To config-

ure the 700 Series Computers using SNMP:

1Configure 700 Series Computers for RF or Ethernet communications.

2Determine the OID (Object Identifier) for the parameter to be chan-

ged. The Intermec base OID is 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.

3Use your SNMP management station to get and set variables that are

defined in the Intermec MIBs. You can set the traps, identification, or

security configuration parameters for SNMP. See Appendix A, “Control

Panel Applets,” to learn more about these parameters.

127700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Printer Support

The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer works with the following printers

from Intermec Technologies. Contact an Intermec Representative for in-

formation about these printers.

S6820

A full-page, 80-column printer.

S6808

A 4-inch belt-mount printer.

S781T

A 2-inch belt-mount printer with a Bluetooth compatible module from

Socket Communications.

S782T

A 2-inch workboard printer.

Printer SupportChapter —5

128 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Printing ASCII

The following methods for printing using Pocket PC at this time is as fol-

lows:

SAdd port drivers to print ASCII directly to the port.

SUse LinePrinter ActiveX Control from the Software Developer’ s Kit

(SDK) - see the SDK User’ s Manual for more information.

SVia wireless printing - see the Wireless Printing Development Guide on the

700C Software Tools CD for more information.

Directly to a Port

Printing directly to the port sends RAW data to the printer. The format of

this data depends upon your application and the printer capabilities.

You must understand the printer commands available for your specific

printer. Generally, applications just send raw ASCII text to the printer.

Since you are sending data to the printer from your application directly to

the port you are in complete control of the printers operations. This allows

you to do line printing (print one line at a time) rather than the page for-

mat printing offered by the GDI approach. It is also much faster since data

does not have to be converted from one graphics format to the other (dis-

play to printer). Most Intermecprinters use Epson Escape Sequences to

control print format operations.

These commands are available in documentation you receive with your

printers or from technical support. Win32 APIs are required to print di-

rectly to the port.

Directly to a Generic Serial Port

To print directly to a generic serial port printer (non-Intermec printers):

SUse CreateFile() to open ports - COM1: can be opened on most de-

vices.

SUse WriteFile() to send data directly to the printer.

SUse CloseHandle() when you are finished printing to close the port.

IrDA Printer Driver

IrDA printing is only available on the certain devices and is supported di-

rectly by the Windows CE load via the IrSock API provided by the Micro-

soft Win32 API without need for additional drivers. Intermec 6804, 6805,

6806, 6808 and 6820 and other IrDA printers are supported.

Printer Support—Chapter 5

129700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

NPCP Printer Driver

The NPCP printer communications driver (NPCPPORT.DLL) is a

Stream Device Driver built into the operating system. The driver supports

only NPCP communications to and from the 6820 and 4820 printers over

a selected serial port.

All applications use WIN32 API functions to access the drivers. Basic op-

erations are easily implemented by applications through the CreateFile(),

WriteFile(), ReadFile(), DeviceIOControl(), and CloseHandle() Win32

APIs.

Operations to upgrade printer modules, perform printer diagnostics, and

get printer configuration are performed largely via DeviceIOControl()

functions.

About NPCP

NPCP (NorandPortable Communications Protocol) is a proprietary pro-

tocol that provides session, network, and datalink services for Intermec

mobile computers in the Intermec LAN environment used with printers

and data communications.

NPCP Driver Installation and Removal

Use LPT9: for the NPCP printer device and COM1 for the last parameter.

COM1 is the connection available via the 700 Series Computer.

Applications use the RegisterDevice() function to install the driver.

DeregisterDevice() uninstalls the device driver and frees memory space

when the driver is not required. Use the HANDLE returned by

RegisterDevice() as the parameter to DeregisterDevice().

Use the RegisterDevice() function call as demonstrated below. Specify the

full path name to the driver starting at the root for the RegisterDevice()

function to work properly. The last parameter to RegisterDevice() is a

DWORD that represents the name of the port for the NPCP stream driver

to use. Build this parameter on the stack if it is not to be paged out during

the call. The first parameter “LPT” (Device Name) and the second

parameter “9’ (index), indicate the name of the registered device, such as

LPT9. This is used in the CreateFile() function call.

Install()

{

HANDLE hDevice;

TCHAR port[6];

port[0] = TCHAR(‘C’);

port[1] = TCHAR(‘O’);

port[2] = TCHAR(‘M’);

port[3] = TCHAR(‘1’);

port[4] = TCHAR(‘:’);

port[5] = TCHAR(0);

hDevice = RegisterDevice ( (TEXT(”LPT”), 9,

TEXT(“\\STORAGE CARD\\WINDOWS\\NPCPPORT.dll”), (DWORD)port);

}

Printer SupportChapter —5

130 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Opening the NPCP Driver

The application opens the NPCP driver by using the CreateFile()

function. The call can be implemented as follows. The first parameter

“LPT9:” must reflect the device name and index used in the

RegisterDevice() function call and will fail for any of the following reasons:

hFile = CreateFile(_T(”LPT9:”), GENERIC_WRITE |

GENERIC_READ, 0, NULL, OPEN_ALWAYS, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL,

NULL);

SThe port associated with the device during RegisterDevice() is in use.

SThe NPCP device is already open.

SThe share mode is not set to zero. The device cannot be shared.

SAccess permissions are not set to GENERIC_WRITE |

GENERIC_READ. Both modes must be specified.

Closing the NPCP Driver

Using the CloseHandle() (hFile) function closes the NPCP driver. Where

hFile is the handle returned by the CreateFile() function call.

STRUE = the device is successfully closed.

SFALSE = an attempt to close NULL HANDLE or an already closed de-

vice.

Reading from the NPCP Driver

Reading of the NPCP printers is not supported since all responses from the

printer are the result of commands sent to the printer. DeviceIoControl()

functions are provided where data is to be received from the printer.

Writing to the NPCP Driver

All Print data can be sent to the printer using the WriteFile() function.

The print data written to the driver must contain the proper printer

commands for formatting. If the function returns FALSE, the NPCP error

may be retrieved using IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR. See the description on

the next page.

Printer Support—Chapter 5

131700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

NPCP Driver I/O Controls

An application uses the DeviceIoControl() function to specify an printer

operation to be performed. Certain I/O controls are required to bind and

close communication sessions with the printer, and must be completed

before any other commands to the driver can execute properly.

The function returns TRUE to indicate the device successfully completed

its specified I/O control operation, otherwise it returns FALSE. The

following I/O control codes are defined:

#define IOCTL_NPCP_CANCEL

CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x400,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)

#define IOCTL_NPCP_BIND

CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x401,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)

#define IOCTL_NPCP_CLOSE

CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x402,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)

#define IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR

CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x403,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)

#define IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH

CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x404,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)

#define IOCTL_NPCP_IOCTL

CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x405,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)

#define IOCTL_NPCP_PRTVER

CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x406,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)

SIOCTL_NPCP_CANCEL

This cancels all printing at the printer. It flushes the printer buffers and

reinitializes the printer to its default state. No parameters are required.

SIOCTL_NPCP_BIND

This command is required before any data is sent or received by the

printer. Once the driver is opened, the application must bind the com-

munications session with the printer before any data can be sent or re-

ceived by the printer. If an error occurs during the bind, the application

may use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the current extended error

code. No parameters are required.

SIOCTL_NPCP_CLOSE

This command closes the current session with the printer. This function

always returns TRUE. No parameters are required.

SIOCTL_NPCP_ERROR

This command returns the extended NPCP error code in PL/N format.

The word returned will contain the PL/N compatible error code in the

low byte and completion flags in the high byte. If the frame that re-

turned an error was not received correctly by the printer the

FRAME_NOT_ACKED bit will be set in the high byte. This operation

always returns TRUE. An output buffer of at least 2 bytes is required.

See “NPCP Error Codes” on page 133.

SIOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH

This command allows the application to poll the printer for errors while

the report is completing the print process at the printer. If an error oc-

curs during the polling process, the operation will return FALSE and the

application can get the extended error code by using

IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR. No parameters are required.

Printer SupportChapter —5

132 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

NPCP Printer Communications

All NPCP printer communications should be based on the following flow:

1Use CreateFile(); to open the printer driver.

2Use IOCTL_NPCP_BIND to bind a session with the printer;

IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to check for errors on the bind to ensure suc-

cess; and IOCTL_NPCP_CANCEL to cancel any outstanding print

jobs.

3Use IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH to poll the printer to free up printer buff-

er resources. Use IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH to poll the printer’ s status. If

an error is reported by the IOCTL, then use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR

to get the error and determine the correct recovery procedure.

4Use WriteFile(); to write your data to the printer. Check for errors and

that all data were written. Use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the ex-

tended error. If the error is critical in nature, use

IOCTL_NPCP_CLOSE, followed by CloseFile(), to end the commu-

nications session. Start a new session, beginning with step 1 to ensure

proper printing. For noncritical errors display the error and retry the

operation.

5After all data is sent to the printer, ensure that the printer continues to

print the report properly by polling the printer’ s status. Use

IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH to poll the printer’ s status. If an error is re-

ported by the IOCTL, then use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the er-

ror and determine the correct recovery procedure.

Sample Code

See sample code in the “\700 Color Dev Tools\Installable Drivers\Port

Drivers\Npcp\NPCPPrint\” directory for more details on printing, printer

communications and error code handling.

Printer Support—Chapter 5

133700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

NPCP Error Codes

Call the IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR I/O control function to receive PL/N

compatible error codes. Applications must decide how to act upon the data

returned.

// Definition of NPCP communications Errors and Printer Errors

#define PNRDY (BYTE)102 // link not ready error

#define RXTMO (BYTE)104 // link no receive error

#define TXTMO (BYTE)106 // link no transmit error

#define BADADR (BYTE)111 // frame address error

#define GAPERR (BYTE)112 // link gap error (timeout) in receive data

#define LSRPE (BYTE)113 // frame parity error on length field

#define IFTS (BYTE)120 // session layer - invalid frame this state

#define NS_NE_VR (BYTE)121 // session layer sequence error

#define NR_NE_VS (BYTE)122 // session layer sequence error

#define MAC_CRCERR (BYTE)124 // MAC CRC error

#define RLENERR (BYTE)123 // MAC too much data received

#define FRMERR (BYTE)200 // Frame Reject

#define FRMERR_IF (BYTE)201 // Frame Reject - Invalid Frame

#define FRMERR_NR (BYTE)202 // Frame Reject - NR Mismatch

#define FRMERR_NS (BYTE)203 // Frame Reject - NS Mismatch

#define NDMERR (BYTE)204 // Normal Disconnect mode error

#define BINDERR (BYTE)210 // bind error

#define IPLDUR (BYTE)221 // invalid presentation layer response

#define HEADJAM (BYTE)222 // printer head jam

#define PAPEROUT (BYTE)223 // printer paper out

#define LOWVOLTS (BYTE)224 // printer low voltage

#define HIVOLTS (BYTE)225 // printer over voltage

#define LOWBAT (BYTE)226 // printer low battery

#define COVEROFF (BYTE)227 // printer cover off error

#define HEADFAULT (BYTE)228 // printer head short or driver short error

#define PFFAULT (BYTE)229 // paper feed motor fault.

#define FRAME_NOT_ACKED 0x8000 // frame was not received by printer and need to

be resent.

Printer SupportChapter —5

134 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

O’Neil Printer Driver

The DTR printer communications driver is a Stream Device Driver

named ONEIL.DLL.

All applications use WIN32 API functions to access drivers. Basic

operations are easily implemented by applications through the CreateFile(),

WriteFile(), DeviceIOControl() and CloseHandle() Win32 APIs.

The driver supports communications to 6804DM, 6804T, 6805A, 6806,

6808, 681T, and 781 printers over a selected serial port.

DTR Driver Installation and Removal

Your application must install the device driver by using the RegisterDe-

vice() function. The driver name is ONEIL.DLL. We recommend that

you use “DTR” for the Device Name parameter, “1” for the Device Driver

index parameter, and use any of the following strings for the last parame-

ter:

SNULL (==0) Defaults to COM1 @ 9600

S“COM1” only COM port specified defaults to 9600

S“COM1:9600” sets to COM port and specified bit rate

S“COM1:19200” sets to COM port and specified bit rate

Use the HANDLE returned by RegisterDevice() as the parameter to

DeregisterDevice(). The correct usage of the RegisterDevice() function call

is demonstrated below. You may use DeregisterDevice() to uninstall the

driver.

Install()

{

HANDLE hDevice;

TCHAR port[6];

port[0] = TCHAR(‘C’);

port[1] = TCHAR(‘O’);

port[2] = TCHAR(‘M’);

port[3] = TCHAR(‘1’);

port[4] = TCHAR(‘:’);

port[5] = TCHAR(0);

hDevice = RegisterDevice ( (TEXT(”DTR”), 1, TEXT(”\\WINDOWS\\ONEIL.DLL”),

(DWORD)port);

}

Printer Support—Chapter 5

135700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Opening the DTR Driver

The application opens the DTR driver by using the CreateFile() function.

The call can be implemented as follows:

hFile = CreateFile(_T(”DTR1:”), GENERIC_WRITE, 0, NULL,

OPEN_ALWAYS, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, NULL);

The first parameter “DTR1:” must reflect the device name and index used

in the RegisterDevice() function call.

The function call will fail for any of the following reasons:

SThe port associated with the device during RegisterDevice() is currently

in use.

SThe DTR device is already open.

SThe share mode is not set to zero. The device cannot be shared.

SAccess permissions are not set to GENERIC_WRITE.

Closing the DTR Driver

Using the CloseHandle() (hFile) function closes the DTR driver. Where

hFile is the handle returned by the CreateFile() function call.

STRUE indicates the device is successfully closed.

SFALSE indicates an attempt to close a NULL HANDLE or an already

closed device.

Writing to the DTR Driver

You can use the WriteFile() function to send all Print data to the printer.

The print data being written must contain the proper formatting printer

commands.

DTR Printer Communications

All DTR printer communications should be based on the following flow:

1Use CreateFile(); to open the printer driver.

2Use WriteFile() to write your data to the printer. Check for errors and

that all data were written.

3Use CloseHandle() to close the driver.

Printer SupportChapter —5

136 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

137700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Scanner Support

The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer is available with imaging or laser

scanning technologies, including the following:

SAPS linear imager:

Reads 1D symbologies and PDF 417 bar codes. Linear imaging using

Vista Scanning technology reads low-contrast bar codes, laminated bar

codes, and bar codes displayed on CRT or TRT displays. This imaging

uses harmless LEDs for illumination and does not require any warning

labels. Vista Scanning is more reliable than lasers as it is a completely

solid state with no moving parts or oscillating mirrors.

S2D Imager:

This decodes several stacked 1D and 2D symbologies, including PDF

417 and Data Matrix without “painting.” It can also read 1D codes

from any orientation, for example the scan beam does not need to be

aligned perpendicular to the symbol in order to read it. Photography is a

secondary application; the lens in the device will favor bar code reading.

Photos are 640x480, 256 gray-scale.

S1D laser scanner:

Traditional laser scanner that decodes 1D bar codes.

SPDF 417 laser scanner:

Higher speed laser scanner that can read PDF 417 labels by “painting”

the label.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

138 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Scanner Control and Data Transfer

Note: To use the methods described below, enable Data Collection func-

tionality on the 700 Computer using the bootloader configuration menu.

See Chapter 3, “Installing Applications” for more information.

The Data Server and associated software provide several ways to manipu-

late scanner control and data transfer between the scanner subsystem and

user applications:

SAutomatic Data Collection COM Interfaces:

These COM interfaces allow user applications to receive bar code data,

and configure and control the bar code reader engine.

SITCAxBarCodeReaderControl functions:

These ActiveX controls allow user applications to collect bar code data

from the scanner, to configure the scanner, and to configure audio and

visual notification when data arrives. For more information, see the

SDK User’ s Manual.

SITCAxReaderCommand functions:

Use these ActiveX controls to modify and retrieve configuration infor-

mation using the reader interface commands. For more information, see

the SDK User’ s Manual.

SScanning EasySet bar code labels:

You can use the EasySet bar code creation software from Intermec

Technologies Corporation to print configuration labels. Scan the labels

to change the scanner configuration and data transfer settings.

Automatic Data Collection COM Interfaces

Data collection configuration and functionality cannot be accessed by any

means (including control panel applets or remote management applications)

until after the 700 Series Computer has completed initialization, which

occurs during a warm- or cold-boot or after a firmware upgrade.

When initialization is complete, the green LED on the 700 Series Com-

puter stops flashing. Changes made to configuration settings remain after a

warm boot. After a cold-boot, all configuration settings are reset to their

defaults with the exception of scanner configurations, which remain except

for the Symbology Identifier transmission option or the Preamble and

Postamble strings. To reset all configuration settings to the factory defaults,

the S9C scanner firmware must be reloaded.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

139700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

The Automatic Data Collection (ADC) functions are accessed through

custom COM interfaces. These interfaces allow the application to receive

bar code data and configure and control the bar code reader engine. The

COM interfaces include the following functions:

SIADC (starting on page 151)

SIBarCodeReaderControl (starting on page 159)

SIS9CConfig (starting on page 172)

SIS9CConfig2 (starting on page 204)

SIS9CConfig3 (starting on page 216)

SIImage Interface (starting on page 221)

Multiple ADC COM Object Support

A 700 Series Computer may have multiple reader engines to decode differ-

ent types of ADC data. For example, a bar code reader engine decodes raw

bar code data and passes it to a bar code reader COM object. An RFID

reader engine decodes raw RFID tag data and passes it to an RFID tag

reader COM object.

ADC COM interfaces are implemented as in-process COM objects. An

instance of the ADC COM object creates a logical connection to access or

control the reader engine. Specifically, the IBarCodeReadConfig or IBar-

CodeReaderControl COM objects can manage the bar code scanner con-

figuration while the ADC COM object can gather data simultaneously.

These ADC COM objects or connections can be created in a single ap-

plication or multiple applications. Up to seven instances of a COM object

can be created for a reader engine. For more information, see “How to

Create and Use the ADC COM Interfaces”below.

For data collection features, ADC COM objects also provide for read

ahead and non-read ahead data access and grid data editing.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

140 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

How to Create and Use the ADC COM Interfaces

You can also use the Input Device Functions (starting on page 149) to

create and use the ADC COM interfaces.

1Create and initialize the in-process Bar Code Reader object using

ITCDeviceOpen() (see page 149). This function returns a COM

Interface pointer to the Bar Code Reader Object created by the

function.

2Set the data grid if data filtering is desired (default grid gives the applica-

tion all the data). Below is a sample code of how to set the grid to accept

Code 39 data that starts with the letter “A” and is not a reader com-

mand.

ITC_BARCODEREADER_GRID stBCGrid;

stBCGrid.stDIGrid.szDataMask = TEXT(”A%s”);

stBCGrid.stDDGrid.dwSymbologyMask = BARCODE_SYMBOLOGY_CODE39;

stBCGrid.dwDataSourceTypeMask = ITC_DATASOURCE_USERINPUT;

HRESULT hrStatus = pIBCControl->SetAttribute(

ITC_RDRATTR_GRID,

reinterpret_cast<BYTE *>(&stBCGrid),

sizeof(stBCGrid)

);

3Issue a read to accept the bar code data. The timestamp, symbology, and

data type are put into the ITC_BARCODE_DATA_DETAILS struc-

ture. Passing in a pointer to this structure is optional. The following

sample code uses an infinite timeout.

ITC_BARCODE_DATA_DETAILS stBCDetails;

BYTE rgbBCData[1024]; // Buffer used to accept the bar code data

DWORD dwBytesReceived; // Number of bytes in the return data.

HRESULT hrStatus = pIBCControl->Read(

rgbBCData,

sizeof(rgbBCData),

&dwBytesReceived,

& stBCDetails,

INFINITE

);

4Compile and link the application.

Read-Ahead Bar Code Data Access

The Bar Code Reader COM object delivers ADC data to the connection

in read-ahead mode. In this mode, the data is queued until a COM con-

nection is ready to read it. Read-ahead mode decouples reader device per-

formance from the application performance. That is, data is read as fast as

the user can scan it, independent of the connection processing load. No

data will be scanned until the first Read() function is posted.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

141700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Grid Data Filtering

The virtual wedge retrieves scanned Automatic Data Collection (ADC)

data and sends it to the keypad driver so that the 700 Series Computer can

receive and interpret the data as keypad input. The data can be filtered so

that only data conforming to a certain text pattern or symbology will be

sent to an application. After the data is filtered, it can be edited by adding,

deleting, or rearranging portions of the text or by extracting portions of

text for further editing. To filter and edit data, you need to define the

virtual wedge grid parameters.

SGrid Processing:

Grid processing takes place in two steps:

SCompilation:

In which the user’ s grid expressions are checked for errors and

reduced to a binary form for faster matching. This is done whenever

the virtual wedge grid is set or changed by configuration software.

SMatching:

In which data is tested against the grids set in compilation. Matching

can be performed multiple times after a compilation. The AIM

symbology ID of the data being tested, including the enclosing angle

brackets, must be prepended to the incoming data.

Syntax

The basic syntax of each grid expression is:

<symID> filter-expression= > editing-expression

where:

SsymID

Is the AIM symbology ID (see the AIM Symbology ID Defaults table

starting on page 219).

Sfilterexpression

Is any character string that includes valid filter expression values (see

the “Filter Expression Values” table on the next page).

Sediting-expression

Is any character string that includes valid editing expression values (see

the “Editing Expression Values” table on page 144).

Scanner SupportChapter —6

142 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Filter Expression Values

A filter-expression can be any string of text containing the operators listed

below.

Filter Expression Values

Operator Meaning Example

Any character string not containing

thespecialcharacters:.?[]{}or\

(period, question mark, left/right

brackets, left/right curly brackets, back-

slash).

Match the string literally. super20 matches super20

\c where c is any of the special char-

acters:.?[]{}or\

(period, question mark, left/right

brackets, left/right curly brackets, back-

slash)

Remove any special meaning of c. \* matches *

.(period) Any character. . matches x

^ (tarot) Anchor the match at the beginning

of the string.

^abc matches abc, but not aabc

$ (dollar sign) Anchor the match at the end of the

string.

abc$ matches abc but not abcc

? (question mark) Repeat the preceding expression zero

or one time.

aa? matches a or aa

*(asterisk) Repeat the preceding expression zero

or more times.

ab*c matches ac, abc, abbc, etc.

+(plussymbol) Repeat the preceding expression one

or more times.

ab+c matches abc, abbc, etc.

[characterclass] A series of nonrepeating characters

denoting a class.

[abcdefhijklmnopqrstuvwxyz] is the

class of all lowercase alphas.

[rangel`rangeh] A sequential range of nonrepeating

characters denoting a class.

[a-z]istheclassofalllowercaseal-

phas.

[^characterclass] Any character except those denoted

by a character class.

[^a-z] matches a numeric digit or a

punctuation mark.

[characterclass_tag] [:alnum:] - Alphanumeric characters

[:alpha:] - Alphabetic characters

[:blank:] - Tab and space

[:cntrl:] - Control characters

[:digit:] - Numeric characters

[:graph:] - All printable characters ex-

cept space

[:lower:] - Lowercase letters

[:print:] - All printable characters

[:punct:] - Punctuation

[:space:] - White space characters

[:upper:] - Uppercase letters

[:xdigit:] - Hexadecimal digits

[[:alpha:]]* matches Dynaction,

Selmer, or NewWonder but not Su-

per20

{num} Matches exactly num repetitions. a{3} matches only aaa

{min,} Matches at least num repetitions. a{3,} matches aaaa but not aa

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

143700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Filter Expression Values (continued)

ExampleMeaningOperator

{min,max} A repetition operator like + or *, ex-

cept the number of repetitions is spe-

cified by min and max.

[a-z]{1,3} matches a, ab, or aab, but

not aabc

(expr1)|(expr2) Matches expr1 or expr2.a|b matches a or b

(subexpression) Grouping operator to consolidate

terms into a subexpression, which

can override the order of evaluation.

The subexpression is available for lat-

er matching or editing by means of

\index,where\index is between 1-9

and refers to the index-th group in

the string, counting from left to

right. \0 refers to the whole expres-

sion.

Overriding evaluation order: (ab)*c

matches c, abc, ababc, etc.

Back-referencing: (aa)bb\1 matches

aabbaa.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

144 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Editing Expression Values

This table lists the valid operators for editing expressions.

Operator Meaning Example

\index The index-th subexpression (reading left-right)

in the matched string. index must be between

0`9. \0 is the matched expression itself.

M([0-9]{6})= > \1 produces 270494 when

M270494 is scanned, stripping off the first

character.

&or\0 The matched expression itself. M[0-9]{6}= > \0-Conn and

M[0-9]{6}= > &-Conn

both produce

M270494-Conn

when M270494 is scanned.

\xhh A concise representation of the lower 256

characters in the Unicode set. When con-

verted, this is still a 16-bit value.

\x0d inserts a carriage return.

any character string Inserts any character string in the output

string.

See previous examples.

S<symID> is optional. If present, only data in the indicated symbology is

accepted.

SIf the entire expression is blank, all data is passed unchanged. If =>

editing-expression is omitted, then all data that passes through the filter is

returned unchanged. If = > editing expression is present, the data is trans-

formed by editing-expression.

SMultiple grid expressions can be compiled and are related in a logical

OR fashion. These are expressed as single grid expressions separated by

semicolons. When matching is attempted, the first grid expression from

left to right that achieves a match will cause the data to be accepted.

SAll pattern expressions and parsed data are in Unicode.

Grid Filter Example 1

This accepts a serial number in which the encoded number is a six-charac-

ter string beginning with M followed by six numeric characters.

SFilter

M[0-9]{6}

SEffect

When a bar code, such as M270494, is scanned, all data is passed.

Grid Filter Example 2

This formats a scanned Social Security number and forms it into an XML

element tagged “SSN”.

SFilter

([0-9]{3})([0-9]{2})([0-9]{4})= > <SSN > \1-\2-\3</SSN >

SEffect

A bar code, such as 123456789, is passed and reformatted to

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

145700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Grid Filter Example 3

This deletes the first three and last five characters of a 21-character Code

128 label and deletes the first two characters of a 10-character Interleaved

2 of 5 label.

SFilter

<]C > ...(.{13}).....= > \1; <]I > ..(........)= > \1

SEffect

If Code 128, AAA1234567890123BBBBB becomes 1234567890123

If Interleaved 2 of 5, AA12345678 becomes 12345678

Grid Filter Example 4

This inverts data such that the first alphabetic string (like a first name) and

second alphabetic string (like a last name) are reversed and separated by a

comma and a space.

SFilter

([[:alpha:]])+ ([[:alpha:]])+= > \2, \1

SEffect

When a bar code with the data “Dexter Gordon” is scanned, the data is

modified to read “Gordon, Dexter”.

ADC Connection

A 700 Series Computer can have both Bar Code and RFID reader engines

with each engine supporting multiple connections. Each connection allows

an application to access data or manage a configuration. An application

could have multiple connections.

// Get an instance of the ADC COM object that corresponds integrated scanner

IBarCodeReaderControl *pIBCControl;

// Pointer to the Bar Code Reader object

HRESULT hrStatus = ITCDeviceOpen( TEXT(”default”),

IID_IBarCodeReaderControl, ITC_DHDEVFLAG_READAHEAD,

(LPVOID *) &pIBCControl);

// If the ADC object was successfully created and initialized, accept bar

code data.

ITC_BARCODE_DATA_DETAILS stBCDetails;

stBCDetails.wStructSize = sizeof(stBCDetails);

BYTE rgbBCData[1024];

//Buffer used to accept the bar code data

DWORD dwBytesReceived;

// Number of bytes in the return data.

HRESULT hrStatus = pIBCControl->Read(

rgbBCData,

sizeof(rgbBCData),

&dwBytesReceived,

& stBCDetails,

INFINITE

);

Scanner SupportChapter —6

146 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

2D Imager Overview

The 700 Color optional integrated 2D Imager captures 640x480

256-grayscale images at 20 frames per second. The imager features can be

categorized into data collection features and image acquisition features as

follows:

Data Collection Features

The imager includes a decode engine capable of decoding 2D matrix

symbologies such as Data Matrix as well as the traditional 1D and stacked

symbologies (see the table on the next page for supported symbologies). The

application programming interfaces used to collect bar code data and con-

figure the imager are the same as those used for the laser scanner. This in-

cludes the keyboard wedge as well as the ADC COM interfaces and in-

cludes functionality such as data editing and data filtering. In addition, the

imager has the following configuration features (see “IS9CConfig3 Func-

tions” starting on page 216 for configuration details):

SAimer LED:

A small, rectangular-aiming LED is displayed periodically during the

image capture and decoding process. The initial duration (after scan but-

tons are pressed) of the aimer LED can be configured. This helps to select

the specific bar code to be scanned with multiple bar codes in the

image.

SScaled Illumination LED:

When the ambient light is not sufficient to decode the bar code, the red

illumination LEDs will be turned on to brighten the image. The inten-

sity of the illumination LEDs is scaled to brighten the image just

enough for decode. The reduces power consumption and the effect of

specular reflection.

SWindow size and position:

The default window size (640x480) can be reduced in size and posi-

tioned. This is useful in applications where multiple bar codes may be

present in the image and the specific bar code must be selected to be

read. For example, the window can be sized and positioned around the

aimer LED. The entire bar code must reside in the configured window

for a good decode.

Omni-directional scanning is a feature that does not require configuration.

1D and stacked symbologies as well as 2D matrix symbologies can be

scanned with the 700 Series Computer in any orientation. Thus, time is

not needed to orient the 700 horizontal as with laser scanners.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

147700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

The following table shows which bar code symbologies are supported ei-

ther by an imager or by a laser scanner.

Bar Code Symbology Imager Laser Scanner

Code 39 XX

Interleaved 2 of 5 X X

Standard 2 of 5 XX

Matrix 2 of 5 X

Code 128 XX

Code 93 X X

Codabar XX

MSI X

Plessey X

UPC X X

EAN/EAN 128 XX

Code 11 X

PDF 417 XX

Micro PDF 417 X

Telepen X

Data Matrix X

QR Code X

Image Acquisition Features

The integrated imager provides the following image acquisition features:

SReal-time and Still Image Acquisition:

This includes functions that start and stop image acquisition and read

acquired images.

SSignature Capture:

This allows the application to retrieve an image of the normalized signa-

ture. This means the image is always oriented as if the picture were tak-

en at right angles to the signature, at the same distance, and in the cen-

ter of the image no matter in what orientation the picture was taken.

Signature capture requires a PDF 417 or Code 128 bar code symbology

to be present in the image and requires the application to identify the

X,Y offsets relative to the center the bar code, the X,Y dimension of

image to be captured, and the aspect ratio of the bar code. Note the

units are in terms of the narrow element width of the bar code.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

148 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

See the following example signature capture label and dimensions. These

image acquisition features are provided through the IImage Interface

defined on page 221.

Y-axis

–Y

–X

Intelligent bar code

units

Bar code height

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

149700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Create and Delete ADC COM Object Functions

Use these functions to create and release ADC COM interfaces.

ITCDEVMGMT.H is the header file and ITCDEVMGMT.LIB is the

library.

ITCDeviceOpen

This function opens and initializes a communication channel to the de-

vice. In C++, this function returns a pointer to an interface on which the

methods are called. In C, this function returns a handle, which is the first

parameter in each of the interface function calls.

Syntax

HRESULT ITCDeviceOpen( LPCTSTR pszDeviceName, REFIID iid,

ITC_DEVICE_FLAGS eDeviceFlags, void** ppvObject );

Parameters

pszDevice [in] Pointer to a string that contains the device name

on which to initialize the logical connection.

The device name (Merlin 1) identifies a

communications port.

Use “default” for all internal scanners, such as

Imager, SE900, etc. Use “ExtScanner” for

tethered scanners.

iid [in] The identifier of the interface being requested.

eDeviceFlags [in] Enumeration that identifies the read

characteristics as follows:

SITC_DHDEVFLAG_READAHEAD

Data is buffered on behalf of the calling

applications. Data Buffering starts after the

first call to IADC::Read ().

SITC_DHDEVFLAG_NODATA

The client application is managing the device

to set its configuration or control its interface

but not to collect data from the device.

ppvObject [out] A pointer to the interface pointer identified by

iid. If the object does not support this interface,

ppvObject is set to NULL.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

SITCDeviceClose

Scanner SupportChapter —6

150 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

ITCDeviceClose

This function closes the interface opened with ITCDeviceOpen.

Syntax:

HRESULT ITCDeviceClose( IUnknown** ppvObject );

Parameters

ppvObject [in,out] A pointer to the interface pointer created by

ITCDeviceOpen. If successful on output, this

pointer is set to NULL.

Return Values

None.

Remarks

On Windows, this interface decrements the reference count. So alterna-

tively, IUnknown::Release() could be used and must be used if reference

counting is performed with IUnknown::AddRef(). On DOS, this function

closes all resources associated with the channel.

See Also

None.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

151700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IADC Functions

IADC functions provide ADC data in an input device independent man-

ner. This interface can receive bar code data, RFID data, and other ADC

data from data collection engines, such as a bar code scanner. Use IADC

functions if bar code specifics such as symbology are not important to the

application.

IADC functions are the following. IADC.H is the header file and

ITCUUID.LIB contains the IID_IADC Interface GUID value used to

obtain the interface.

SIADC::CancelReadRequest (page 152)

SIADC::Initialize (page 153)

SIADC::QueryAttribute (page 154)

SIADC::QueryData (page 155)

SIADC::Read (page 156)

SIADC::SetAttribute (page 157)

Scanner SupportChapter —6

152 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IADC::CancelReadRequest

This function cancels a pending Read() request. This call can be made on a

separate thread as a Read() or on the same thread. On a separate thread,

the function is useful in unblocking a blocked Read() so that other opera-

tions can be performed. On the same thread, this function is useful in

stopping data from being collected on behalf of a Read Ahead Client.

Syntax

HRESULT IADC::CancelReadRequest( BOOL FlushBufferedData,WORD

*pwTotalDiscardedMessages, DWORD *pdwTotalDiscardedBytes );

Parameters

FlushBufferedData [in] True Flush and discard all already

buffered data.

False Do not discard data, data will be

returned on the next read call.

pwTotalDiscardedMessages [in/out] Total number of discarded buffered

labels or tags.

pdwTotalDiscardedBytes Total number of discarded bytes.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

The return value indicates whether a read was pending.

See Also

SIADC::Initialize

SIADC::QueryAttribute

SIADC::QueryData

SIADC::Read

SIADC::SetAttribute

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

153700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IADC::Initialize

This function initializes a connection by opening a communications chan-

nel with a logical reader engine. The communications port is implicitly

identified. This communication channel is required to collect data or con-

figure the device.

Syntax

HRESULT IADC::Initialize ( LPCTSTR pszDeviceName,

ITC_DEVICE_FLAGS eDeviceFlags );

Parameters

pszDeviceName [in] Pointer to a string that contains the device name

on which to initialize the logical connection.

The device name (Merlin 1) identifies a

communications port.

Use “default” for all internal scanners, such as

Imager, SE900, etc. Use “ExtScanner” for

tethered scanners.

eDeviceFlags [in] Enumeration that identifies the read

characteristic as follows:

SITC_DHDEVFLAG_READAHEAD

Data is buffered on behalf of the calling

application. Data buffering starts after the

first call to IADC::Read ().

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

SIADC::CancelReadRequest

SIADC::QueryAttribute

SIADC::QueryData

SIADC::Read

SIADC::SetAttribute

Scanner SupportChapter —6

154 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IADC::QueryAttribute

This function retrieves a specified attribute that is device-independent.

The specified attribute can be a grid or multiclient enable status.

Syntax

HRESULT IADC::QueryAttribute (

ITC_ADC_ATTRIBUTE_ID eAttribID, BYTE rgbBuffer[], DWORD

dwBufferSize, DWORD *pnBufferData );

Parameters

eAttribID [in] Specifies the attribute. Only one attribute can be

queried at a time. See IADC::SetAttribute.

rgbBuffer [out] Contains buffer for the attribute to be queried.

The structure of lpBuffer depends on the

attribute being queried. See IADC::SetAttribute

for a description of these structures.

dwBufferSize [in] The maximum number of bytes rgbBuffer can

store.

pnBufferData [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to put the

number of bytes stored in rgbBuffer.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

SIADC::CancelReadRequest

SIADC::Initialize

SIADC::QueryData

SIADC::Read

SIADC::SetAttribute

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

155700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IADC::QueryData

This function returns the status of user input data that has been buffered.

Syntax

HRESULT IADC::QueryData ( DWORD *dwTotalBufferedBytes, WORD

*wNumberOfMessages, DWORD *dwNextMessageSize );

Parameters

dwTotalBufferedBytes [out] Total bytes buffered for connection.

wNumberOfMessages [out] Total messages buffered. For example,

each buffer contains a single bar code scan.

dwNextMessageSize [out] Size (in bytes) of the next buffered

message.

Return Values

A standard status code that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

SIADC::CancelReadRequest

SIADC::Initialize

SIADC::QueryAttribute

SIADC::Read

SIADC::SetAttribute

Scanner SupportChapter —6

156 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IADC::Read

This function requests user input data from the reader engine. This is a

blocking function that returns either when there is data or after a timeout.

Syntax

HRESULT IADC::Read ( BYTE rgbDataBuffer[], DWORD

dwDataBufferSize, DWORD pnBytesReturned, SYSTEMTIME

pSystemTime, DWORD dwTimeout );

Parameters

rgbDataBuffer [in] Pointer to the buffer that receives the data

from the device.

dwDataBufferSize [in] Maximum number of bytes that can be

stored in rgbDataBuffer.

pnBytesReturned [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to store

the number of bytes returned in

rgbDataBuffer.

pSystemTime [out] Pointer to a SYSTEMTIME structure that

will hold the time stamp of the received

data. This can be NULL if a timestamp is

not needed.

dwTimeout [in] Number of milliseconds caller waits for

data. This parameter is ignored if the

Read Ahead flag is not set.

If data is not available, returns quickly.

SINFINITE

Waits until data is available.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

SIADC::CancelReadRequest

SIADC::Initialize

SIADC::QueryAttribute

SIADC::QueryData

SIADC::SetAttribute

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

157700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IADC::SetAttribute

This function changes an attribute such as a grid specification.

Syntax

HRESULT IADC::SetAttribute ( ITC_ADC_ATTRIBUTE_ID eAttribID,

BYTE rgbData[], DWORD nBufferSize );

Parameters

eAttribID [in] Identifies the attribute to set. Only one attribute

can be set at a time. The attribute is:

SITC_MULTICLIENT_ENABLE

Indicates whether this client can coexist with

other clients.

rgbData [in] Contains data for the attribute to be set.

Depending on the eAttribID, this will be mapped

to the appropriate structure as follows:

SITC_MULTICLIENT_ENABLE

BOOL is the rgbData Data Structure.

STRUE, Client can receive data with other

clients (default).

SFALSE, Data stream to this client is turned

off when there are other clients.

SITC_DHATTR_READFILTER

ITC_READFILTER is the rgbData Data

Structure. The ITC_READFILE structure is

defined in IADCDEVICE.H as follows:

typedef struct

{

#define ITC_MAXFILTER_CHARS 240

WORD nFilterChars;

TCHAR szFilter[ITC_MAXFILTER_CHARS];

} ITC_READFILTER;

where:

SITC_MAXFILTER_CHARS

Maximum number of characters in a filter

specification. Includes NULL termination.

SnFilterChars Number of characters in

pszDataMask.

SszFilter Data mask specification. See

“Grid Data Filtering.”

nBufferSize [in] Number of bytes in rgbData.

ITC_DHATTR_READFILTER

Regular expression that performs data filtering and data editing. See “Grid

Data Filtering” on page 141 for more information.

Return Values

A standard status code that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

158 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

See Also

SIADC::CancelReadRequest

SIADC::Initialize

SIADC::QueryAttribute

SIADC::QueryData

SIADC::Read

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

159700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IBarCodeReaderControl Functions

IBarCodeReaderControl functions provide functionality for bar code

collection and control only. These functions allow an application to:

STrigger the bar code laser scanner

SDisable the scanner

SReceive a bar code with details such as symbology scanned, data type

(Unicode, ASCII), and the time the data was received.

These functions include the following. IBARCODEREADER.H is the

header file and ITCUUID.LIB contains the IID_IADC Interface GUID

value used to obtain the interface.

SIBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest (page 160)

SIBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED (page 161)

SIBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize (page 162)

SIBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep (page 163)

SIBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute (page 164)

SIBarCodeReaderControl::Read (page 165)

SIBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute (page 167)

SIBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner (page 171)

Scanner SupportChapter —6

160 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest

This function cancels a pending IBarCodeReaderControl::Read request. If

the read request is blocked, issue the CancelReadRequest from a separate

thread.

Syntax

HRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest( BOOL

FlushBufferedData, WORD *pwTotalDiscardedMessages,WORD

*pwTotalDiscardedBytes );

Parameters

FlushBufferedData [in] TRUE Flushes and discards all buffered

data.

FALSE Does not discard data; data will

be returned on the next read

call.

pwTotalDiscardedMessages [in/out] Total number of discarded

buffered labels or tags.

pwTotalDiscardedBytes Total number of discarded

bytes.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

SIBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED

SIBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize

SIBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep

SIBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute

SIBarCodeReaderControl::Read

SIBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute

SIBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

161700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED

This function controls LED illumination on a tethered scanner. The good

read LED and any valid LEDs will be turned on and off based on defined

parameters.

Syntax

HRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED(

ITC_BARCODE_LASER_LED_ID eLED, BOOL fLedOn );

Parameters

eLED [in] The specified LED identifier.

SITC_BARCODE_LASER_GOOD_READ_LED

Identifies the good read LED.

fLedOn [in] TRUE turns on the LED. FALSE turns off the LED.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

This function does not coordinate LED control with the scanner. If the

scanner LED control is enabled, function results will be unpredictable.

See Also

SIBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest

SIBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize

SIBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep

SIBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute

SIBarCodeReaderControl::Read

SIBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute

SIBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner

Scanner SupportChapter —6

162 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize

This function opens and initializes a communications channel with a log-

ical bar code reader engine.

Syntax

HRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize ( LPCTSTR

pszDeviceName, ITC_DEVICE_FLAGS eDeviceFlags );

Parameters

pszDeviceName [in] Pointer to a string with device on which to

initialize the logical connection. The device

identifies a communications port. Use “default”

for all internal scanners, such as Imager, SE900,

etc. Use “ExtScanner” for tethered scanners.

eDeviceFlags [in] Enumeration that identifies the read

characteristic as follows:

SITC_DHDEVFLAG_READAHEAD

Data is buffered on behalf of the calling

applications. Data Buffering starts after the

first call to IADC::Read ().

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

SIBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest

SIBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED

SIBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep

SIBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute

SIBarCodeReaderControl::Read

SIBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute

SIBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

163700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep

This function causes the reader engine to generate a high beep, a low beep,

or a custom beep. The high beep and low beep are preconfigured beep

tones and durations. The custom beep allows the client to specify the fre-

quency and duration. The volume is the current volume setting. Note this

is not implemented.

Syntax

HRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep( ITC_BEEP_SPEC

rgBeepRequests[], DWORD dwNumberOfBeeps );

Parameters

rgBeepRequests [in] Array of ITC_BEEP_SPEC structures that

identifies the beep type. The beep structure

is:

typedef struct tagITCBeepSpec

{

ITC_BEEP_TYPE eBeepType; // Identifies the type of beep

// Following fields used only if the beep type is ITC_CUSTOM_BEEP.

WORD wPitch; // Frequency, in Hz, of the beep.

WORD wOnDuration; // Duration, in milliseconds, of Beep On.

WORD wOffDuration; // Duration, in milliseconds, of Beep Off

// Beep Off is used to separate individual beeps

} ITC_BEEP_SPEC;

typedef enum tagITCBeepType

{

ITC_LOW_BEEP, // Issue the default low beep.

ITC_HIGH_BEEP, // Issue the default high beep.

ITC_CUSTOM_BEEP, // Issue a custom beep.

} ITC_BEEP_TYPE;

dwNumberOfBeeps [in] Identifies the total number of beeps in

rgBeepRequests.

Return Values

E_NOTIMPL as this function is not implemented.

Remarks

None.

See Also

SIBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest

SIBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED

SIBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize

SIBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute

SIBarCodeReaderControl::Read

SIBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute

SIBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner

Scanner SupportChapter —6

164 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute

This function retrieves the device-specific grid, the scanner enable status,

and the LED control status for the current bar code reader engine.

Syntax

HRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute (

ITC_BARCODEREADER_ATTRIBUTE_ID eAttr, BYTE rgbAttrBuffer[],

DWORD dwAttrBufferSize );

Parameters

eAttr [in] Specifies the attribute. See

IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute on

page 167 for the attributes.

rgbAttrBuffer [out] Contains buffer for the attribute to be

queried. The structure of rgbAttrBuffer

depends on the attribute being queried.

See IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttritbute

for a description of these structures.

dwAttrBufferSize [in] The maximum number of bytes that

rgbAttrBuffer can store.

Return Values

A standard status code that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

The following attributes are not supported on the imager:

SITC_RDRATTR_TONE_ENABLE

SITC_RDRATTR_VOLUME_LEVEL

SITC_RDRATTR_TONE_FREQUENCY

SITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEPS_NUMBER

SITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEP_DURATION

See Also

SIBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest

SIBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED

SIBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize

SIBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep

SIBarCodeReaderControl::Read

SIBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute

SIBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

165700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IBarCodeReaderControl::Read

This function reads data from the bar code input device. This method per-

forms the same function as IADC::Read () except that it provides addition-

al information about data received such as bar code symbology used, data

type, and time stamp of received data.

Syntax

HRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::Read ( BYTE

rgbDataBuffer[],DWORD dwDataBufferSize, DWORD

pnBytesReturned,ITC_BARCODE_DATA_DETAILS

pBarCodeDataDetails, DWORD dwTimeout );

Parameters

rgbDataBuffer [in] Pointer to the buffer that receives data

from the device.

dwDataBufferSize [in] Maximum number of bytes that can be

stored in rgbDataBuffer.

pnBytesReturned [out] Pointer to the DWORD location that will

store the bytes returned in rgbDataBuffer.

pBarCodeDataDetails [in] Address of data structure in which to put

the data details. This may be NULL. The

ITC_BARCODE_DATA_DETAILS is:

typedef struct tagITCBarCodeDetails

{

WORD wStructSize,

ITC_BARCODE_SYMBOLOGY_ID eSymbology,

ITC_BARCODE_DATATYPE eDataType,

SYSTEMTIME stTimeStamp,

}ITC_BARCODE_DATA_DETAILS;

typedef enum tagBarCodeDataType

{

BARCODE_DATA_TYPE_UNKNOWN = 1,

BARCODE_DATA_TYPE_ASCII,

BARCODE_DATA_TYPE_UNICODE,

}ITC_BARCODE_DATATYPE;

where:

SwStructSize Size of structure. Used for versioning structure.

SeSymbology Symbology of the returned data.

SeDataType Identifies data types as ASCII, UNICODE, etc.

SstTimeStamp Timestamp of the received data.

SBARCODE_DATA_TYPE_UNKNOWN Data in unknown.

SBARCODE_DATA_TYPE_ASCII Data is ASCII.

SBARCODE_DATA_TYPE_UNICODE Data is UNICODE.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

166 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

dwTimeout [in] Number of milliseconds caller waits for

data. If you set a timeout, the call will be

blocked until data is received.

If data not available, returns quickly.

SINFINITE

Waits until data is available.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

SIBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest

SIBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED

SIBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize

SIBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep

SIBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute

SIBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute

SIBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

167700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute

This function enables and disables the laser scanner, sets the bar code read-

er engine specific grid, and enables or disables the reader engine LED con-

trol.

Syntax

HRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute (

ITC_BARCODEREADER_ATTRIBUTE_ID eAttr, BYTE rgbAttrBuffer[],

DWORD dwAttrBufferSize );

Parameters

eAttr [in] Identifies the attribute to set. Only one attribute can be set

at a time. The attributes are:

SITC_RDRATTR_SCANNER_ENABLE

Enable or disable scanner for all connections.

SITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_LED_ENABLE

Enables and disables the reader engine from controlling

the good read LED.

SITC_RDRATTR_TONE_ENABLE

Enables and disables the reader engine from issuing

beeps.

SITC_RDRATTR_VOLUME_LEVEL

Sets beep volume level.

SITC_RDRATTR_TONE_FREQUENCY

Sets beep frequency.

SITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEPS_NUMBER

Sets number of beeps for a good read.

SITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEP_DURATION

Sets duration of beeps for a good read.

SITC_DHATTR_READFILTER

The ITC_READFILTER is the rgbData Data Structure.

The ITC_READFILE structure is defined in

IADCDEVICE.H as follows:

typedef struct

{

#define ITC_MAXFILTER_CHARS 240

WORD nFilterChars;

TCHAR szFilter[ITC_MAXFILTER_CHARS];

} ITC_READFILTER;

where:

SnFilterChars Number of characters in pszDataMask.

SszFilter Data mask specification. See “Grid Data

Filtering.”

SITC_MAXFILTER_CHARS

Maximum number of characters in a filter specification.

Includes NULL termination.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

168 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

rgbAttrBuffer [in] Contains data for the attribute to be set. Depending

on eAttr,thergbAttrData will be mapped to the

appropriate structure as shown in the following table .

rgbAttrBuffer Data Structures

eAttr Data Structure contained in rgbAttrBuffer

ITC_RDRATTR_GRID ITC_BARCODEREADER_READER_GRID

Reader Engine specific grid only.

ITC_RDRATTR_SCANNER_ENABLE BOOL

TRUE Enable scanner.

FALSE Disable scanner.

ITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_LED_ENABLE BOOL

TRUE Reader Engine controls good read LED.

FALSE Good read LED is not controlled.

ITC_RDRATTR_DATA_VALID_LED_ENABLE BOOL

TRUE Reader Engine controls data valid LED.

FALSE Data valid LED is not controlled.

ITC_RDRATTR_TONE_ENABLE BOOL

TRUE Reader Engine issues beeps.

FALSE Beeps are not issued.

ITC_RDRATTR_VOLUME_LEVEL ITC_BEEP_VOLUME

An enumerator that identifies the beep volume level con-

trol. Valid range for S9C:

typedef enum tagBeepVolume

{

ITC_BEEP_VOLUME_LOW = 0,

ITC_BEEP_VOLUME_MEDIUM = 2,

ITC_BEEP_VOLUME_HIGH = 1 //Default

}ITC_BEEP_VOLUME

Note: Due to the hardware design on this 700 Series Com-

puter, the volume level can be either

OFF (ITC_BEEP_VOLUME_LOW) or

ON (ITC_BEEP_VOLUME_MEDIUM/HIGH).

ITC_RDRATTR_TONE_FREQUENCY DWORD

A value that identifies the tone frequency in Hz. Valid

range for S9C: 1000`4095 Hz (default: 2090).

Note: Value is divided by 10 for storage. On retrieval, the

scanner rounds off the value to the nearest 10 Hz, then mul-

tiplies the value by 10. For example, the value sent to the

scanner is 2095. On retrieval, the value returned is 2090.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

169700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

rgbAttrBuffer Data Structures (continued)

Data Structure contained in rgbAttrBuffereAttr

ITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEPS_NUMBER ITC_GOOD_READ_BEEPS_NUMBER

An enumerator identifying the good read beeps number.

Valid range for S9C:

typedef enum tagGoodReadBeepsNumber

{

ITC_NUM_BEEPS_NONE = 0,

ITC_NUM_BEEPS_ONE = 1, // Default

ITC_NUM_BEEPS_TWO = 2

}ITC_GOOD_READ_BEEPS_NUMBER

ITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEP_DURATION DWORD

Value identifying the good read beep duration in ms.

Valid range for S9C: 0`2550 ms (Default: 80).

Note: Value is divided by 10 for storage. On retrieval, the

scanner rounds the value to the nearest 10 ms, then multi-

plies the value by 10.

dwAttrBufferSize [in] The size of rgbAttrBuffer in bytes.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

Read ahead and non-read ahead clients can change the grid. Since

changing the grid changes the entire reader engine grid, use

IBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute to retrieve the current reader

engine grid and grid changes before sending back using SetAttribute. The

grid structure is typedef struct tagBarCodeReaderGrid.

{

ITC_DI_GRID stDIGrid; // Device independent grid.

ITC_DDBARCODE_GRID stDDGrid; // Reader engine dependent grid

DWORD dwDataSourceTypeMask;

} ITC_BARCODEREADER_GRID;

ITC_DI_GRID

typedef struct tagItcBarCodeGrid

{

DWORD dwSymbologyMask; // Symbologies to be received.

} ITC_DDBARCODE_GRID;

When the scanner is enabled, it scans when the scan button is pressed or

the trigger is pulled. When the scanner is disabled, it does not respond

when the scan button is pressed or the trigger is pulled.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

170 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

The following attributes are not supported on the imager:

SITC_RDRATTR_TONE_ENABLE

SITC_RDRATTR_VOLUME_LEVEL

SITC_RDRATTR_TONE_FREQUENCY

SITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEPS_NUMBER

SITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEP_DURATION

See Also

SIBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest

SIBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED

SIBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize

SIBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep

SIBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute

SIBarCodeReaderControl::Read

SIBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

171700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner

This function turns the scanner on and off. The client application must

coordinate control of the scanner with the user.

Syntax

HRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner ( BOOL

fScannerOn );

Parameters

fScannerOn [in] Set TRUE to turn the scanner on. Set FALSE to turn

the scanner off.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

The scanner will be turned on or off independent of the actions of the us-

ers. The client application must coordinate control of the scanner with the

user. When the scanner is turned on, its behavior is controlled by the trig-

ger mode. That is, in one shot mode, the laser turns off when a label is

scanned; in auto-trigger mode, the laser remains on.

See Also

SIBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest

SIBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED

SIBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize

SIBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep

SIBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute

SIBarCodeReaderControl::Read

SIBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute

Scanner SupportChapter —6

172 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig Functions

This interface provides methods to set and retrieve the 700 Series Com-

puter bar code configuration. All supported symbologies are initialized to

their defaults when the S9C firmware is loaded.

GET/SET functions use enumerations as their parameters. In most enu-

merations, there is an enumerator xx_NO_CHANGE (such as

ITC_CODE39_NO_CHANGE), where xx refers to a particular enum-

eration. This enumerator can be used during a call to a SET to indicate

that no change is to be made to that particular parameter. This prevents

the called function from having to format the same S9C command and

send down to the S9C scanner.

For all symbologies, to set a bar code length of “any length,” use a value of

“0” for the bar code length argument.

IS9CConfig functions are the following. IS9CCONFIG.H is the header

file and ITCUUID.LIB contains the IID_IADC Interface GUID value

used to obtain the interface.

SIS9CConfig::GetCodabar (page 173)

SIS9CConfig::SetCodabar (page 174)

SIS9CConfig::GetCode39 (page 176)

SIS9CConfig::SetCode39 (page 177)

SIS9CConfig::GetCode93 (page 179)

SIS9CConfig::SetCode93 (page 179)

SIS9CConfig::GetCode128 (page 180)

SIS9CConfig::SetCode128 (page 181)

SIS9CConfig::GetI2of5 (page 183)

SIS9CConfig::SetI2of5 (page 184)

SIS9CConfig::GetMatrix2of5 (page 185)

SIS9CConfig::SetMatrix2of5 (page 186)

SIS9CConfig::GetMSI (page 187)

SIS9CConfig::SetMSI (page 187)

SIS9CConfig::GetPDF417 (page 188)

SIS9CConfig::SetPDF417 (page 189)

SIS9CConfig::GetPlessey (page 192)

SIS9CConfig::SetPlessey (page 192)

SIS9CConfig::GetStandard2of5 (page 194)

SIS9CConfig::SetStandard2of5 (page 195)

SIS9CConfig::GetTelepen (page 197)

SIS9CConfig::SetTelepen (page 197)

SIS9CConfig::GetUpcEan (page 198)

SIS9CConfig::SetUpcEan (page 200)

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

173700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig::GetCodabar

This function retrieves the current settings of Codabar symbology.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::GetCodabar( ITC_CODABAR_DECODING*

peDecode, ITC_CODABAR_START_STOP* peSS, ITC_CODABAR_CLSI*

peCLSI, ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_DIGIT* peCheck,

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID* peLengthId, BYTE rgbLengthBuff[],

DWORD* pdwNumBytes );

Parameters

peDecode [out] Pointer to the ITC_CODABAR_DECODING

location to receive the decoding for Codabar

symbology.

peSS [out] Pointer to the

ITC_CODABAR_START_STOP location to

receive the Start/Stop option.

peCLSI [out] Pointer to the ITC_CODABAR_CLSI location

to receive the CLSI library system.

peCheck [out] Pointer to the

ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_DIGIT location to

receive the check digit.

peLengthId [out] Pointer to the ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID

location to receive an indicator of either

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or

ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.

rgbLengthBuff [out,size_is(3)]

An array of bytes to receive 1 byte of data for

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH, or 3 bytes of data

for ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.

pdwNumBytes [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to receive a

number indicating number of bytes in

rbgLengthBuff[]: 1 byte for

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or 3 bytes for

ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

174 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig::SetCodabar

This function updates the Codabar settings with new values.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetCodabar( ITC_CODABAR_DECODING

eDecode, ITC_CODABAR_START_STOP eSS, ITC_CODABAR_CLSI

eCLSI,ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_DIGIT eCheck, ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID

eLengthId, BYTE rgbLengthBuff[],DWORD dwNumBytes );

Parameters

eDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for Codabar symbology.

eSS [in] Identifies the Start/Stop option.

eCLSI [in] Identifies the CLSI library system.

eCheck [in] Identifies the check digit.

eLengthId [in] Use

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE to

indicate no change for bar code length. Use

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH for any length and

minimum length, and set rgbLengthBuff[0] to a

valid length value.

Use ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH to

compose 1 or 2 or 3 fixed lengths, and set 3 bytes:

rgbLengthBuff[0],rgbLengthBuff[1],

rgbLengthBuff[2] with valid values.

rgbLengthBuff [in,size_is(dwNumBytes)]

An array of bytes containing bar code lengths when

eLengthId = ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or

ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.

dwNumBytes [in] Number of bytes in rbgLengthBuff[]. For S9C, this

value is 1 when

eLengthId = ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or 3

when eLengthId =

ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

175700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Codabar Default Settings

Parameter Default Valid Range

Decode Not Active ITC_CODABAR_DECODING

CLSI Library System Not Active ITC_CODABAR_CLSI

Start/Stop Not Transmitted ITC_CODABAR_START_STOP

Check Digit Not Used ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_DIGIT

Bar Code Length Minimum Length = 6 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE

Codabar Enumerations

typedef enum tagCodabarDecoding

{

ITC_CODABAR_NOTACTIVE = 0, // Default

ITC_CODABAR_ACTIVE = 1,

ITC_CODABAR_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODABAR_DECODING;

typedef enum tagCodabarStartStop

{

ITC_CODABAR_SS_NOTXMIT, // Default

ITC_CODABAR_SS_LOWERABCD, // a,b,c,d

ITC_CODABAR_SS_UPPERABCD, // A,B,C,D

ITC_CODABAR_SS_LOWERABCDTN, // a,b,c,d / t,n,*,e

ITC_CODABAR_SS_DC1TODC4, // DC1,DC2,DC3,DC4

ITC_CODABAR_SS_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODABAR_START_STOP;

typedef enum tagCodabarClsi

{

ITC_CODABAR_CLSI_NOTACTIVE = 0, // Default

ITC_CODABAR_CLSI_ACTIVE = 1,

ITC_CODABAR_CLSI_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODABAR_CLSI;

typedef enum tagCodabarCheckDigit

{

ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_NOTUSED, // Default

ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_XMIT,

ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_NOTXMIT,

ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_DIGIT;

typedef enum tagBarcodeLengthId

{

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH = 0,

ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH,

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID;

Scanner SupportChapter —6

176 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig::GetCode39

This function retrieves the current settings of Code 39.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9Cconfig::GetCode39( ITC_CODE39_DECODING*

peDecode, ITC_CODE39_FORMAT* peFormat,

ITC_CODE39_START_STOP* peSS,ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS* peSSChars,

ITC_CODE39_CHECK_DIGIT* peCheck, DWORD* pwLength );

Parameters

peDecode [out] Pointer to the ITC_CODE39_DECODING

location to receive the decoding for Code 39.

peFormat [out] Pointer to the ITC_CODE39_FORMAT location

to receive the Code 39 format.

peSS [out] Pointer to the ITC_CODE39_START_STOP

location to receive the Code 39 start/stop.

peSSChars [out] Pointer to the ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS

location to receive the Start/Stop character.

peCheck [out] Pointer to the ITC_CODE39_CHECK_DIGIT

location to receive the check digit.

pwLength [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to receive the bar

code length.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

177700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig::SetCode39

This function updates the Code 39 settings with new values.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetCode39( ITC_CODE39_DECODING

eDecode,ITC_CODE39_FORMAT eFormat, ITC_CODE39_START_STOP

eSS,ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS eSSChars, ITC_CODE39_CHECK_DIGIT

eCheck, DWORD dwLength );

Parameters

eDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for Code 39.

eFormat [in] Identifies the Code 39 Format.

eSS [in] Identifies the Start/Stop option.

eSSChars [in] Identifies the Start/Stop character.

eCheck [in] Identifies the Check digit.

dwLength [in] Identifies the bar code length.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

Code 39 Default Settings

Parameter Default Valid Range

Decoding Active ITC_CODE39_DECODING

Format Standard 43 Character ITC_CODE39_FORMAT

Start/Stop Not Transmitted ITC_CODE39_START_STOP

Accepted Start/stop Characters *only ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS

Check Digit Not Used ITC_CODE39_CHECK_DIGIT

Bar Code Length Any Bar Code Length 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE

Scanner SupportChapter —6

178 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Code 39 Enumerations

typedef enum tagCode39Decoding

{

ITC_CODE39_NOTACTIVE = 0,

ITC_CODE39_ACTIVE = 1, // Default

ITC_CODE39_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE39_DECODING;

typedef enum tagCode39Format

{

ITC_CODE39_FORMAT_STANDARD43, // Default

ITC_CODE39_FORMAT_FULLASCII,

ITC_CODE39_FORMAT_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE39_FORMAT;

typedef enum tagCode39StartStop

{

ITC_CODE39_SS_NOTXMIT, // Default

ITC_CODE39_SS_XMIT,

ITC_CODE39_SS_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE39_START_STOP;

typedef enum tagCode39StartStopChars

{

ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS_DOLLARSIGN,

ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS_ASTERISK, // Default

ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS_BOTH,

ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS;

typedef enum tagCode39CheckDigit

{

ITC_CODE39_CHECK_NOTUSED, // Default

ITC_CODE39_CHECK_MOD43_XMIT,

ITC_CODE39_CHECK_MOD43_NOTXMIT,

ITC_CODE39_CHECK_FRENCH_CIP_XMIT,

ITC_CODE39_CHECK_FRENCH_CIP_NOTXMIT,

ITC_CODE39_CHECK_ITALIAN_CPI_XMIT,

ITC_CODE39_CHECK_ITALIAN_CPI_NOTXMIT,

ITC_CODE39_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE39_CHECK_DIGIT;

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

179700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig::GetCode93

This function retrieves the current settings of Code 93.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::GetCode93( ITC_CODE93_DECODING*

peDecode, DWORD* pdwLength );

Parameters

peDecode [out] Pointer to the ITC_CODE93_DECODING

location to receive the decoding for Code 93

symbology.

pdwLength [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to receive a value

for bar code length.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

IS9CConfig::SetCode93

This function updates the Code 93 settings with new values.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetCode93( ITC_CODE93_DECODING

eDecode,DWORD dwLength );

Parameters

eDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for Code93 Symbology.

dwLength [in] Identifies the bar code length.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

Code 93 Default Settings

Parameter Default Valid Range

Decoding Not Active ITC_CODE93_DECODING

Bar Code Length Any Bar Code Length 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE

Scanner SupportChapter —6

180 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Code 93 Enumerations

Use this when the bar code length does not require any change.

typedef enum tagCode93Decoding

{

ITC_CODE93_NOTACTIVE = 0, // Default

ITC_CODE93_ACTIVE = 1,

ITC_CODE93_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE93_DECODING;

#define ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE 255.

IS9CConfig::GetCode128

This function retrieves the current settings of Code 128 symbology.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9Cconfig::GetCode128( ITC_CODE128_DECODING*

peDecode, ITC_EAN128_IDENTIFIER* peEan128Ident,

ITC_CODE128_CIP128 peCip128State, BYTE* pbyFNC1, DWORD*

pdwLength );

Parameters

peDecode [out] Pointer to the ITC_CODE128_DECODING

location to receive the decoding for Code 128

symbology.

peEan128Ident [out] Pointer to the ITC_EAN128_IDENTIFIER

location to receive the EAN 128 identifier.

peCip128State [out] Pointer to the ITC_CODE128_CIP128

location to receive the CIP 128.

pbyFNC1 [out] Pointer to the BYTE location to receive the

FNC1 separator character.

pdwLength [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to receive a

value for bar code length.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

181700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig::SetCode128

This function updates the Code 128 settings with new values.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetCode128( ITC_CODE128_DECODING

eDecode, ITC_EAN128_IDENTIFIER eEan128Ident,

ITC_CODE128_CIP128 eCip128State, BYTE byFNC1, DWORD dwLength

);

Parameters

eDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for Code 128 symbology.

eEan128Ident [in] Identifies the EAN 128 identifier.

eCip128State [in] Identifies the CIP 128.

byFNC1 [in] Identifies the FNC1 separator character, usually

any ASCII value.

dwLength [in] Identifies the bar code length.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

Code 128/EAN 128 Default Settings

Parameter Default Valid Range

Decoding Not Active ITC_CODE128_DECODING

EAN 128 Identifier Include ]C1 ITC_EAN128_IDENTIFIER

CIP 128 French Pharmaceutical

Codes

Not Active ITC_CODE128_CIP128

FNC1 Separator Character (EAN

128 norms)

GS function Char

ASCII 29 or 0x1D

0x00`0xFE ITC_CODE128_FNC1_NO_CHANGE

Bar Code Length Any Bar Code Length 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE

Scanner SupportChapter —6

182 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Code 128 Enumerations

typedef enum tagCode128Decoding

{

ITC_CODE128_NOTACTIVE = 0, // Default

ITC_CODE128_ACTIVE = 1,

ITC_CODE128_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE128_DECODING;

typedef enum tagEan128Identifier

{

ITC_EAN128_ID_REMOVE,

ITC_EAN128_ID_INCLUDE, // Default

ITC_EAN128_ID_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_EAN128_IDENTIFIER;

typedef enum tagCode128Cip128

{

ITC_CODE128_CIP128_NOTACTIVE = 0, // Default

ITC_CODE128_CIP128_ACTIVE = 1,

ITC_CODE128_CIP128_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE128_CIP128;

#define ITC_CODE128_FNC1_NO_CHANGE 255.

This definition can be used when the Code128 FNC1 does not require any change.

#define ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE 255. This definition can be used when the bar

code length does not require any change.

The table below shows what to be expected for EAN 128 labels for various

symbology identifier transmit configurations and EAN 128 Identifier op-

tions.

Setup Application’s Expected Result

EAN 128 ]C1 ID Symbology ID option EAN 128 Label Other Labels

1 Include ]C1 Disabled <data> <data>

2Remove]C1Disabled <data> <data>

3 Include ]C1 AIM ID Transmitted ]C1<data> ]XY<data>

4Remove]C1AIDIDTransmitted ]C1<data> ]XY<data>

5 Include ]C1 Custom ID Transmitted Z]C1<data> Z<data>

6Remove]C1Custom ID Transmitted Z<data> Z<data>

where “X” is the symbology identifier, “Y” is the modifier character, and “Z” is the 1-byte symbology identifier.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

183700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig::GetI2of5

This function retrieves the current settings of Interleaved 2 of 5.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::GetI2of5( ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_DECODING*

peDecode, ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT* peCheck,

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID* peLengthId, BYTE rbgLengthBuff[],

DWORD* pdwNumBytes );

Parameters

peDecode [out] Pointer to the

ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_DECODING

location to receive the decoding for Interleaved

2 of 5 symbology.

peCheck [out] Pointer to the

ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT

location to receive the check digit.

peLengthId [out] Pointer to the ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID

location to receive an indicator of either

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or

ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.

rgbLengthBuff [out,size_is(3)]

An array of bytes to receives 1 byte of data for

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or 3 bytes of data

for ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.

pdwNumBytes [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to receive a

number indicating number of bytes in

rbgLengthBuff[]: 1 byte for

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or 3 bytes for

ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

184 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig::SetI2of5

This function updates the Interleaved 2 of 5 settings with new values.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetI2of5( ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_DECODING

eDecode, ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT eCheck,

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID eLengthId, BYTE rgbLengthBuff[], DWORD

dwNumBytes );

Parameters

eDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for Interleaved 2 of 5

symbology.

eCheck [in] Identifies the check digit.

eLengthId [in] Use

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE to

indicate no change for bar code length. Use

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH for any length and

minimum length, and set rgbLengthBuff[0] to a

valid length value. Use

ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH to compose

1 or 2 or 3 fixed lengths, and set 3 bytes:

rgbLengthBuff[0],rgbLengthBuff[1],

rgbLengthBuff[2] with valid values.

rgbLengthBuff [in,size_is(dwNumBytes)]

Contains bar code lengths when eLengthId =

Use ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or

Use ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.

dwNumBytes [in] Number of bytes in rbgLengthBuff[]. For S9C, this

value is 1 when eLengthId =

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or 3 when eLengthId

= ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

Interleaved 2 of 5 Default Settings

Parameter Default Valid Range

Decoding Not Active ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_DECODING

Check Digit Not Used ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT

Bar Code Length Minimum Length = 6 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

185700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Interleaved 2 of 5 Enumerations

typedef enum tagInterleaved2of5Decoding

{

ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_NOTACTIVE = 0, // Default

ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_ACTIVE = 1,

ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_DECODING;

typedef enum tagInterleaved2of5CheckDigit

{

ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_NOTUSED, // Default

ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_MOD10_XMIT,

ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_MOD10_NOTXMIT,

ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_FRENCH_CIP_XMIT,

ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_FRENCH_CIP_NOTXMIT,

ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT;

typedef enum tagBarcodeLengthId

{

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH = 0,

ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH,

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID;

IS9CConfig::GetMatrix2of5

This function retrieves the current settings of Matrix 2 of 5.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::GetMatrix2of5( ITC_MATRIX2OF5_DECODING*

peDecode, DWORD* pdwLength );

Parameters

peDecode [out] Pointer to the ITC_MATRIX2OF5_DECODING

location to receive the decoding for Matrix 2 of 5

symbology.

pdwLength [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to receive a value

for the bar code length.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

186 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig::SetMatrix2of5

This function updates the Matrix 2 of 5 settings with new values.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetMatrix2of5( ITC_MATRIX2OF5_DECODING

eDecode, DWORD dwLength );

Parameters

eDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for Matrix 2 of 5 symbology.

dwLength [in] Identifies the bar code length.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

Matrix 2 of 5 Default Settings

Parameter Default Valid Range

Decoding Not Active ITC_MATRIX2OF5_DECODING

Bar Code Length Minimum Length = 6 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE

Matrix 2 of 5 Enumerations

typedef enum tagMatrix2of5Decoding

{

ITC_MATRIX2OF5_NOTACTIVE = 0, // Default

ITC_MATRIX2OF5_ACTIVE = 1,

ITC_MATRIX2OF5_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_MATRIX2OF5_DECODING;

#define ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE 255. This definition can be used when the bar

code length does not require any change.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

187700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig::GetMSI

This function retrieves the current MSI settings.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::GetMSI( ITC_MSI_DECODING* peDecode,

ITC_MSI_CHECK_DIGIT* peCheck, DWORD* pdwLength );

Parameters

peDecode [out] Pointer to the ITC_MSI_DECODING location to

receive the decoding for MSI symbology.

peCheck [out] Pointer to the ITC_MSI_CHECK_DIGIT

location to receive the check digit.

pdwLength [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to receive the bar

code length.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

IS9CConfig::SetMSI

This function updates the MSI settings with new values.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetMSI( ITC_MSI_DECODING eDecode,

ITC_MSI_CHECK_DIGIT eCheck, DWORD dwLength );

Parameters

eDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for MSI symbology.

eCheck [in] Identifies the check digit.

dwLength [in] Identifies the bar code length.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

MSI Default Settings

Parameter Default Valid Range

Decoding Not Active ITC_MSI_DECODING

Check Digit MOD 10 checked and transmitted ITC_MSI_CHECK_DIGIT

Bar Code Length Minimum Length = 6 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE

Scanner SupportChapter —6

188 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

MSI Enumerations

typedef enum tagMsiDecoding

{

ITC_MSI_NOTACTIVE = 0, // Default

ITC_MSI_ACTIVE = 1,

ITC_MSI_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_MSI_DECODING;

typedef enum tagMsiCheckDigit

{

ITC_MSI_CHECK_MOD10_XMIT, // Default

ITC_MSI_CHECK_MOD10_NOTXMIT,

ITC_MSI_CHECK_DOUBLEMOD10_XMIT,

ITC_MSI_CHECK_DOUBLEMOD10_NOTXMIT,

ITC_MSI_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_MSI_CHECK_DIGIT;

#define ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE 255. This definition can be used when the bar

code length does not require any change.

IS9CConfig::GetPDF417

This function retrieves the current PDF417 settings.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::GetPDF417( ITC_PDF417_DECODING*

pePdf417Decode, ITC_PDF417_MACRO_PDF* peMacroPdf,

ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER* pePdfControlHeader,

ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME* pePdfFileName,

ITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT* pePdfSegmentCount,

ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP* pePdfTimeStamp, ITC_PDF417_SENDER*

pePdfSender, ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE* pePdfAddressee,

ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE* pePdfFileSize, ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM*

pePdfChecksum );

Parameters

pePdf417Decode [out] Pointer to the

ITC_PDF417_DECODING location to

receive the decoding for PDF417

symbology.

peMacroPdf [out] Pointer to the

ITC_PDF417_MACRO_PDF location to

receive the Macro PDF.

pePdfControlHeader [out] Pointer to the

ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER location

to receive the control header.

pePdfFileName [out] Pointer to the

ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME location to

receive the file name.

pePdfSegmentCount [out] Pointer to the

ITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT

location to receive the segment count.

pePdfTimeStamp [out] Pointer to the

ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP location to

receive the time stamp.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

189700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

pePdfSender [out] Pointer to the ITC_PDF417_SENDER

location to receive the sender.

pePdfAddressee [out] Pointer to the

ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE location to

receive the addressee.

pePdfFileSize [out] Pointer to the ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE

location to receive the file size.

pePdfChecksum [out] Pointer to the

ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM location to

receive the checksum.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

IS9CConfig::SetPDF417

This function updates the PDF417 settings with new values.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetPDF417( ITC_PDF417_DECODING

ePdf417Decode, ITC_PDF417_MACRO_PDF eMacroPdf,

ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER ePdfControlHeader,

ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME ePdfFileName, ITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT

ePdfSegmentCount, ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP ePdfTimeStamp,

ITC_PDF417_SENDER ePdfSender, ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE

ePdfAddressee, ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE ePdfFileSize,

ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM ePdfChecksum );

Parameters

ePdf417Decode [in] Identifies the decoding for PDF417 symbology.

eMacroPdf [in] Identifies the Macro PDF.

ePdfControlHeader [in] Identifies the control header.

ePdfFileName [in] Identifies the file name.

ePdfSegmentCount [in] Identifies the segment count.

ePdfTimeStamp [in] Identifies the time stamp.

ePdfSender [in] Identifies the sender.

ePdfAddressee [in] Identifies the addressee.

ePdfFileSize [in] Identifies the file size.

ePdfChecksum [in] Identifies the checksum.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

190 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

PDF 417 Default Settings

Parameter Default Valid Range

Decoding Not Active ITC_PDF417_DECODING

Macro PDF Macro PDF Buffered ITC_PDF417_MACRO_PDF

Control Header Not Transmitted ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER

*File Name Not Transmitted ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME

*Segment Count Not Transmitted ITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT

*Time Stamp Not Transmitted ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP

*Sender Not Transmitted ITC_PDF417_SENDER

*Address Not Transmitted ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE

*File Size Not Transmitted ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE

*Check Sum Not Transmitted ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM

* These are Macro PDF Optional Fields.

PDF 417 Enumerations

typedef enum tagPdf417Decoding

{

ITC_PDF417_NOTACTIVE = 0,

ITC_PDF417_ACTIVE = 1, // Default

ITC_PDF417_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PDF417_DECODING;

typedef enum tagPdf417MacroPdf

{

ITC_PDF417_MACRO_UNBUFFERED = 0,

ITC_PDF417_MACRO_BUFFERED = 1, // Default

ITC_PDF417_MACRO_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PDF417_MACRO_PDF;

typedef enum tagPdf417ControlHeader

{

ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER_NOTXMIT = 0, // Default

ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER_XMIT = 1,

ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER;

typedef enum tagPdf417FileName

{

ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME_NOTXMIT = 0, // Default

ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME_XMIT = 1,

ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME;

typedef enum tagPdf417SegmentCount

{

ITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT_NOTXMIT = 0, // Default

ITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT_XMIT = 1,

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

191700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

ITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT;

typedef enum tagPdf417TimeStamp

{

ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP_NOTXMIT = 0, // Default

ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP_XMIT = 1,

ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP;

typedef enum tagPdf417Sender

{

ITC_PDF417_SENDER_NOTXMIT = 0, // Default

ITC_PDF417_SENDER_XMIT = 1,

ITC_PDF417_SENDER_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PDF417_SENDER;

typedef enum tagPdf417Addressee

{

ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE_NOTXMIT = 0, // Default

ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE_XMIT = 1,

ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE;

typedef enum tagPdf417FileSize

{

ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE_NOTXMIT = 0, // Default

ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE_XMIT = 1,

ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE;

typedef enum tagPdf417Checksum

{

ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM_NOTXMIT = 0, // Default

ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM_XMIT = 1,

ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM;

Scanner SupportChapter —6

192 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig::GetPlessey

This function retrieves the current Plessey settings.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::GetPlessey( ITC_PLESSEY_DECODING*

peDecode, ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_DIGIT* peCheck, DWORD* pdwLength

);

Parameters

peDecode [out] Pointer to the ITC_PLESSEY_DECODING

location to receive the decoding for Plessey

symbology.

peCheck [out] Pointer to the ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_DIGIT

location to receive the check digit.

pdwLength [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to receive the bar

code length.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

IS9CConfig::SetPlessey

This function updates the Plessey settings with new values.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetPlessey( ITC_PLESSEY_DECODING

eDecode, ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_DIGIT eCheck, DWORD dwLength );

Parameters

eDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for Plessey symbology.

eCheck [in] Identifies the check digit.

dwLength [in] Identifies the bar code length.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

193700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Plessey Default Settings

Parameter Default Valid Range

Decoding Not Active ITC_PLESSEY_DECODING

Check Digit Not Transmitted ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_DIGIT

Bar Code Length Any Bar Code Length 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE

Plessey Enumerations

typedef enum tagPlesseyDecoding

{

ITC_PLESSEY_NOTACTIVE = 0, // Default

ITC_PLESSEY_ACTIVE = 1,

ITC_PLESSEY_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PLESSEY_DECODING;

typedef enum tagPlesseyCheckDigit

{

ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_NOTXMIT = 0, // Default

ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_XMIT = 1,

ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_DIGIT;

#define ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE 255. This definition can be used when the bar

code length does not require any change.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

194 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig::GetStandard2of5

This function retrieves the current Standard 2 of 5 settings.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::GetStandard2of5(

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_DECODING* peDecode,

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT* peFormat,

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT* peCheck,

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID* peLengthId, BYTE rgbLengthBuff,

DWORD* pdwNumBytes );

Parameters

peDecode [out] Pointer to the

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_DECODING

location to receive the decoding for Standard

2 of 5 symbology.

peFormat [out] Pointer to the

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT location

to receive the format.

peCheck [out] Pointer to the

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT

location to receive Modulo 10 check digit.

peLengthId [out] Pointer to the ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID

location to receive an indicator of either

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or

ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.

rgbLengthBuff [out,size_is(3)]

An array of bytes to receives 1 byte of data for

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH, or 3 bytes of data

for ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.

pdwNumBytes [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to receive a

number indicating number of bytes in

rbgLengthBuff[]: 1 byte for

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or 3 bytes for

ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

195700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig::SetStandard2of5

This function updates the Standard 2 of 5 settings with new values.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetStandard2of5(

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_DECODING eDecode, ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT

eFormat, ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT eCheck,

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID eLengthId, BYTE rgbLengthBuff[], DWORD

dwNumBytes );

Parameters

eDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for Standard 2 of 5

symbology.

eFormat [in] Identifies the format.

eCheck [in] Identifies the Modulo 10 check digit.

eLengthId [in] Use

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE to

indicate no change for bar code length. Use

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH for any length and

minimum length, and set rgbLengthBuff[0] to a

valid length value. Use

ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH to compose

1 or 2 or 3 fixed lengths, and set 3 bytes:

rgbLengthBuff[0],rgbLengthBuff[1],

rgbLengthBuff[2] with valid values.

rgbLengthBuff [in,size_is(dwNumBytes)]

An array of bytes containing bar code lengths when

eLengthId = ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or

ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.

dwNumBytes [in] Number of bytes in rbgLengthBuff[]. For S9C, this

value is 1 when eLengthId =

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or 3 when eLengthId

= ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

196 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Standard 2 of 5 Default Settings

Parameter Default Valid Range

Decoding Not Active ITC_STANDARD2OF5_DECODING

Format Identicon (6 Start/Stop bars) ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT

Check Digit Not Used ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT

Bar Code Length Minimum Length = 6 0x00-0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE

Standard 2 of 5 Enumerations

typedef enum tagStandard2of5Decoding

{

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_NOTACTIVE = 0, // Default

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_ACTIVE = 1,

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_STANDARD2OF5_DECODING;

typedef enum tagStandard2of5Format

{

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT_IDENTICON, // Default

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT_COMPUTER_IDENTICS,

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT;

typedef enum tagStandard2of5CheckDigit

{

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_NOTUSED, // Default

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_XMIT,

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_NOTXMIT,

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT;

typedef enum tagBarcodeLengthId

{

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH = 0,

ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH,

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID;

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

197700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig::GetTelepen

This function retrieves the current Telepen settings.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::GetTelepen( ITC_TELEPEN_DECODING*

peDecode, ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT* peFormat );

Parameters

peDecode [out] Pointer to the ITC_TELEPEN_DECODING

location to receive the decoding for TELEPEN

symbology.

peFormat [out] Pointer to the ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT location to

receive the format.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

IS9CConfig::SetTelepen

This function updates the Telepen settings with new values.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetTelepen( ITC_TELEPEN_DECODING*

eDecode, ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT* eFormat );

Parameters

eDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for Telepen symbology.

eFormat [in] Identifies the format.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

Telepen Default Settings

Parameter Default Valid Range

Decoding Not Active ITC_TELEPEN_DECODING

Format ASCII ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT

Scanner SupportChapter —6

198 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Telepen Enumerations

typedef enum tagTelepenDecoding

{

ITC_TELEPEN_NOTACTIVE = 0, // Default

ITC_TELEPEN_ACTIVE = 1,

ITC_TELEPEN_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_TELEPEN_DECODING;

typedef enum tagTelepenDecoding

{

ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT_ASCII, // Default

ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT_NUMERIC,

ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT;

IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan

This function retrieves the current UPC/EAN settings.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan( ITC_UPCEAN_DECODING*

upceanDecode, ITC_UPCA_SELECT* upcASelect, ITC_UPCE_SELECT*

upcESelect, ITC_EAN8_SELECT* ean8Select, ITC_EAN13_SELECT*

ean13Select, ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_DIGITS* upcAddOnDigits,

ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO* upcAddOn2, ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVE*

upcAddOn5, ITC_UPCA_CHECK_DIGIT* upcACheck,

ITC_UPCE_CHECK_DIGIT* upcECheck, ITC_EAN8_CHECK_DIGIT*

ean8Check, ITC_EAN13_CHECK_DIGIT* ean13Check,

ITC_UPCA_NUMBER_SYSTEM* upcANumSystem,

ITC_UPCE_NUMBER_SYSTEM* upcENumSystem, ITC_UPCA_REENCODE*

upcAReencode, ITC_UPCE_REENCODE* upcEReencode,

ITC_EAN8_REENCODE* ean8Reencode );

Parameters

upceanDecode [out] Pointer to the ITC_UPCEAN_DECODING

location to receive the decoding for UPC/EAN

symbology.

upcASelect [out] Pointer to the ITC_UPCA_SELECT location to

receive the UPC-A selection state.

upcESelect [out] Pointer to the ITC_UPCE_SELECT location to

receive the UPC-E selection state.

ean8Select [out] Pointer to the ITC_EAN8_SELECT location to

receive the EAN-8 selection state.

ean13Select [out] Pointer to the ITC_EAN13_SELECT location

to receive the EAN-13 selection state.

upcAddOnDigits [out] Pointer to the

ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_DIGITS location to

receive the add-on digits.

upcAddOn2 [out] Pointer to the

ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO location to

receive the add-on 2 digits.

upcAddOn5 [out] Pointer to the ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVE

location to receive the add-on 5 digits.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

199700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

upcACheck [out] Pointer to the ITC_UPCA_CHECK_DIGIT

location to receive the UPC-A check digit.

upcECheck [out] Pointer to the ITC_UPCE_CHECK_DIGIT

location to receive the UPC-E check digit.

ean8Check [out] Pointer to the ITC_EAN8_CHECK_DIGIT

location to receive the EAN-8 check digit.

ean13Check [out] Pointer to the ITC_EAN13_CHECK_DIGIT

location to receive the EAN-13 check digit.

upcANumSystem [out] Pointer to the

ITC_UPCA_NUMBER_SYSTEM location to

receive the UPC-A number system.

upcENumSystem [out] Pointer to the

ITC_UPCE_NUMBER_SYSTEM location to

receive the UPC-E number system.

upcAReencode [out] Pointer to the ITC_UPCA_REENCODE

location to receive the UPC-A reencoding.

upcEReencode [out] Pointer to the ITC_UPCE_REENCODE

location to receive the UPC-E reencoding.

ean8Reencode [out] Pointer to the ITC_EAN8_REENCODE

location to receive the EAN-8 reencoding.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

200 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan

This function updates the UPC/EAN settings with new values.

Syntax

HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan( ITC_UPCEAN_DECODING

upceanDecode, ITC_UPCA_SELECT upcASelect, ITC_UPCE_SELECT

upcESelect, ITC_EAN8_SELECT ean8Select, ITC_EAN13_SELECT

ean13Select, ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_DIGITS upcAddOnDigits,

ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO upcAddOn2, ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVE

upcAddOn5, ITC_UPCA_CHECK_DIGIT upcACheck,

ITC_UPCE_CHECK_DIGIT upcECheck, ITC_EAN8_CHECK_DIGIT

ean8Check, ITC_EAN13_CHECK_DIGIT ean13Check,

ITC_UPCA_NUMBER_SYSTEM upcANumSystem, ITC_UPCE_NUMBER_SYSTEM

upcENumSystem, ITC_UPCA_REENCODE upcAReencode,

ITC_UPCE_REENCODE upcEReencode, ITC_EAN8_REENCODE

ean8Reencode );

Parameters

upceanDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for UPC/EAN symbology.

upcASelect [in] Identifies the UPC-A selection state.

upcESelect [in] Identifies the UPC-E selection state.

ean8Select [in] Identifies the EAN-8 selection state.

ean13Select [in] Identifies the EAN-13 selection state.

upcAddOnDigits [in] Identifies the Add-on digits.

upcAddOn2 [in] Identifies the Add-on 2 digits.

upcAddOn5 [in] Identifies the Add-on 5 digits.

upcACheck [in] Identifies the UPC-A check digit.

upcECheck [in] Identifies the UPC-E check digit.

ean8Check [in] Identifies the EAN-8 check digit.

ean13Check [in] Identifies the EAN-13 check digit.

upcANumSystem [in] Identifies the UPC-A number system.

upcENumSystem [in] Identifies the UPC-E number system.

upcAReencode [in] Identifies the UPC-A reencoding.

upcEReencode [in] Identifies the UPC-E reencoding.

ean8Reencode [in] Identifies the EAN-8 reencoding.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

201700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

UPC/EAN Default Settings

Parameter Default Valid Range

Decoding ITC_UPCEAN_NO_CHANGE This parameter is no longer used, set it to this value.

UPC-A Active ITC_UPCA_SELECT

UPC-E Active ITC_UPCE_SELECT

EAN-8 Active ITC_EAN8_SELECT

EAN-13 Active ITC_EAN13_SELECT

Add On Digits Not Required ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_DIGITS

Add On 2 Digits Not Active ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO

Add On 5 Digits Not Active ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVE

UPC-A Check Digit Transmitted ITC_UPCA_CHECK_DIGIT

UPC-E Check Digit Transmitted ITC_UPCE_CHECK_DIGIT

EAN-8 Check Digit Transmitted ITC_EAN8_CHECK_DIGIT

EAN-13 Check Digit Transmitted ITC_EAN13_CHECK_DIGIT

UPC-A Number System Transmitted ITC_UPCA_NUMBER_SYSTEM

UPC-E Number System Transmitted ITC_UPCE_NUMBER_SYSTEM

Reencode UPC-A UPC-A transmitted as EAN-13 ITC_UPCA_REENCODE

Reencode UPC-E UPC-E transmitted as UPC-E ITC_UPCE_REENCODE

Reencode EAN-8 EAN-8 transmitted as EAN-8 ITC_EAN8_REENCODE

UPC/EAN Enumerations

typedef enum tagUpcEanDecoding

{

ITC_UPCEAN_NOTACTIVE = 0,

ITC_UPCEAN_ACTIVE = 1, // Default

ITC_UPCEAN_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCEAN_DECODING;

typedef enum tagUpcASelect

{

ITC_UPCA_DEACTIVATE,

ITC_UPCA_ACTIVATE, // Default

ITC_UPCA_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCA_SELECT;

typedef enum tagUpcESelect

{

ITC_UPCE_DEACTIVATE,

ITC_UPCE_ACTIVATE, // Default

ITC_UPCE_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCE_SELECT;

typedef enum tagEan8Select

{

ITC_EAN8_DEACTIVATE,

ITC_EAN8_ACTIVATE, // Default

ITC_EAN8_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_EAN8_SELECT;

typedef enum tagEan13Select

{

ITC_EAN13_DEACTIVATE,

Scanner SupportChapter —6

202 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

ITC_EAN13_ACTIVATE, // Default

ITC_EAN13_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_EAN13_SELECT;

typedef enum tagUpcEanAddonDigits

{

ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_NOT_REQUIRED, // Default

ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_REQUIRED,

ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_DIGITS;

typedef enum tagUpcEanAddonTwo

{

ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO_NOTACTIVE = 0, // Default

ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO_ACTIVE = 1,

ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO;

typedef enum tagUpcEanAddonFive

{

ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVE_NOTACTIVE = 0, // Default

ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVE_ACTIVE = 1,

ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVE_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVE;

typedef enum tagUpcACheckDigit

{

ITC_UPCA_CHECK_NOTXMIT = 0,

ITC_UPCA_CHECK_XMIT = 1, // Default

ITC_UPCA_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCA_CHECK_DIGIT;

typedef enum tagUpcECheckDigit

{

ITC_UPCE_CHECK_NOTXMIT = 0,

ITC_UPCE_CHECK_XMIT = 1, // Default

ITC_UPCE_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCE_CHECK_DIGIT;

typedef enum tagEan8CheckDigit

{

ITC_EAN8_CHECK_NOTXMIT = 0,

ITC_EAN8_CHECK_XMIT = 1, // Default

ITC_EAN8_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_EAN8_CHECK_DIGIT;

typedef enum tagEan13CheckDigit

{

ITC_EAN13_CHECK_NOTXMIT = 0,

ITC_EAN13_CHECK_XMIT = 1, // Default

ITC_EAN13_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_EAN13_CHECK_DIGIT;

typedef enum tagUpcANumberSystem

{

ITC_UPCA_NUM_SYS_NOTXMIT = 0,

ITC_UPCA_NUM_SYS_XMIT = 1, // Default

ITC_UPCA_NUM_SYS_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCA_NUMBER_SYSTEM;

typedef enum tagUpcENumberSystem

{

ITC_UPCE_NUM_SYS_NOTXMIT = 0,

ITC_UPCE_NUM_SYS_XMIT = 1, // Default

ITC_UPCE_NUM_SYS_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCE_NUMBER_SYSTEM;

typedef enum tagUpcAReencode

{

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

203700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

ITC_UPCA_XMIT_AS_EAN13, // Default

ITC_UPCA_XMIT_AS_UPCA,

ITC_UPCA_XMIT_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCA_REENCODE;

typedef enum tagUpcEReencode

{

ITC_UPCE_XMIT_AS_UPCE, // Default

ITC_UPCE_XMIT_AS_UPCA,

ITC_UPCE_XMIT_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCE_REENCODE;

typedef enum tagEan8Reencode

{

ITC_EAN8_XMIT_AS_EAN8, //Default

ITC_EAN8_XMIT_AS_EAN13,

ITC_EAN8_XMIT_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_EAN8_REENCODE;

Scanner SupportChapter —6

204 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig2 Functions

This interface is derived from the IS9CConfig interface and provides addi-

tional methods that can be used to set and retrieve the 700 Series Comput-

er’ s bar code configuration. All supported symbologies are initialized to

their defaults when the S9C firmware is loaded.

GET/SET functions use enumerations as their parameters. In most enu-

merations, there is an enumerator xx_NO_CHANGE (such as

ITC_CODE39_NO_CHANGE), where xx refers to a particular enum-

eration. This enumerator can be used during a call to a SET to indicate

that no change is to be made to that particular parameter. This prevents

the called function from having to format the same S9C command and

send it down to the scanner.

To specify a bar code length of “any length,” use a value of “0” for the bar

code length argument.

IS9CConfig2 functions are the following. IS9CCONFIG.H is the header

file and ITCUUID.LIB contains the IID_IADC Interface GUID value

used to obtain the interface.

SIS9CConfig2::GetCode11 (page 205)

SIS9CConfig2::SetCode11 (page 205)

SIS9CConfig2::GetCustomSymIds (page 207)

SIS9CConfig2::SetCustomSymIds (page 208)

SIS9CConfig2::GetGlobalAmble (page 211)

SIS9CConfig2::SetGlobalAmble (page 212)

SIS9CConfig2::GetPDF417Ext (page 213)

SIS9CConfig2::SetPDF417Ext (page 213)

SIS9CConfig2::GetSymIdXmit (page 214)

SIS9CConfig2::SetSymIdXmit (page 214)

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

205700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig2::GetCode11

This function retrieves the current settings for Code 11.

Syntax

HRESULT GetCode11( ITC_CODE11_DECODING* peDecode,

ITC_CODE11_CHECK_DIGIT* peCheck,

ITC_CODE11_CHECK_VERIFICATION* peVer );

Parameters

peDecode [out] Pointer to ITC_CODE11_DECODING location to

receive Code 11 decoding.

peCheck [out] Pointer to ITC_CODE11_CHECK_DIGIT location

to receive the check digit option.

peVer [out] Pointer to

ITC_CODE11_CHECK_VERIFICATION location

to receive the check verification option.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

IS9CConfig2::SetCode11

This function updates the current setting of Code 11 symbology.

Syntax

HRESULT SetCode11( ITC_CODE11_DECODING eDecode,

ITC_CODE11_CHECK_DIGIT eCheck, ITC_CODE11_CHECK_VERIFICATION

eVer );

Parameters

eDecode [in] An enumeration that identifies decoding option for

Code 11.

eCheck [in] An enumeration that identifies the check digit option.

eVer [in] An enumeration that identifies check verification option.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

206 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Code 11 Default Settings

Parameter Default Valid Range

Decoding Not Active ITC_CODE11_DECODING

Check Verification 1 Digit ITC_CODE11_CHECK_VERIFICATION

Check Digit Enable ITC_CODE11_CHECK_DIGIT

Code 11 Enumerations

typedef enum tagCode11Decoding

{

ITC_CODE11_NOTACTIVE = 0,

ITC_CODE11_ACTIVE = 1, // Default

ITC_CODE11_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE11_DECODING;

typedef enum tagCode11CheckVerification

{

ITC_CODE11_CHK_VERIFY_ONEDIGIT = 1,

ITC_CODE11_CHK_VERIFY_TWODIGIT = 2, // Default

ITC_CODE11_CHK_VERIFY_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE11_CHECK_VERIFICATION;

typedef enum tagCode11CheckDigit

{

ITC_CODE11_CHECK_NOTXMIT = 0, // Default

ITC_CODE11_CHECK_XMIT = 1,

ITC_CODE11_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE11_CHECK_DIGIT;

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

207700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig2::GetCustomSymIds

This function retrieves all the custom symbology identifiers defined for the

currently supported symbologies. This is not supported when using an imag-

er on the 700 Series Computer.

Syntax

HRESULT GetCustomSymIds( ITC_CUST_SYM_ID_PAIR*

pStructSymIdPair,DWORD dwMaxNumElement, DWORD* pdwNumElement

);

Parameters

pStructSymIdPair [out] Pointer to ITC_CUST_SYM_ID_PAIR

location to receive the current defined

symbology identifiers for the supported

symbologies. The caller must preallocate

this buffer with dwMaxNumElement

elements.

dwMaxNumElement [in] Maximum number of elements allocated

for the pStructSymIdPair buffer which

should always be equal to the last defined

enumeration constant + 1 of the

enumeration ITC_CUSTOM_ID. In this

case, it is

ITC_CUSTOMID_LAST_ELEMENT.

pdwNumElement [out] Pointer to DWORD location to receive

the actual number of elements returned in

the pStructSymIdPair buffer, which should

be the same as dwMaxNumElement.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

SCustom Identifier Assignments (page 209)

SCustom Identifier Example (page 210)

SCustom Identifier Default Settings (page 210)

Scanner SupportChapter —6

208 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig2::SetCustomSymIds

This function updates the symbology identifiers (any ASCII values) for the

currently supported symbologies. This is not supported when using an imag-

er on the 700 Series Computer.

Syntax

HRESULT SetCustomSymIds( ITC_CUST_SYM_ID_PAIR*

pStructSymIdPair, DWORD dwNumElement );

Parameters

pStructSymIdPair [in] Pointer to ITC_CUST_SYM_ID_PAIR

location, containing the new symbology

identifiers for any supported symbologies to

update.

dwNumElement [in] Identifies the number of symbology identifiers

to update in the pStructSymIdPair buffer.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

209700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Custom Identifier Assignments

Each custom identifier is a one byte ASCII value within the range from

0x00 to 0xff. The enumerations in the ITC_CUSTOM_ID enumerator

can be used as symbology identifications in the GetCustomSymIds() and

SetCustomSymIds() functions.

typedef enum tagCustomId

{

ITC_CUSTOMID_CODABAR = 0 Identifies the Codabar symbology

ITC_CUSTOMID_CODE39 Identifies the Code 39 symbology

ITC_CUSTOMID_CODE93 Identifies the Code 93 symbology

ITC_CUSTOMID_CODE128_EAN_128 Identifies the Code 128 symbology

ITC_CUSTOMID_EAN8 Identifies the EAN-8 symbology

ITC_CUSTOMID_EAN13 Identifies the EAN-13 symbology

ITC_CUSTOMID_I2OF5 Identifies the Interleaved 2 of 5 symbology

ITC_CUSTOMID_MATRIX2OF5 Identifies the Matrix 2 of 5 symbology

ITC_CUSTOMID_MSI Identifies the MSI symbology

ITC_CUSTOMID_PDF417 Identifies the PDF 417 symbology

ITC_CUSTOMID_PLESSEY Identifies the Plessey symbology

ITC_CUSTOMID_CODE2OF5 Identifies the Standard 2 of 5 symbology

ITC_CUSTOMID_TELEPEN Identifies the Telepen symbology

ITC_CUSTOMID_UPCA Identifies the UPC-A symbology

ITC_CUSTOMID_UPCE Identifies the UPC-E symbology

ITC_CUSTOMID_CODE11 Identifies the Code 11 symbology

ITC_CUSTOMID_LAST_ELEMENT Identifies the last element. Use to preallocate

the buffer on GetCustomSymIds

}ITC_CUSTOM_ID;

typedef struct tagCustSymbIdPair

{

ITC_CUSTOM_ID eSymbology; Identifies the symbology of interest

BYTE byteId;

ASCII value (1 byte within the range0x00 – 0xf)

}ITC_CUST_SYM_ID_PAIR;

Scanner SupportChapter —6

210 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Custom Identifier Default Settings

Symbology Default Valid Range

Codabar D0x00-0xFF

Code 11 *0x00-0xFF

Code 39 *0x00-0xFF

Code 93 D0x00-0xFF

Code128/EAN 128 D0x00-0xFF

EAN-8 0xFF 0x00-0xFF

EAN-13 F0x00-0xFF

Interleaved 2 of 5 I0x00-0xFF

Matrix 2 of 5 D0x00-0xFF

MSI D0x00-0xFF

PDF 417 *0x00-0xFF

Plessey D0x00-0xFF

Standard 2 of 5 D0x00-0xFF

Telepen *0x00-0xFF

UPC-A A0x00-0xFF

UPC-E E0x00-0xFF

Custom Identifier Example

The following code segment is an example of updating the UPC-E and

UPC-A symbology identifiers with new values, and then retrieving the

currently defined symbology identifiers for all the supported symbologies:

ITC_CUST_SYM_ID_PAIR oStructSymIdPair [ITC_CUSTOMID_LAST_ELEMENT];

oStructSymIdPair[0].eSymbology = ITC_CUSTOMID_UPCE;

oStructSymIdPair[0].byteId = 0x41; // ASCII char A

oStructSymIdPair[1].eSymbology = ITC_CUSTOMID_UPCA;

oStructSymIdPair[1].byteId = 0x42; // ASCII char B

HRESULT hr = pIS9CConfig2->SetCustomSymIds(&oStructSymIdPair[0], 2];

DWORD dwNum = 0;

HRESULT hr = pIS9CConfig2->GetCustomSymIds(&oStructSymIdPair[0],

ITC_CUSTOMID_LAST_ELEMENT, &dwNum);

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

211700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig2::GetGlobalAmble

This retrieves the scanner’ s current preamble or postamble setting.

Syntax

HRESULT GetGlobalAmble( ITC_GLOBAL_AMBLE_ID eAmbleId, BYTE

rgbBuffer[], DWORD dwBufferSize, DWORD* pdwBufferSize );

Parameters

eAmbleId [in] An enumeration of type

ITC_GLOBAL_AMBLE_ID identifies whether

the preamble or postamble setting is to be

retrieved. Only one setting can be queried at a

time.

rgbBuffer [in] Contains the buffer for the postamble or

preamble setting to be queried.

dwBufferSize [in] The maximum number of bytes that rgbBuffer

can store. Must be at least

ITC_GLOBAL_AMBLE_MAX_CHARS bytes.

pdwBufferSize [out] A pointer to DWORD location to store the

actual number of returned bytes in rgbBuffer.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

212 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig2::SetGlobalAmble

This function updates the scanner’ s current preamble or postamble setting

depending on the input parameters.

Syntax

HRESULT SetGlobalAmble( ITC_GLOBAL_AMBLE_ID eAmbleId, BYTE

rgbBuffer[], DWORD dwBufferSize );

Parameters

eAmbleId [in] An enumeration of type

ITC_GLOBAL_AMBLE_ID identifies whether

the preamble or postamble setting is to be updated.

Only one setting can be updated at a time.

rgbBuffer [in] Contains the buffer for the postamble or preamble

setting to be updated.

dwBufferSize [in] Identifies number of bytes in rgbBuffer.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

Postamble and Preamble Defaults

Parameter Default Valid Range

Preamble Null 0to20ASCIIcharacters

Postamble Null 0to20ASCIIcharacters

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

213700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig2::GetPDF417Ext

This function is an extended function for retrieving the PDF 417 settings

not included in the IS9CConfig::GetPDF417.

Syntax

HRESULT GetPDF417Ext( ITC_MICRO_PDF417_DECODING* peDecode,

ITC_MICRO_PDF417_CODE128_EMULATION* peCode128 );

Parameters

peDecode [out] Pointer to ITC_MICRO_PDF417_DECODING

location to receive the Micro PDF 417 decoding.

peCode128 [out] Pointer to

ITC_MICRO_PDF417_CODE128_EMULATION*

location to receive the Micro PDF 417 Code 128

emulation option.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

IS9CConfig2::SetPDF417Ext

This function is an extended function for updating the additional PDF

417 settings not included in IS9CConfig::SetPDF417.

Syntax

HRESULT SetPDF417Ext( ITC_MICRO_PDF417_DECODING eDecode,

ITC_MICRO_PDF417_CODE128_EMULATION eCode128 );

Parameters

eDecode [in] An enumeration that identifies decoding option for the

Micro PDF 417.

eCode128 [in] An enumeration that identifies the Code 128 emulation

option for the Micro PDF 417.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

214 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

PDF 417 Extended: Micro PDF 417 Default Settings

Parameter Default Valid Range

Decoding Not Active ITC_MICRO_PDF417_DECODING

Code 128 Emulation Not Active ITC_MICRO_PDF417_CODE128_EMULATION

* These are Micro PDF 417 parameters.

IS9CConfig2::GetSymIdXmit

This function retrieves the current symbology ID transmission option as

described on the next page.

Syntax

HRESULT GetSymIdXmit( ITC_SYMBOLOGY_ID_XMIT* peSymIdXmit );

Parameters

peSymIdXmit [out] Pointer to ITC_SYMBOLOGY_ID_XMIT

location to receive the current symbology

identifier transmission option.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

IS9CConfig2::SetSymIdXmit

This updates the symbology ID transmission option shown next page.

Syntax

HRESULT SetSymIdXmit( ITC_SYMBOLOGY_ID_XMIT eSymIdXmit );

Parameters

eSymIdXmit [in] Identifies the symbology identifier transmission

option to update.

Return Values

HRESULT that indicates success or failure.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

215700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Symbology ID Transmission Option

The symbology identifier (or code mark) concept provides a standardized

way for a device receiving data from a bar code reader to differentiate be-

tween the symbologies.

The following symbology ID transmission option specifies whether or not

the symbology ID should be transmitted as part of the scanned bar code

label to all the connected data collection applications. Options for trans-

mission are: do not transmit, transmit the standard AIM identifiers, or

transmit the one byte custom defined identifiers. AIM and custom identi-

fiers cannot be selected to be transmitted at the same time; only the last

selected option will be active.

typedef enum tagSymbologyIdXmit

{

ITC_ID_XMIT_DISABLE = 0 Symbology identifier will not be transmitted as part of the

label. This is the default setting.

ITC_ID_XMIT_CUSTOM = 1 Activate custom symbology identifier transmission for all

symbologies. Example of the transmitted label:

[preamble] [Custom ID] <data> [postamble]

ITC_ID_XMIT_AIM = 2 Activate AIM symbology identifier transmission for all

symbologies. Example of the transmitted label:

[preamble] [AIM symbology ID] <data> [postamble]

}ITC_SYMBOLOGY_ID_XMIT;

Scanner SupportChapter —6

216 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IS9CConfig3 Functions

The IS9CConfig3 interface provides generic methods for retrieving and

setting configuration using ISCP commands.

ISCP Commands

An ISCP Command is composed of three or more bytes formatted as

<SG><FID><parameters> where:

SSG Setup group.

SFID Function ID.

Sparameters One or more configuration value bytes depending on the

configuration.

ISCP commands include the following:

Imager Settings

This dictates the start and end column positions for the image dimension.

SG FID Parameter Description

0x7B 80 Value [0..639] Start column position.

0x7B 81 Value [0..639] End column position.

Trigger Settings

This sets the duration of the aiming beam before acquiring images to be

decoded.

SG FID Parameter Description

0x70 81 Value [0..65535] Number of milliseconds.

QRCode Symbology

This enables or disables the QRCode symbology.

SG FID Parameter Description

0x55 40 0 Disable this symbology.

0x55 40 1 Enable this symbology.

Data Matrix Symbology

This enables or disables the Data Matrix symbology.

SG FID Parameter Description

0x54 40 0 Disable this symbology.

0x54 40 1 Enable this symbology.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

217700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

ISCP::GetConfig

This retrieves configurations using the ISCP commands format.

Syntax

HRESULT ISCPGetConfig( BYTE rgbCommandBuff[], DWORD

dwCommandBuffSize, BYTE rgbReplyBuff[], DWORD

dwReplyBuffMaxSize, DWORD *pdwReplyBuffSize );

Parameters

rgbCommandBuff [in, size_is] Contains ISCP commands in

array of bytes.

dwCommandBuffSize [in] Number of bytes in

rgbCommandBuff.

rgbReplyBuff [in, out, size_is] Results of query in array of

bytes.

dwReplyBuffMaxSize [in] Maximum size of rgdReplyBuff.

pdwReplyBuffSize [in, out] Number of bytes placed in

rbfReplyBuff.

Return Values

None.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

218 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

ISCP::SetConfig

This updates configurations using the ISCP commands format.

Syntax

HRESULT ISCPSetConfig( BYTE rgbCommandBuff[], DWORD

dwCommandBuffSize, BYTE rgbReplyBuff[], DWORD

dwReplyBuffMaxSize, DWORD *pdwReplyBuffSize );

Parameters

rgbCommandBuff [in, size_is] Contains ISCP commands in

array of bytes.

dwCommandBuffSize [in] Number of bytes in

rgbCommandBuff.

rgbReplyBuff [in, out, size_is] Results of request in array of

bytes.

dwReplyBuffMaxSize [in] Maximum size of rgbReplyBuff.

pdwReplyBuffSize [in, out] Number of bytes placed in

rgbReplyBuff.

Return Values

None.

Remarks

None.

See Also

None.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

219700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

AIM Symbology ID Defaults

Refer to the official AIM documentation on symbology identifiers for full

information on the different processing options supported.

Symbology ID Character Modifier Characters

Codabar F 0 Standard Codabar symbol. No special processing.

1 ABC Codabar (American Blood commission)

concatenate/message append performed.

2 Reader has validated the check character.

4 Reader has stripped the check character before transmission.

Code 11 H0 Single modulo 11 check character validated and transmitted.

1 Two modulo 11 check characters validated and transmitted.

3 Check characters validated but not transmitted.

Code 39 A 0 No check character validation nor full ASCII processing. All data

transmitted as decoded.

1 Modulo 43 check character validated and transmitted.

3 Modulo 43 check character validated but not transmitted.

4 Full ASCII character conversion performed. No check character

validation.

5 Full ASCII character conversion performed. Modulo 43 check

character validated and transmitted.

7 Full ASCII character conversion performed. Modulo 43 check

character validated but not transmitted.

Code 93 G0 No options specified. Always transmit 0.

Code128 C 0 Standard data packet. No FNC1 in first or second symbol

character position after start character.

1 EAN/UCC-128 data packet. FNC1 in first symbol character

position after start character.

2 FNC1 in second symbol character position after start character.

4 Concatenation according to International Society for Blood

Transfusion specifications was performed. Concatenated data

follows.

Interleaved 2 of 5 I0 No check character validation.

1 Modulo 10 symbol check character validated and transmitted

3 Modulo 10 symbol check character validated but not transmitted.

Matrix 2 of 5 X0`F

For symbologies or symbology options not listed, a code character

with the value 0-F may be assigned by the decoder manufacturer

to identify those symbologies and options implemented in the

reader.

MSI M0 Modulo 10 symbol check character validated and transmitted.

1 Modulo 10 symbol check character validated but not transmitted.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

220 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Modifier CharactersID CharacterSymbology (continued)

PDF 417/

Micro PDF 417

L 0 Reader set to conform with protocol defined in 1994 PDF 417

specifications.

1 Reader set to follow protocol of ENV 12925 for Extended

Channel Interpretation (all data characters 92 doubled).

2 Reader set to follow protocol of ENV 12925 for Basic Channel

Interpretation (data characters 92 are not doubled).

3 Code 128 emulation: implied FNC1 in first position.

4 Code 128 emulation: implied FNC1 after initial letter or pair of

digits.

5 Code 128 emulation: no implied FNC1.

Plessey P0 No options specified. Always transmit 0.

Standard 2 of 5

(2-bar start/stop)

R 0 No check character validation.

1 Modulo 7 check character validated and transmitted.

3 Modulo 7 check character validated but not transmitted.

Standard 2 of 5

(3-bar start/stop)

S0 No options specified. Always transmit 0.

Telepen B0FullASCIImode

1 Double density numeric only mode

2 Double density numeric followed by full ASCII

4 Full ASCII followed by double density numeric

UPC/EAN EConsider UPC/EAN symbols with supplements as two separate sym-

bols. The first symbol is the main data packet, and the second symbol

is the 2 or 5 digit supplement. Transmit these two symbols separately,

each with its own symbology identifier. Provision is made for the op-

tion of transmitting both symbols as a single data packet.

0 Standard data packet in full EAN format (13 digits for EAN-13,

UPC-A, and UPC-E; does not include add-on data).

1 Two digit add-on data only.

2 Five digit add-on data only.

3 Combined data packet comprising 13 digits from EAN-13,

UPC-A, or UPC-E symbol and 2 or 5 digits from add-on symbol.

4EAN-8datapacket

IMPORTANT: The “symbology_id” character letter must be uppercase for the above definitions.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

221700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IImage Interface

The IImage interface gives the application the capability to acquire images.

The image acquired can be either a raw image as captured by the digital

camera or it can be normalized. A normalized image is presented the same

as if the picture were taken at right angles to the image and at the same

distance. The normalized image is commonly used for signature capture

applications.

SIImage::ReadSigCapBuffer (page 221)

SIImage::ReadSigCapFile (page 224)

SIImage::ReadImage (page 225)

SIImage::CancelReadImage (page 226)

SIImage::Start (page 226)

SIImage::Stop (page 227)

SIImage::Open (page 227)

SIImage::Close (page 228)

IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer

Syntax

HRESULT IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer( ITC_SIGCAP_SPEC

*pSigCapSpec, ITC_IMAGE_SPEC *pImgBuffer, DWORD nMaxBuffSize

);

Parameters

Parameters:

pSigCapSpec [in] Pointer to the structure that identifies the signature

capture region. This structure is defined as follows:

typedef struct tagITCSigCapSpec

{

DWORD dwStructSize;

INT iAspectRatio;

INT iOffsetX;

INT iOffsetY;

UINT uiWidth;

UINT uiHeight;

INT iResolution;

ITCFileFormat eFormat;

DWORD eDepth;

} ITC_SIGCAP_SPEC;

where:

SdwStructSize Size, in bytes, of this struct. This is for version control.

SiAspectRatio Ratio of the bar code height (linear bar codes) or row

height (2D bar codes) to the narrow element width.

SiOffsetX Offset in X direction, relative to barcode center.

Positive values are right of the bar code, negative

values to the left.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

222 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SiOffsetY Offset in Y direction, relative to barcode center.

Positive values are higher than the bar code, negative

values lower.

SuiWidth Width of signature capture image region in intelligent

bar code units.

SuiHeight Height of the signature capture image region in

intelligent bar code units.

SiResolution Number of pixels per intelligent bar code unit.

SeFormat Format of the image buffer returned as follows.

Currently, only ITC_FILE_RAW is supported.

ITC_FILE_KIM = 0, // Returns data a KIM file

ITC_FILE_TIFF_BIN = 1, // TIFF Binary file

ITC_FILE_TIFF_BIN_GROUP4 = 2, // TIFF Binary Group 4 compressed

ITC_FILE_TIFF_GRAY_SCALE = 3, // TIFF Gray Scale

ITC_FILE_RAW = 4, // Raw image

ITC_FILE_JPEG = 5, // JPEG image

SeDepth Number of bits per pixel. Currently, only one

(monochrome) or eight (gray-scale) are supported.

pImgBuffer [out] Pointer to the buffer in which the signature capture

image will be put.

typedef struct tagITCImageSpec

{

DWORD dwStructSize;

LONG biWidth;

LONG biHeight;

WORD biBitCount;

ITC_FILE_FORMAT eFormat;

DWORD biActualImageSize;

DWORD biMaxImageBytes;

BYTE rgbImageData[1];

} ITC_IMAGE_SPEC;

where:

SdwStructSize Size, in bytes, of this struct. This is for version

control.

SbiWidth The width of each row in pixels.

SbiHeight The number of rows in the image data.

SbiBitCount The number of bits per pixel.

SeFormat Identifies the image format.

SbiActualImageSize Total bytes of image data returned.

SbiMaxImageBytes Maximum bytes that can be stored in

rgbImageData[].

SrgbImageData Buffer containing the actual data, for example a

640x480 uses a 307200-byte buffer. The array size

of this buffer is arbitrary so do not use this

structure directly to reserve memory. The actual

dimension of the buffer is identified by

biMaxImageBytes.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

223700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Return Values

HRESULT identifying success or error. On error, the following codes will

be returned:

SS_OK

Image successfully returned.

SITC_RESULT_ERR_BADREGION_E

The specified region is not in the image.

SITC_RESULT_NO_BC_DECODED_E

A bar code has not yet been decoded or the last bar code decoded was

not a signature capture symbology.

SITC_IMGBUFF_TOO_SMALL_E

pImgBuffer is too small to contain the signature captured image.

SITC_INV_PARAMETER_E

One of the parameters is invalid.

SS_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_E

The device had not been opened.

Remarks

ReadSigCapBuffer() will return the image from the last decoded label with

dimensions identified by the calling parameter. This signature capture

region must include the signature capture bar code. The supported bar

codes for signature capture are: PDF 417, Code 128, and Code 39. The

caller specifies the width, height, and center of the image to be retrieved.

This image is independent of any rotation of the bar code relative to the

imager. Thus, if the bar code is decoded with the code itself upside down

to the imager, the retrieved image will still be right side up. However, if

the specified image is outside the field of view a result code of

ITC_RESULT_ERR_BADREGION_E will be returned.

This function uses the dimensions of the last decoded bar code as its coor-

dinate system. Thus, all the parameters describing the image size and posi-

tion are in units called “Intelligent Bar Code Units.” An Intelligent Bar

Code Unit is equivalent to the narrow element width of the bar code.

The dimensions of the resulting image can be calculated with this formula:

Resulting Width = Specified Width * Specified Resolution

Resulting Height = Specified Height * Specified Resolution

See Also

None.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

224 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IImage::ReadSigCapFile

Note: This has not been implemented as of this publication.

Syntax

HRESULT IImage::ReadSigCapFile( ITC_SIGCAP_SPEC

*pSigCapSpec, LPCTSTR pszFileName );

Parameters

pSigCapSpec [in] Pointer to the structure that identifies the signature

capture region. See ReadSigCapFile (page 221) for

a description of this structure.

pszFileName [in] Name of the file in which to copy the image.

Return Values

HRESULT identifying success or error. On error, the following codes will

be returned:

SS_OK

Image successfully returned.

SITC_RESULT_ERR_BADREGION_E

The specified region is not in the image.

SITC_RESULT_NO_BC_DECODED_E

A bar code has not yet been decoded or the last bar code decoded was

not a signature capture symbology.

SITC_FILE_OPEN_E

The file could not be opened.

SITC_INV_PARAMETER_E

One of the parameters is invalid.

SS_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_E

The device had not been opened.

Remarks

ReadSigCapFile() will write the image from the last decoded label with di-

mensions identified by the calling parameter. If the file already exists, its

contents will be overwritten.

This signature capture region must include the signature capture bar code.

The supported bar codes for signature capture are: PDF 417, Code 128,

and Code 39. The caller specifies the width, height, and center of the

image to be retrieved. This image is independent of any rotation of the bar

code relative to the imager. Thus, if the bar code is decoded with the code

itself upside down to the imager, the retrieved image will still be right side

up. However, if the specified image is outside the field of view a result

code of ITC_RESULT_ERR_BADREGION_E will be returned.

This function uses the dimensions of the last decoded bar code as its coor-

dinate system. Thus, all the parameters describing the image size and posi-

tion are in units called “Intelligent Bar Code Units”. An Intelligent Bar

Code Unit is equivalent to the narrow element width of the bar code.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

225700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

The dimensions of the resulting image can be calculated with this formula:

Resulting Width = Specified Width * Specified Resolution

Resulting Height = Specified Height * Specified Resolution

See Also

None.

IImage::ReadImage

Syntax

HRESULT IImage::Read( ITCFileFormat eFormat, DWORD nDepth,

ITC_IMAGE_SPEC *pImgBuffer, DWORD dwTimeout );

Parameters

eFormat [in] Format of the image buffer returned as follows.

Currently, only ITC_FILE_RAW is supported.

ITC_FILE_KIM = 0, // Returns data a KIM file

ITC_FILE_TIFF_BIN = 1, // TIFF Binary file

ITC_FILE_TIFF_BIN_GROUP4 = 2, // TIFF Binary Group 4 compressed

ITC_FILE_TIFF_GRAY_SCALE = 3, // TIFF Gray Scale

ITC_FILE_RAW = 4, // Raw image

ITC_FILE_JPEG = 5, // JPEG image

nDepth [in] Number of bits per pixel. Currently, only eight

(gray-scale) are supported.

pImgBuffer [in/out] Pointer to the buffer containing the image.

dwTimeout [in] Milliseconds to wait for the image to be returned.

Return Values

HRESULT identifying success or error. On error, these will be returned:

SS_OK Image successfully returned.

SITC_IMGBUFF_TOO_SMALL_E pImgBuffer is too small to contain

the signature captured image.

SITC_TIMEOUT_E Timeout.

SITC_INV_PARAMETER_E One of the parameters is invalid.

SS_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_E The device had not been opened.

Remarks

The image is returned in pImgBuffer in the caller specified format.

See Also

None.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

226 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IImage::CancelReadImage

Syntax

HRESULT IImage::CancelReadImage( );

Parameters

None.

Return Values

Status code indicating success or failure as follows:

SS_OK Imager closed.

SS_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_E The device had not been opened.

Remarks

This function causes a pending image read of IImage::ReadImage() to re-

turn immediately with an error status. The purpose of this function is to

allow the application to release a thread blocked on the ReadImage() call.

See Also

None.

IImage::Start

Syntax

HRESULT IImage::Start( );

Parameters

None.

Return Values

Status code indicating success or failure as follows:

SS_OK Imager started.

SS_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_E The device had not been opened.

Remarks

This function starts the image continuously capturing images.

See Also

None.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

227700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IImage::Stop

Syntax

HRESULT IImage::Stop( );

Parameters

None.

Return Values

Status code indicating success or failure as follows:

SS_OK Imager started.

SS_IMG_NOT_PRESENT_E Unit does not contain an imager.

SS_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_E Device had not been opened.

Remarks

This function stops the image continuously capturing images.

See Also

None.

IImage::Open

Syntax

HRESULT IImage::Open( BOOL fSigCapEnable );

Parameters

fSigCapEnable [in] When TRUE, signature capture is enabled. When

FALSE, it is disabled. Bar code labels are decoded

and images (via IImage::ReadImage) the same.

Return Values

Status code indicating success or failure as follows:

SS_OK Imager opened.

SS_IMG_NOT_PRESENT_E Unit does not contain an imager.

SS_DEVICE_CONTENTION_E Device has already been opened.

Remarks

This function exclusively allocates the imager device so that the other IIm-

age methods can be safely called.

See Also

None.

Scanner SupportChapter —6

228 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IImage::Close

Syntax

HRESULT IImage::Close( );

Parameters

None.

Return Values

Status code indicating success or failure as follows:

SS_OK Imager closed.

SS_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_E The device had not been opened.

Remarks

This function releases the imager device so that other applications can

open it. An IImage::Release() will also close the imager device.

See Also

None.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

229700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Data Collection Configuration

Scanner settings for the 700 Series Computer can be configured via the

Data Collection control panel applet. From the 700 Series Computer, tap

Start →Settings →the System tab →the Data Collection icon. See Ap-

pendix A,“Control Panel Applets” for more information about the following

parameters. Note that these are in alphabetical order.

SCodabar (page 292)

SCode 11 (page 306)

SCode 128 (page 295)

SCode 128 Options (page 296)

SCode 128 FNC1 Character (page 297)

SCode 39 (page 290)

SCode 93 (page 294)

SCode 93 Length (page 294)

SData Matrix (page 308)

SInterleaved 2 of 5 (page 303)

SMatrix 2 of 5 (page 304)

SMSI (page 299)

SPDF 417 (page 300)

SMacro PDF (page 300)

SMicro PDF 417 (page 302)

SPlessey (page 298)

SQR Code (page 307)

SStandard 2 of 5 (page 291)

STelepen (page 305)

SUPC/EAN (page 293)

Scanner SupportChapter —6

230 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Tethered Scanner

The Intermec Tethered Scanner feature accepts data from the COM1 port

wedges it to the keyboard interface, and allows some ADC. This feature

can be enabled or disabled from the Today Screen on the 700 Series Com-

puter.

Enabling and Disabling

On the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Today. Tap the bar code scan-

ner icon in the System Tray (circled in the following illustration). Initially,

the bar code scanner icon indicates that this feature is disabled (shown to

the left).

SSelect Comm Port Wedge to send any data, coming into the 700 Series

Computer through the COM1 port from an external input device, as

keyboard data to an application on the desktop.

For example, if you have Pocket Word running on your 700 Series

Computer desktop, information scanned with a scanner connected to

the COM1 port will appear in the Word document. If another data

collection application is running and is active on the 700 Series Com-

puter, the scanned information will appear in that application.

Note: When Comm Port Wedge is selected, regardless of the data sent by

the external input device, you cannot control the device or the data format

using any of the Intermec scanner control or data transfer APIs from the

SDK or the internal Data Collection software. The external input device is

governed by what software it has onboard to tell it how to scan, take pic-

tures, or send the data elsewhere.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

231700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SSelect 1551/1553 to enable the Sabre 1551E or 1553 Tethered Scanner

to scan, then send data as keyboard data. The 1551/1553 Tethered

Scanner has software onboard that translates scanned data into charac-

ters, so the running/active application does not need to know how to do

that. All the scanner control and data transfer APIs will work with the

1551/1553 Tethered Scanner, so you can control the device.

SSelect Disable All to disable this feature and use the COM1 port for

another application, such as ActiveSync. An error message will result if

this option were not selected, but this action was attempted. Similarly, if

ActiveSync is using the COM1 port, and you select Comm Port Wedge

or 1551/1553, an error message will result. See “Error Message”onpage

232 for more information.

Changing Comm Settings

Tap Change Comm Settings to configure the settings for the COM1 port.

Current settings are restored after a warm-boot, but are lost after a cold-

boot. When these settings have not been changed, the OK button is dis-

abled (grayed out). When changes are made, tap OK after it is enabled to

accept these changes.

SBaud Rate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,

115200

SData Bits:7or8

SParity: None, Odd, Even, Mark, Space

SStop Bits:1or2

SFlow Control: None or Hardware

Tethered Scanner

The default settings for the Tethered Scanner are shown in the following

illustration:

Scanner SupportChapter —6

232 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Sabre 1551E or 1553 Tethered Scanner

The default communication configuration for the Sabre 1551E or 1553

Tethered Scanner is shown in the following illustration. Scan the EasySet

Reset Factory Defaults label to set the Sabre 1551E or 1553 tethered scan-

ner communications settings to this configuration. The COM1 port con-

figuration settings must also match those of the scanner to scan labels.

Welch Allyn 1470 Imager Settings

The Welch Allyn 1470 Imager can be set to this configuration by scanning

the Factory Default Settings label.

Error Message

If the COM1 port is used by another application, such as ActiveSync, nei-

ther the Comm Port Wedge nor the 1551/1553 Tethered Scanner can be

enabled. As a result, the following message may appear. Note that this mes-

sage is for the Comm Port Wedge. You must disable that application to free

up the COM1 port before you can enable either the wedge or the scanner.

Scanner Cabling

A null modem cable is required for the Welch Allyn 1470 Imager to com-

municate with the 700 Series Computer when using the 700 Series Serial

Cable (P/N: 226-999-001).

The Sabre 1551E / 1553 Cable connects directly to the Model 700 Comm

Port.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter

233700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Limitations and Capabilities

The Tethered Scanner has the following limitations:

SNo auto detection of a scanner’ s physical connection to COM1 port.

User needs to ensure the communication settings of COM1 port

matched the settings of the device.

SThe Pocket PC Pocket Office applications misbehave when control

characters such as carriage return are wedged. This is a known Pocket

PC problem, which is being worked with Microsoft and for which a

work around is being developed.

SCommunications port is COM1 and cannot be changed.

SA complete bar code label is detected when the time between bytes (the

inter-byte gap) exceeds 100 ms. This allows that data could be concate-

nated if two labels were received while the Comm Port Wedge or the

1551/1553 Tethered Scanner was not performing a read. That is, it

could be wedging data just read or the read thread could be preempted.

Also, the labels could appear concatenated if the scanner itself were to

buffer the labels before transmitting them.

When enabled, the Comm Port Wedge menu option has the following

limitation:

SThere is no bar code API to get bar code data from the bar code scan-

ner. The Comm Port Wedge transmits the data through the keyboard

interface only.

When enabled, the 1551/1553 menu option has the following capabilities:

SGrid Data Editing is available.

SThe source of the symbology configurations is only available via the

Easy Set command labels. Only the Virtual Wedge configurations can be

configured via the Data Collection Control Panel Applet Virtual Wedge

page. See Appendix A, “Control Panel Applets,” for more information.

SMay transmit the data through the keyboard interface (via the Virtual

Wedge).

Scanner SupportChapter —6

234 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SThe bar code APIs, defined in the IADC interface, are available to get

bar code data from the bar code scanner. The following example shows

how to programmatically collects bar code data:

#include “IADC.h” // Linked with ITCUUID.LIB

#include “ITCAdcMgmt.h” // Linked with ITCAdcDevMgmt.lib

IADC* pIADC;

HRESULT hrStatus = S_OK;

// Create a ADC COM interface to collect bar code data from the 1551E/1553

// when the 1551/1553 menu option is enabled.

hrStatus =

ITCDeviceOpen(TEXT(“ExtScanner”), // Name of the ADC device.

IID_IADC, // COM interface to return

ITC_DHDEVFLAG_READAHEAD, // Device’s Flags

(LPVOID *) &pIADC); // the returned interface

if( SUCCEEDED(hrStatus) )

{

BYTE byteBuffer[MAX_LABEL_SIZE];

DWORD dwLength = 0;

HRESULT hr = pIDC->Read(

byteBuffer, // Buffer to put the ADC data.

MAX_LABEL_SIZE, // Size of pDataBuffer in bytes.

&dwLength, // Number bytes returned.

NULL, // Time stamp of the received data. NULL.

INFINITE // Number of milliseconds to wait.

);

}

when done using this COM interface, delete it:

ITCDeviceClose( (IUnknown **) pIADC);

235700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Programming

The following programming information pertains to the 700 Series Color

Mobile Computer:

SCreating CAB Files (page 236)

SFTP Server (page 251)

SFull Screen (page 262)

SKernel I/O control functions (page 264)

SReboot Functions (page 280)

SRemapping the Keypad (page 281)

ProgrammingChapter —7

236 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Creating CAB Files

The Windows CE operating system uses a .CAB file to install an applica-

tion on a Windows CE-based device. A .CAB file is composed of multiple

files that are compressed into one file. Compressing multiple files into one

file provides the following benefits:

SAll application files are present.

SA partial installation is prevented.

SThe application can be installed from several sources, such as a desktop

computer or a Web site.

Use the CAB Wizard application (CABWIZ.EXE) to generate a .CAB file

for your application.

Creating Device-Specific CAB Files

Do the following to create a device-specific .CAB file for an application, in

the order provided:

1Create an .INF file with Windows CE-specific modifications (page 236).

2Optional Create a SETUP.DLL file to provide custom control of the

installation process (page 248).

3Use the CAB Wizard to create the .CAB file, using the .INF file, the

optional SETUP.DLL file, and the device-specific application files as

parameters (page 249).

Creating an .INF File

An .INF file specifies information about an application for the CAB Wi-

zard. Below are the sections of an .INF file:

[Version]

This specifies the creator of the file, version, and other relevant informa-

tion.

Required? Yes

SSignature:“signature_name”

Must be “$Windows NT$” as Windows CE is not available on Win-

dows 95.

SProvider:“INF_creator”

The company name of the application, such as “Microsoft.”

SCESignature: “$Windows CE$”

EXAMPLE:

[Version]

Signature = “$Windows NT$”

Provider = “Microsoft”

CESignature = “$Windows CE$”

Programming—Chapter 7

237700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

[CEStrings]

This specifies string substitutions for the application name and the default

installation directory.

Required? Yes

SAppName:app_name

Name of the application. Other instances of %AppName% in the .INF

file will be replaced with this string value, such as RP32.

SInstallDir:default_install_dir

Default installation directory on the device. Other instances of %Install-

Dir% in the .INF file will be replaced with this string value. Example:

\storage_card\%AppName%

EXAMPLE:

[CEStrings]

AppName=“Game Pack”

InstallDir=%CE1%\%AppName%

[Strings]

This section is optional and defines one or more string keys. A string key

represents a string of printable characters.

Required? No

Sstring_key:value

String consisting of letters, digits, or other printable characters. Enclose

value in double quotation marks ““”” if the corresponding string key is

used in an item that requires double quotation marks. No string_keys is

okay.

EXAMPLE:

[Strings]

reg_path = Software\Microsoft\My Test App

ProgrammingChapter —7

238 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

[CEDevice]

Describes the platform for the targeted application. All keys in this section

are optional. If a key is nonexistent or has no data, Windows CE does not

perform any checking with the exception being UnsupportedPlatforms.If

the UnsupportedPlatforms key exists but no data, the previous value is not

overridden.

Required? Yes

SProcessorType :processor_type

The value that is returned by SYSTEMINFO.dwProcessorType. For

example, the value for the SH3 CPU is 10003 and the MIPS CPU is

4000.

SUnsupportedPlatforms:platform_family_name

This lists known unsupported platform family names. If the name

specified in the [CEDevice.xxx] section is different from that in the

[CEDevice] section, both platform_family_name values are unsupported

for the microprocessor specified by xxx. That is, the list of unsupported

platform family names is appended to the previous list of unsupported

names. Application Manager will not display the application for an

unsupported platform. Also, a user will be warned during the setup

process if the .CAB file is copied to an unsupported device.

EXAMPLE:

[CEDevice]

UnsupportedPlatforms = pltfrm1 ; pltfrm1 is unsupported

[CEDevice.SH3]

UnsupportedPlatforms = ; pltfrm1 is still unsupported

SVersionMin:minor_version

Numeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwVersionMinor. The

.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of this

device is greater than or equal to VersionMin.ForWindowsCEJapa-

nese language devices, set this to 2.01

SVersionMax:major_version

Numeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwVersionMajor. The

.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of this

device is less than or equal to VersionMax. For Windows CE Japanese

language devices, set this to 2.01

Note: Supported Windows CE operating system versions include 1.0,

1.01, 2.0, 2.01, and 2.10. When using these numbers, be sure to include

all significant digits.

SBuildMin:build_number

Numeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwBuildNumber. The

.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of this

device is greater than or equal to BuildMin.

SBuildMax:build_number

Numeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwBuildNumber. The

.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of this

device is less than or equal to BuildMax.

Programming—Chapter 7

239700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

EXAMPLE:

The following code example shows three [CEDevice] sections: one that

gives basic information for any CPU and two that are specific to the SH3

and the MIPS microprocessors.

[CEDevice] ; A “template” for all platforms

UnsupportedPlatforms = pltfrm1 ; Does not support pltfrm1

; The following specifies version 1.0 devices only.

VersionMin = 1.0

VersionMax = 1.0

[CEDevice.SH3] ; Inherits all [CEDevice] settings

; This will create a .CAB file specific to SH3 devices.

ProcessorType = 10003 ; SH3 .cab file is valid for SH3 microprocessors.

UnsupportedPlatforms = ; pltfrm1 is still unsupported

; The following overrides the version settings so that no version checking is

performed.

VersionMin =

VersionMax =

[CEDevice.MIPS] ; Inherits all [CEDevice] settings

; This will create a .CAB file specific to “MIPS” devices.

ProcessorType = 4000 ; MIPS .CAB file is valid for MIPS microprocessor.

UnsupportedPlatforms =pltfrm2 ; pltfrm1,pltfrm2 unsupported for MIPs .CAB file.

Note: To create the two CPU-specific .CAB files for the SETUP.INF file

in the previous example, run the CAB Wizard with the “/cpu sh3 mips”

parameter.

ProgrammingChapter —7

240 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

[DefaultInstall]

This describes the default installation of your application. Note that under

this section, you will list items expanded upon later in this description.

Required? Yes

SCopyfiles:copyfile_list_section

Maps to files defined later in the .INF file, such as Files.App, Files.Font,

and Files.Bitmaps.

SAddReg:add_registry_section

Example: RegSettings.All

SCEShortcuts:shortcut_list_section

String that identifies one more section that defines shortcuts to a file, as

defined in the [CEShortcuts] section.

SCESetupDLL:setup_DLL

Optimal string that specifies a SETUP.DLL file. It is written by the In-

dependent Software Vendor (ISV) and contains customized functions

for operations during installation and removal of the application. The

file must be specified in the [SourceDisksFiles] section.

SCESelfRegister:self_reg_DLL_filename

String that identifies files that self-register by exporting the DllRegister-

Server and DllUnregisterServer Component Object Model (COM)

functions. Specify these files in the [SourceDiskFiles] section. During

installation, if installation on the device fails to call the file’ s exported

DllRegisterServer function, the file’ s exported DllUnregisterServer

function will not be called during removal.

EXAMPLE:

[DefaultInstall]

AddReg = RegSettings.All

CEShortcuts = Shortcuts.All

[SourceDiskNames]

This section describes the name and path of the disk on which your ap-

plication resides.

Required? Yes

Sdisk_ordinal:disk_label,,path

1=,“App files” , C:\Appsoft\RP32\...

2=,“Font files”,,C:\RpTools\...

3=,“CE Tools” ,,C:\windows ce tools...

SCESignature: “$Windows CE$”

Example

[SourceDisksNames] ; Required section

1 = ,“Common files”,,C:\app\common ; Using an absolute path

[SourceDisksNames.SH3]

2 = ,“SH3 files”,,sh3 ; Using a relative path

[SourceDisksNames.MIPS]

2 = ,“MIPS files”,,mips ; Using a relative path

Programming—Chapter 7

241700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

[SourceDiskFiles]

This describes the name and path of the files in which your application

resides.

Required? Yes

Sfilename:disk_number[,subdir]

RPM.EXE = 1,c:\appsoft\...

WCESTART.INI = 1

RPMCE212.INI = 1

TAHOMA.TTF = 2

Note:[,subdir] is relative to the location of the INF file.

Example

[SourceDisksFiles] ; Required section

begin.wav = 1

end.wav = 1

sample.hlp = 1

[SourceDisksFiles.SH3]

sample.exe = 2 ; Uses the SourceDisksNames.SH3 identification of 2.

[SourceDisksFiles.MIPS]

sample.exe = 2 ; Uses the SourceDisksNames.MIPS identification of 2.

ProgrammingChapter —7

242 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

[DestinationDirs]

This describes the names and paths of the destination directories for the

application on the target device. Note Windows CE does not support directory

identifiers.

Required? Yes

Sfile_list_section:0,subdir

String that identifies the destination directory. The following list shows

the string substitutions supported by Windows CE. These can be used

only for the beginning of the path. \

%CE1% \Program Files

%CE2% \Windows

%CE3% \My Documents

%CE4% \Windows\Startup

%CE5% \My Documents

%CE6% \Program Files\Accessories

%CE7% \Program Files\Communication

%CE8% \Program Files\Games

%CE9% \Program Files\Pocket Outlook

%CE10% \Program Files\Office

%CE11% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs

%CE12% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Accessories

%CE13% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Communications

%CE14% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Games

%CE15% \Windows\Fonts

%CE16% \Windows\Recent

%CE17% \Windows\Start Menu

%InstallDir%

Contains the path to the target directory selected during installation. It

is declared in the [CEStrings] section

%AppName%

Contains the application name defined in the [CEStrings] section.

Example

[DestinationDirs]

Files.Common = 0,%CE1%\My Subdir ; \Program Files\My Subdir

Files.Shared = 0,%CE2% ; \Windows

Programming—Chapter 7

243700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

[CopyFiles]

This section, under the [DefaultInstall] section, describes the default files

to copy to the target device. Within the [DefaultInstall] section, files were

listed that must be defined elsewhere in the INF file. This section identi-

fies that mapping and may contain flags.

Required? Yes

Scopyfile_list_section:destination_filename,[source_filename]

The source_filename parameter is optional if it is the same as destina-

tion_filename.

Scopyfile_list_section:flags

The numeric value that specifies an action to be done while copying fi-

les. The following table shows values supported by Windows CE.

Flag Value Description

COPYFLG_WARN_IF_SKIP 0x00000001 Warn user if skipping a file is attempted after error.

COPYFLG_NOSKIP 0x00000002 Do not allow a user to skip copying a file.

COPYFLG_NO_OVERWRITE 0x00000010 Do not overwrite files in destination directory.

COPYFLG_REPLACEONLY 0x00000400 Copy the source file to the destination directory only if the

file is already in the destination directory.

CE_COPYFLG_NO_DATE_DIALOG 0x20000000 Do not copy files if the target file is newer.

CE_COPYFLG_NODATECHECK 0x40000000 Ignore date while overwriting the target file.

CE_COPYFLG_SHARED 0x80000000 Create a reference when a shared DLL is counted.

Example

[DefaultInstall.SH3]

CopyFiles = Files.Common, Files.SH3

[DefaultInstall.MIPS]

CopyFiles = Files.Common, Files.MIPS

ProgrammingChapter —7

244 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

[AddReg]

This section, under the [DefaultInstall] section, is optional and describes

the keys and values that the .CAB file adds to the device registry. Within

the [DefaultInstall] section, a reference may have been made to this

section, such as “AddReg=RegSettings.All”. This section defines the

options for that setting.

Required? No

Sadd_registry_section:registry_root_string

String that specifies the registry root location. The following list shows

the values supported by Windows CE.

SHKCR Same as HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT

SHKCU Same as HKEY_CURRENT_USER

SHKLM Same as HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE

Sadd_registry_section:value_name

Registry value name. If empty, the “default” registry value name is used.

Sadd_registry_section:flags

Numeric value that specifies information about the registry key. The

following table shows the values that are supported by Window CE.

Flag Value Description

FLG_ADDREG_NOCLOBBER 0x00000002 If the registry key exists, do not overwrite it. Can be used

with any of the other flags in this table.

FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_SZ 0x00000000 REG_SZ registry data type.

FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_MULTI_SZ 0x00010000 REG_MULTI_SZ registry data type. Value field that follows

can be a list of strings separated by commas.

FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_BINARY 0x00000001 REG_BINARY registry data type. Value field that follows

must be a list of numeric values separated by commas, one

byte per field, and must not use the 0x hexadecimal prefix.

FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_DWORD 0x00010001 REG_DWORD data type. The noncompatible format in the

Win32 Setup .INF documentation is supported.

Example

AddReg = RegSettings.All

[RegSettings.All]

HKLM,%reg_path%,,0x00000000,alpha ; <default> = “alpha”

HKLM,%reg_path%,test,0x00010001,3 ; Test = 3

HKLM,%reg_path%\new,another,0x00010001,6 ; New\another = 6

Programming—Chapter 7

245700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

[CEShortCuts]

This section, a Windows CE-specific section under the [DefaultInstall]

section, is optional and describes the shortcuts that the installation applica-

tion creates on the device. Within the [DefaultInstall] section, a reference

may have been made to this section, such as “ShortCuts.All”. This section

defines the options for that setting.

Required? No

Sshortcut_list_section:shortcut_filename

String that identifies the shortcut name. It does not require the .LNK

extension.

Sshortcut_list_section:shortcut_type_flag

Numeric value. Zero or empty represents a shortcut to a file; any non-

zero numeric value represents a shortcut to a folder.

Sshortcut_list_section:target_file_path

String value that specifies the destination location. Use the target file

name for a file, such as MyApp.exe, that must be defined in a file copy

list. For a path, use a file_list_section name defined in the [Destination-

Dirs] section, such as DefaultDestDir,orthe%InstallDir% string.

Sshortcut_list_section:standard_destination_path

Optional string value. A standard %CEx% path or %InstallDir%.Ifno

value is specified, the shortcut_list_section name of the current section or

the DefaultDestDir value from the [DestinationDirs] section is used.

Example

CEShortcuts = Shortcuts.All

[Shortcuts.All]

Sample App,0,sample.exe ; Uses the path in DestinationDirs. Sample

App,0,sample.exe,%InstallDir% ; The path is explicitly specified.

Sample .INF File

[Version] ; Required section

Signature = “$Windows NT$”

Provider = “Intermec Technologies Corporation”

CESignature = “$Windows CE$”

;[CEDevice]

;ProcessorType =

[DefaultInstall] ; Required section

CopyFiles = Files.App, Files.Fonts, Files.BitMaps, Files.Intl,

Files.TelecomNcsCE, Files.Windows, Files.Import, Files.Export, Files.Work,

Files.Database, Files.WinCE AddReg = RegSettings.All ;CEShortcuts =

Shortcuts.All

[SourceDisksNames] ; Required section

1 = ,“App files” ,,c:\appsoft\...

2 = ,”Font files” ,,c:\WinNT\Fonts

3 = ,”CE Tools” ,,c:\windows ce tools\wce212\6110ie\mfc\lib\x86

[SourceDisksFiles] ; Required section

rpm.exe = 1,C:\Appsoft\program\wce212\WCEX86Rel6110

wcestart.ini = 1

ProgrammingChapter —7

246 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

rpmce212.ini = 1

intermec.bmp = 1

rpmlogo.bmp = 1

rpmname.bmp = 1

import.bmp = 1

export.bmp = 1

clock.bmp = 1

printer.bmp = 1

filecopy.bmp = 1

readme.txt = 1

lang_eng.bin = 1

rpmdata.dbd = 1,database\wce1

tahoma.ttf = 2

mfcce212.dll = 3

olece212.dll = 3

olece211.dll = 1,c:\windows ce tools\wce211\NMSD61102.11\mfc\lib\x86

rdm45wce.dll = 1,c:\rptools\rdm45wce\4_50\lib\wce212\wcex86rel

picfmt.dll = 1,c:\rptools\picfmt\1_00\wce212\wcex86rel6110

fmtctrl.dll = 1,c:\rptools\fmtctrl\1_00\wce212\wcex86rel6110

ugrid.dll = 1,c:\rptools\ugrid\1_00\wce212\wcex86rel6110

simple.dll = 1,c:\rptools\pspbm0c\1_00\wce211\wcex86rel

psink.dll = 1,c:\rptools\psink\1_00\wce211\WCEX86RelMinDependency

pslpwce.dll =1,c:\rptools\pslpm0c\1_00\wce211\WCEX86RelMinDependency

npcpport.dll = 1,c:\rptools\cedk\212_03\installable drivers\printer\npcp

;dexcom.dll = 1,c:\rptools\psdxm0c\1_00\x86

ncsce.exe = 1,c:\rptools\ncsce\1_04

nrinet.dll = 1,c:\rptools\ncsce\1_04

[DestinationDirs] ; Required section

;Shortcuts.All = 0,%CE3% ; \Windows\Desktop

Files.App = 0,%InstallDir%

Files.DataBase = 0,%InstallDir%\DataBase

Files.BitMaps = 0,%InstallDir%\Bitmaps

Files.Fonts = 0,%InstallDir%\Fonts

Files.Intl = 0,%InstallDir%\Intl

Files.TelecomNcsCE = 0,%InstallDir%\Telecom\NcsCE

Files.Windows = 0,%InstallDir%\Windows

Files.Import = 0,%InstallDir%\Import

Files.Export = 0,%InstallDir%\Export

Files.Work = 0,%InstallDir%\Work

Files.WinCE = 0,\storage_card\wince

[CEStrings] ; Required section

AppName = Rp32

InstallDir = \storage_card\%AppName%

[Strings] ; Optional section

;[Shortcuts.All]

;Sample App,0,sample.exe ; Uses the path in DestinationDirs.

;Sample App,0,sample.exe,%InstallDir% ; The path is explicitly specified.

[Files.App]

rpm.exe,,,0

rpm.ini,rpmce212.ini,,0

mfcce212.dll,,,0

olece212.dll,,,0

olece211.dll,,,0

rdm45wce.dll,,,0

picfmt.dll,,,0

Programming—Chapter 7

247700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

fmtctrl.dll,,,0

ugrid.dll,,,0

simple.dll,,,0

psink.dll,,,0

pslpwce.dll,,,0

npcpport.dll,,,0

;dexcom.dll,,,0

[Files.DataBase]

rpmdata.dbd,,,0

[Files.Fonts]

tahoma.ttf,,,0

[Files.BitMaps]

intermec.bmp,,,0

rpmlogo.bmp,,,0

rpmname.bmp,,,0

import.bmp,,,0

export.bmp,,,0

clock.bmp,,,0

printer.bmp,,,0

filecopy.bmp,,,0

[Files.Intl]

lang_eng.bin,,,0

[Files.TelecomNcsCE]

ncsce.exe,,,0

nrinet.dll,,,0

[Files.Windows]

readme.txt,,,0

[Files.Import]

readme.txt,,,0

[Files.Export]

readme.txt,,,0

[Files.Work]

readme.txt,,,0

[Files.WinCE]

wcestart.ini,,,0

[RegSettings.All]

HKLM,”SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Shell\AutoHide”,,0x00010001,1

; Autohide the taskbar HKLM,”SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Shell\OnTop”,,0x00010001,0

; Shell is not on top HKLM,”SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Clock”,SHOW_CLOCK,0x00010001,0

; Clock is not on taskbar

ProgrammingChapter —7

248 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Using Installation Functions in SETUP.DLL

SETUP.DLL is an optional file that enables you to perform custom opera-

tions during installation and removal of your application. The following

list shows the functions that are exported by SETUP.DLL.

SInstall_Init

Called before installation begins. Use this function to check the applica-

tion version when reinstalling an application and to determine if a de-

pendent application is present.

SInstall_Exit

Called after installation is complete. Use this function to handle errors

that occur during application installation.

SUninstall_Init

Called before the removal process begins. Use this function to close the

application, if the application is running.

SUninstall_Exit

Called after the removal process is complete. Use this function to save

database information to a file and delete the database and to tell the user

where the user data files are stored and how to reinstall the application.

Note;Use[DefaultInstall] →CESelfRegister (page 240) in the .INF file

to point to SETUP.DLL.

After the CAB File Extraction

Cab files that need to cause a warm reset after cab extraction will need to

create the __RESETMEPLEASE__.TXT file in the “\Windows” directory.

The preferred method to create this file is within the DllMain portion of

the SETUP.DLL file. It looks like this:

BOOL APIENTRY DllMain( HANDLE hModule, DWORD ul_reason_for_call, LPVOID

lpReserved )

{

switch (ul_reason_for_call)

{

case DLL_PROCESS_ATTACH:

break;

case DLL_THREAD_ATTACH:

break;

case DLL_THREAD_DETACH:

break;

case DLL_PROCESS_DETACH:

if (bInstallSuccessful) {

HANDLE h;

h = CreateFile(L”\\Windows\\__resetmeplease__.txt”,

GENERIC_READ|GENERIC_WRITE, 0, NULL, CREATE_ALWAYS,

FILE_ATTRIBUTE_HIDDEN, NULL);

if (h != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE)

CloseHandle(h);

}

break;

}

return TRUE;

}

Programming—Chapter 7

249700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

The system software looks for the following directory structure and files on

the installed media card whether it be an SD card or CF card or embedded

flash file system. No other folders need exist.

\2577\autorun.exe

\2577\autorun.dat

\2577\autocab.exe

\2577\autocab.dat

\cabfiles\*.cab

Creating CAB Files with CAB Wizard

After you create the .INF file and the optional SETUP.DLL file, use the

CAB Wizard to create the .CAB file. The command-line syntax for the

CAB Wizard is as follows:

cabwiz.exe “inf_file” [/dest dest_directory] [/err error_file] [/cpu cpu_type

[cpu_type]]

A batch file, located in <program> directory, with the following com-

mands, works well:

cd\“Windows CE Tools”\WCE211\”MS HPC Pro”\support\appinst\bin

cabwiz.exe c:\appsoft\<program>\<inf_file_name>

cd \appsoft\<program>

S“inf_file”

The SETUP.INF file path.

Sdest_directory

The destination directory for the .CAB files. If no directory is specified,

the .CAB files are created in the “inf_file” directory.

Serror_file

The file name for a log file that contains all warnings and errors that are

encountered when the .CAB files are compiled. If no file name is speci-

fied, errors are displayed in message boxes. If a file name is used, the

CAB Wizard runs without the user interface (UI); this is useful for au-

tomated builds.

Scpu_type

Creates a .CAB file for each specified microprocessor tag. A micropro-

cessor tag is a label used in the Win32 SETUP.INF file to differentiate

between different microprocessor types. The /cpu parameter, followed by

multiple cpu_type values, must be the last qualifier in the command line.

Example

This example creates .CAB files for the SH3 and MIPS microprocessors,

assuming that the Win32 SETUP.INF file contains the SH3 and MIPS

tags:

cabwiz.exe “c:\myfile.inf” /err myfile.err /cpu sh3 mips

Note: CABWIZ.EXE, MAKECAB.EXE, and CABWIZ.DDF (Windows

CE files available on the Windows CE Toolkit) must be installed in the

same directory on the desktop computer. Call CABWIZ.EXE using its full

path for the CAB Wizard application to run correctly.

ProgrammingChapter —7

250 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Troubleshooting the CAB Wizard

To identify and avoid problems that might occur when using the CAB

Wizard, follow these guidelines:

SUse %% for a percent sign (%) character when using this character in

an .INF file string, as specified in Win32 documentation. This will not

work under the [Strings] section.

SDo not use .INF or .CAB files created for Windows CE to install ap-

plications on Windows-based desktop platforms.

SEnsure the MAKECAB.EXE and CABWIZ.DDF files, included with

Windows CE, are in the same directory as CABWIZ.EXE.

SUse the full path to call CABWIZ.EXE.

SDo not create a .CAB file with the MAKECAB.EXE file included with

Windows CE. You must use CABWIZ.EXE, which uses MAKE-

CAB.EXE to generate the .CAB files for Windows CE.

SDo not set the read-only attribute for .CAB files.

Programming—Chapter 7

251700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

FTP Server

FTP support is provided through the FTP Server application

FTPDCE.EXE (MS Windows CE Versions) which is provided as part the

base system.

FTPDCE is the Internet File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server process. The

server can be invoked from an application or command line. Besides ser-

vicing FTP client requests the FTP Server also send a “network announce-

ment” to notify prospective clients of server availability.

Synopsis

ftpdce [options ]

Options

S-Aaddr

Sets the single target address to which to send the network announce-

ment. Default is broadcast.

S-Bbyte

Sets the FTP data block size. Smaller sizes may be useful over slower

links. Default is 65536.

S-Cname

Sets the device name. Used by Intermec management software.

S-Fvalue

Disables the default Intermec account. A value of “0” disables the ac-

count. Default is “1”.

Note: Disabling the default account without providing a working access

control list on the server will result in a device that will not accept any

FTP connections.

S-Hsec

Sets the interval between network announcements in seconds.A value of

“0” turns the network announcement off. Default is 30 seconds.

S-Iip

Sets the preferred 6920 Communications Server (optional).

S-Llog

Sets the state of logging. Default is 0 (disabled).

S-Nsec

Specifies the number of seconds to wait before starting FTP server ser-

vices.

S-Pport

Sets the UDP port on which the network announcement will be sent.

Default port is 52401.

S-Qport

Sets the port on which the FTP Server will listen for connections.

Default port is 21.

ProgrammingChapter —7

252 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

S-Rdir

Sets the FTP mount point to this directory. Default is the rootdirectory

of the drive from which the FTP Server program was executed.

S-Tscript

Sets the script name for the 6920 Communications Server to process.

S-Uurl

Sets the default URL for this device.

S-Z“parms”

Sets extended parameters to be included in the network announcement.

Configurable Parameters Via the Registry Editor

The following parameters receive default values during the installation of

the Intermec FTP Server components. A few of the parameters are visible

in the registry by default, but most must be created in order to modify the

default behavior of the FTP server.

BlockSize

Setting this parameter forces the Intermec FTP Server to transmit and re-

ceive Ethernet packets using the specified data block size. By default, the

FTP server transmits and receives data using a 64K data block size. Adjust-

ing this value may be useful in certain wireless TCP/IP installations.

Key

HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP

Value Type

REG_DWORD - data block size, in bytes.

Valid Range

0x100-0x10000 (256-65536 decimal).

Default

65536

Programming—Chapter 7

253700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

DeviceName

This parameter forces the Intermec FTP Server to include the specified

device name in the Intermec Device Network Announcement (IDNA).

Adjusting this value may be useful in assigning a symbolic name to this

device for asset tracking.

Key

HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP

Value Type

REG_SZ

Valid Range

None.

Default

None.

DeviceURL

This parameter forces the Intermec FTP Server to transmit the specified

URL in the IDNA. This can be used by Intermec management software

for asset management.

Key

HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP

Value Type

REG_SZ

Valid Range

None.

Default

None.

ProgrammingChapter —7

254 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IDNATarget

This parameter forces the Intermec FTP Server to transmit the IDNA to a

specific destination instead of a general UDP broadcast. This parameter is

useful on networks that do not allow UDP broadcasts to be routed be-

tween subnets. The use of this parameter will restrict the reception of the

IDNA to the target destination only.

Key

HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP

Value Type

REG_SZ

Valid Range

None.

Default

None.

ManifestName

This parameter forces the Intermec FTP Server to transmit the specified

manifest name in the IDNA. This parameter is used by the Intermec 6920

Communications Server for communication transactions. See the 6920

Communications Server documentation for proper use of this parameter.

Key

HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP

Value Type

REG_SZ

Valid Range

None.

Default

iftp.ini

Programming—Chapter 7

255700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

PauseAtStartup

This parameter forces the Intermec FTP Server to sleep for the specified

number of seconds before making the FTP service available on the device.

Key

HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP

Value Type

REG_DWORD - stored in seconds.

Valid Range

None.

Default

Root

This parameter forces the Intermec FTP Server to set the root of the FTP

mount point to the specified value. Note that this must map to an existing

directory or you will not be able to log into the FTP Server.

Key

HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP

Value Type

REG_SZ

Valid Range

None.

Default

ProgrammingChapter —7

256 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Transferring Files Over TCP/IP Networks

The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server transfers files over TCP/IP net-

works. The FTPDCE.EXE program is a version that does not display a

window, but can run in the background.

FTPDCE is the Internet File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server process. The

server can be invoked from an application or command line. Besides ser-

vicing FTP client requests, the FTP Server also sends a “network an-

nouncement” to notify prospective clients of server availability.

Remarks

The FTP Server currently supports the following FTP requests:

SCDUP

Changes to the parent directory of the current working directory.

SCWD

Changes working directory.

SDELE

Deletes a file.

SHELP

Gives help information.

SLIST (This FTP request is the same as the ls -lgA command).

Gives list files in a directory.

SMKD

Makes a directory.

SMODE (Always Uses Binary).

Specifies data transfer mode.

SNLST

Gives a name list of files in directory (this FTP request is the same as

the ls command).

SNOOP

Does nothing.

SPASS

Specifies a password.

SPWD

Prints the current working directory.

SQUIT

Terminates session.

SRETR

Retrieves a file.

SRMD

Removes a directory.

SRNFR

Specifies rename-from file name.

Programming—Chapter 7

257700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SRNTO

Specifies rename-to file name.

SSTOR

Stores a file.

SSYST

Shows the operating system type of server system.

STYPE (Binary transfers only.)

Specifies the data transfer type with the Type parameter.

SUSER

Specifies user name.

SXCUP (Not Normally Used)

Changes the parent directory of the current working directory.

SXCWD (Not Normally Used)

Changes the current directory.

SXMKD (Not Normally Used)

Creates a directory.

SXPWD (Not Normally Used)

Prints the current working directory.

SXRMD (Not Normally Used)

Removes a directory.

SSITE

The following nonstandard or operating system (OS)-specific com-

mands are supported by the SITE request. For Microsoft FTP clients,

you can send site commands by preceding the command with “quote”

such as “quote site status.”

SATTRIB

Gets or sets the attributes of a given file. (SITE ATTRIB)

Usage:QUOTE SITE ATTRIB [+R |-R][+A |-A ][+S |-S]

[+H |-H][[path]filename]

+Sets an attribute.

`Clears an attribute.

RRead-only file attribute.

AArchive file attribute.

SSystem file attribute.

HHidden file attribute.

To retrieve the attributes of a file, only specify the file. The server re-

sponse will be: 200-AD SHRCEIX filename

If the flag exists in its position shown above, it is set. Also, in addition

to the values defined above, there is also defined:

CCompressed file attribute.

EEncrypted file attribute.

IINROM file attribute.

XXIP file attribute (execute in ROM, not shadowed in RAM).

ProgrammingChapter —7

258 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SBOOT

Reboots the server OS. This will cause the system on which the serv-

er is executing to reboot. The FTP Server will shut down cleanly be-

fore reboot. All client connections will be terminated. Cold boot is

default except for the PocketPC build in which the default is warm

boot.

(SITE BOOT)

Usage:QUOTE SITE BOOT [WARM |COLD]

SCOPY

Copies a file from one location to another. (SITE COPY)

Usage:QUOTE SITE COPY [source][destination]

Example

QUOTE SITE COPY ‘\Storage Card\one.dat’ ‘\Storage

Card\two.dat’

SEXIT

Exits the FTP Server. This command will shut down the FTP Server

thus terminating all client connections. (SITE EXIT)

Usage:QUOTE SITE EXIT

SHELP

Gives site command help information. (SITE HELP)

Usage:QUOTE SITE HELP [command]

SKILL

Terminates a running program. (SITE KILL)

Usage:QUOTE SITE KILL [program |pid]

SLOG

Opens or closes the program log. (SITE LOG)

Usage:QUOTE SITE LOG [open [filename]| close]

SPLIST

Lists the running processes (not supported on all platforms).

(SITE PLIST)

Usage:QUOTE SITE PLIST

SRUN

Starts a program running. If the program to run has spaces in path or

filename, wrapping the name with single quotes is required.

Usage:QUOTE SITE RUN [program]

Example

QUOTE SITE RUN ‘\Storage Card\app.exe’

Programming—Chapter 7

259700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SSTATUS

Returns the current settings of the FTP Server. MAC, serial number,

model, IP address, network announcement information as well as OS

memory usage are returned. (SITE STATUS)

Usage:QUOTE SITE STATUS

STIMEOUT

Toggles idle timeout between 120 to 1200 seconds (2 to 20 minutes).

If this timer expires with no activity between the client and the server,

the client connection will be disconnected. If the optional seconds

argument is supplied, the server will set the connection timeout to

the number of seconds specified. Default is 120 seconds or 2 minutes.

(SITE TIMEOUT)

Usage:QUOTE SITE TIMEOUT [seconds]

The remaining FTP requests specified in RFC 959 are recognized, but not

implemented.

The banner returned in the parenthetical portion of its greeting shows the

version number of the FTP Server as well as the MAC address, serial num-

ber and OS of the machine hosting the server.

The FTP Server supports browsing from the latest Netscape and Microsoft

web browsers. Drag-and-drop capability is available using this environ-

ment.

The FTPDCMDS subdirectory contains commands that can be used from

the web browser.

SClick EXITME.BIN to execute a SITE EXIT command.

SClick REBOOTME.BIN to execute SITE BOOT command.

SUse the GET command on these files to have the FTP Server execute

these commands.

SSecurity:

A customer configurable access control list may be installed on the

700 Series Computer. This list will allow customers to restrict access

via the FTP Server to the users they wish. This is in addition to the

default Intermec account which can be disabled using the -F0 option

at runtime.

The access control list is named FTPDCE.TXT and is placed in the

same directory on the 700 Series Computer as the FTPDCE.EXE

server. The FTP Server will encrypt this file to keep the information

safe from unauthorized users. This file is encrypted when the FTP

Server is started so a file that is placed onto the 700 Series Computer

after the FTP Server starts will require a restart of the FTP Server to

take effect.

The format of the FTPDCE.TXT is as follows:

FTPDCE:user1!passwd1<cr><lf>user2!passwd2<cr><lf>user3!passw

d3<cr><lf>...

ProgrammingChapter —7

260 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Note: The user accounts and passwords are case sensitive.

Once the access control list is encrypted on the 700 Series Computer, the

FTP Server will hide this file from users. Once an access control list has

been installed on the 700 Series Computer, a new one will not be accepted

by the FTP Server until the previous one is removed.

Encrypted access control lists are not portable between 700 Series Com-

puters.

Stopping the FTP Server from Your Application

To allow application programmers the ability to programmatically shut

down the FTP Server, the FTP Server periodically tests to see if a named

event is signaled. The name for this event is “ITC_IFTP_STOP” (no

quotes).

For examples on how to use this event, consult the Microsoft Developer

Network Library at http://www.msdn.com. The MSDN Library is an essen-

tial resource for developers using Microsoft tools, products, and technolo-

gies. It contains a bounty of technical programming information, includ-

ing sample code, documentation, technical articles, and reference guides.

Autostart FTP

This automatically starts the FTP Server (FTPDCE.EXE) when the 700

Series Computer is powered on. This is provided with the NDISTRAY

program, which displays the popup menu that currently allows you to load

and unload the network drivers. Tap the antenna icon in the System Tray

of the Today screen (a sample antenna icon is circled below) to get this pop-

up menu.

Programming—Chapter 7

261700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

The default is to start the FTP Server at boot time, unless the following

registry entry is defined and set to “0” which disables AutoFTP. “1” enables

the AutoFTP. The entry can be set from the NDISTRAY pop-up menu by

selecting either AutoFTP On or AutoFTP Off.

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Intermec\Ndistray\StartupIFTP

These new entries are located below the selections to load the network

drivers. If the StartupIFTP registry key is not defined, the FTP Server is

loaded by default, to provide “out-of-the-box” capability for customers

who want to begin loading files to the 700 Series Computer without any

prior configuration.

Note: If a network driver is unloaded using the NDISTRAY popup menu,

and the FTP Server is running, the FTP Server is stopped.

On a resume, if AutoFTP is enabled and the FTP Server is running, it is

stopped and restarted. NDISTRAY uses a helper application named RESE-

TIFTP to implement the restart on resume feature. To do an AutoFTP

Installation Check:

1Ensure the FTP Server is running “out-of-the-box” the first time.

2Tap Start →Today to access the Today screen, then tap the antenna

icon in the System Tray to bring up the NDISTRAY pop-up menu.

Select AutoFTP Off to disable AutoFTP. Do a warm boot and confirm

the FTP Server is not running.

3Tap Start →Today to access the Today screen, then tap the antenna

icon in the System Tray to bring up the NDISTRAY pop-up menu.

Select AutoFTP On to enable AutoFTP, reboot and confirm it is

running.

4Unload the network driver when the FTP Server is running and confirm

that it is not running any more.

5Load the FTP Server, establish a connection, then suspend and resume.

The server should still be running, but the FTP connection to the client

should be dropped.

ProgrammingChapter —7

262 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Full Screen

Pocket PC is a hardware specification created by Microsoft Corporation.

Devices that wish to carry the Pocket PC logo must meet the minimum

hardware requirements set in the Pocket PC specification. Manufacturers

are free to add extra hardware functionality.

Pocket PC 2002 devices also use a specialized version of the CE operating

system. This OS is built from Windows CE 3.0 but contains customiza-

tions, most notably the lack of a desktop and the addition of the Today

Screen.

To carry the Pocket PC logo, all devices must be tested at an Independent

Test Laboratory. The ITL testing is done based on Microsoft requirements.

The test lab then reports the findings back to Microsoft Corporation and

Intermec Technologies. If the 700 Series Computer passed all tests, Inter-

mec is allowed to ship the device with the Pocket PC logo. Each time the

operating system is modified, Intermec must resubmit to ITL testing.

This means we cannot change the operating system much and still be a

Pocket PC device. For example, if we remove Word from the Start menu,

the device would fail ITL testing and we would not be able to ship devices

with the Pocket PC logo.

Although many customers want a Pocket PC device, some customers

would prefer that their users not have access to all of the Pocket PC featu-

res. Intermec cannot customize the operating system in any way but a cus-

tom application can:

SDelete items from the Start menu, and Programs folder. These items are

just shortcuts in the file system so the application is not really being

deleted. Cold booting the device will bring these items back so the ap-

plication will need to be run on every cold boot.

SUse the RegFlushKey() API to save a copy of the registry to a storage

device. See the Recovery CD Help for more information on how to do

this. Saving a copy of the registry will allow most system settings to be

restored in a cold boot situation.

SUse the SHFullScreen() API in conjunction with other APIs to make the

application take up the entire display and prevent the start menu from

being available.

SRemap keys and disable keys on the keypad.

SCreate a custom SIP.

SMake changes to the registry to configure the device.

Programming—Chapter 7

263700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Should you want your 700 Series Computer to display a full screen, keep

in mind that your computer is Pocket-PC certified by Microsoft Corpora-

tion. Check out resources on programming for the Pocket PC, using the

following links. These instructions give full instructions on how to display

full screen.

SInstructions on how to create a full screen application for eVC++ ap-

plications using an SHFullScreen() API:

http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/Q266/2/44.ASP

SInstructions on how to create a full screen application for eVB applica-

tions also using the SHFullScreen() API:

http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/Q265/4/51.ASP

ProgrammingChapter —7

264 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Kernel I/O Controls

This describes the KernelIoControl() functions available to application

programmers. Most C++ applications will need to prototype the function

as the following to avoid link and compile errors.

extern “C” BOOL KernelIoControl(DWORD dwIoControlCode, LPVOID lpInBuf, DWORD

nInBufSize, LPVOID lpOutBuf, DWORD nOutBufSize, LPDWORD lpBytesReturned);

IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO

This IOCTL returns either the platform type or the OEMPLATFORM

name based on an input value.

Syntax

BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, LPVOID

lpInBuf, DWORD nInBufSize, LPVOID lpOutBuf, DWORD

nOutBufSize, LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters

lpInBuf Points to a DWORD containing either the

SPI_GETPLATFORMTYPE or SPI_GETOEMINFO

value.

lpInBufSize Must be set to sizeof(DWORD).

lpOutBuf Must point to a buffer large enough to hold the return

data of the function. If SPI_GETPLATFORMTYPE is

specified in lpInBuf, then the “PocketPC\0” Unicode

string is returned. If SPI_GETOEMINFO is specified in

lpInBuf, then the “Intermec 700\0” Unicode string is

returned.

nOutBufSize The size of lpOutBuf in bytes. Must be large enough to

hold the string returned.

lpBytesReturned The actual number of bytes returned by the function for

the data requested.

Return Values

Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.

GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.

Programming—Chapter 7

265700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM

Usage

#include “oemioctl.h”

Syntax

BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM,LPVOID

lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD

nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters

lpInBuf Points to this structure. See “ID Field Values”below.

struct PARMS {

BYTE id;

BYTE ClassId;

};

nInBufSize Must be set to the size of the PARMS structure.

lpOutBuf Must point to a buffer large enough to hold the return

data of the function. If this field is set to NULL and

nOutBufSize is set to zero when the function is called the

function will return the number bytes required by the

buffer.

nOutBufSize The size of lpOutBuf in bytes.

lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function for the

data requested.

Return Values

Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.

GetLastError() may be used to get the error value. Either

ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER or

ERROR_INSUFFICIENT_BUFFER may be returned when this function

is used to get the error.

ID Field Values

The id field of the PARMS structure may be one of the following values:

SITC_NVPARM_ETHERNET_ID

This IOCTL returns the Ethernet 802.11 MAC Address. Six bytes are

returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter.

SITC_NVPARM_SERIAL_NUM

This IOCTL returns the serial number of the device in BCD format.

Six bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer pa-

rameter.

SITC_NVPARM_MANF_DATE

This IOCTL returns the device date of manufacture in the

BCD YYYY/MM/DD format. Four bytes are returned in the buffer

pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter.

ProgrammingChapter —7

266 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SITC_NVPARM_SERVICE_DATE

This IOCTL returns the device’ s date of last service in BCD YYYY/

MM/DD format. Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by

the lpOutBuffer parameter.

SITC_NVPARM_DISPLAY_TYPE

This IOCTL returns the device’ s display type. One byte is returned in

the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter.

SITC_NVPARM_EDG_IP

This IOCTL returns the device Ethernet debug IP address. Four bytes

are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter.

SITC_NVPARM_EDBG_SUBNET

This IOCTL returns the device Ethernet debug subnet mask. Four by-

tes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter.

SITC_NVPARM_ECN

This IOCTL returns ECNs applied to the device in a bit array format.

Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer pa-

rameter.

SITC_NVPARM_CONTRAST

This IOCTL returns the device default contrast setting. Two bytes are

returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter.

SITC_NVPARM_MCODE

This IOCTL returns the manufacturing configuration code for the de-

vice. Sixteen bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOut-

Buffer parameter.

SITC_NVPARM_VERSION_NUMBER

This IOCTL returns the firmware version for various system compo-

nents. These values for the ClassId field of the PARMS structure are al-

lowed when ITC_NVPARM_VERSION_NUMBER is used in the id

field:

SVN_CLASS_KBD

Returns a five-byte string, including null terminator, that contains an

ASCII value which represents the keyboard microprocessor version in

the system. The format of the string is x.xx with a terminating null

character.

SVN_CLASS_ASIC

Returns a five-byte string, including null terminator, that contains an

ASCII value which represents the version of the FPGA firmware in

the system. The format of the string is x.xx with a terminating null

character.

SVN_CLASS_BOOTSTRAP

Returns a five-byte string, including null terminator, that contains an

ASCII value which represents the version of the Bootstrap Loader

firmware in the system. The format of the string is x.xx with a termi-

nating null character.

Programming—Chapter 7

267700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_SOFTWARE_CONTENT

This IOCTL reads the manufacturing flag bits from the non-volatile

data store that dictates certain software parameters. A BOOLEAN

DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer that indi-

cates if Intermec Content is enabled in the XIP regions. TRUE indicates

that it is enabled. FALSE indicates that it is not enabled.

SITC_NVPARM_ANTENNA_DIVERSITY

This IOCTL reads the state of the antenna diversity flag. A BOOLEAN

DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer that indi-

cates if there is a diversity antenna installed. TRUE indicates that it is

installed. FALSE indicates that it is not installed.

SITC_NVPARM_WAN_RI

This IOCTL reads the state of the WAN ring indicator flag. A BOOL-

EAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer that

indicates the polarity of the WAN RI signal. TRUE indicates active

high. FALSE indicates active low.

SITC_NVPARM_RTC_RESTORE

This IOCTL reads the state of the real-time clock restore flag. A

BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuf-

fer. TRUE indicates that the RTC will be restored upon a cold boot.

FALSE indicates that the RTC will not be restored.

SITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLECTION_SW

This IOCTL reads the state of the data collection software enabled flag.

A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointer to by lpOut-

Buffer that indicates the data collection software is to be installed at boot

time. FALSE indicates the data collection software should not be

installed.

SITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLECTION_HW

This IOCTL reads the data collection hardware flags. A BYTE is re-

turned in the buffer pointer to by lpOutBuffer that indicates the type of

data collection hardware installed. The maximum possible value re-

turned is ITC_DEVID_SCANHW_MAX.

SITC_DEVID_SCANHW_NONE

No scanner hardware is installed.

SITC_DEVID_OEM2D_IMAGER

OEM 2D imager is installed.

SITC_DEVID_INTERMEC2D_IMAGER

Intermec 2D imager is installed.

SITC_DEVID_SE900_LASER

SE900 laser is installed.

SITC_DEVID_SE900HS_LASER

SE900HS laser is installed.

The high bit indicates whether the S6 scanning engine is installed. The

bit mask for this is ITC_DEVID_S6ENGINE_MASK. A non-zero val-

ue indicates that the S6 scanning engine is installed.

ProgrammingChapter —7

268 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SITC_NVPARM_WAN_INSTALLED

This IOCTL reads the state of the WAN radio installed flag. A BOOL-

EAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer.

TRUE indicates that the WAN radio is installed. FALSE indicates that

no WAN radio is installed.

SITC_NVPARM_WAN_FREQUENCY

This IOCTL reads the state of the WAN radio frequency flag. A

BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuf-

fer. TRUE indicates that the WAN radio frequency is United States.

FALSE indicates that the WAN radio frequency is European.

SITC_NVPARM_WAN_RADIOTYPE

This IOCTL reads the WAN radio ID installed by manufacturing. A

BYTE is returned in the buffer pointer to by lpOutBuffer which indi-

cates the type of WAN radio hardware installed. The maximum possible

value returned is ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_MAX. The current defi-

nitions are:

SITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_NONE

No WAN radio installed.

SITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIERRA_SB555

CDMA Sierra Wireless radio.

SITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_XIRCOM_GEM3503

GSM/GPRS Intel (Xircom) radio.

SITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIEMENS_MC45

GSM/GPRS Siemens radio.

SITC_NVPARM_80211_INSTALLED

This IOCTL reads the state of the 802.11b radio installed flag. A

BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuf-

fer. TRUE indicates that the 802.11b radio is installed. FALSE indicates

that no 802.11b radio is installed.

SITC_NVPARM_80211_RADIOTYPE

This IOCTL reads the 802.11b radio ID installed by manufacturing. A

BYTE is returned in the buffer pointer to by lpOutBuffer that indicates

the type of 802.11b radio hardware installed. The maximum possible

value returned is ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_MAX. The current defi-

nitions are:

SITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_NONE

No 802.11b radio installed.

SITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_INTEL_2011B

Intel 2011B radio installed.

SITC_NVPARM_BLUETOOTH_INSTALLED

This IOCTL reads the state of the Bluetooth radio installed flag. A

BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuf-

fer. TRUE indicates that the Bluetooth radio is installed. FALSE indi-

cates that no Bluetooth radio is installed.

Programming—Chapter 7

269700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SITC_NVPARM_SERIAL2_INSTALLED

This IOCTL reads the state of the serial 2 (COM2) device installed

flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by

lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the serial 2 device is installed. FALSE

indicates that no serial 2 device is installed.

SITC_NVPARM_VIBRATE_INSTALLED

This IOCTL reads the state of the vibrate device installed flag. A

BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuf-

fer. TRUE indicates that the vibrate device is installed. FALSE indicates

that no vibrate device is installed.

SITC_NVPARM_LAN9000_INSTALLED

This IOCTL reads the state of the Ethernet device installed flag. A

BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuf-

fer. TRUE indicates that the Ethernet device is installed. FALSE indi-

cates that no Ethernet device is installed.

SITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_HW_INSTALLED

This IOCTL reads the state of the SIM card protection hardware

installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed

to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the SIM card protection hard-

ware is installed. FALSE indicates that no SIM card protection hardware

is installed.

SITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_SW_INSTALLED

This IOCTL reads the state of the SIM card protection software

installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed

to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the SIM card protection soft-

ware is installed. FALSE indicates that no SIM card protection software

is installed.

ProgrammingChapter —7

270 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM

Describes and enables the registry save location.

Usage

#include “oemioctl.h”

Syntax

BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM,LPVOID

lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize, LPVOID lpOutBuf, DWORD

nOutBufSize, LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters

lpInBuf A single byte that may be one of the id values.

See “ID Field Values”below.

nInBufSize Must be set to the size of the lpInBuf in bytes.

lpOutBuf Must point to a buffer large enough to hold the data to

be written to the non-volatile data store.

nOutBufSize The size of lpOutBuf in bytes.

lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function.

Return Values

Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.

GetLastError() may be used to get the error value. Either

ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER or

ERROR_INSUFFICIENT_BUFFER may be returned when this function

is used to get the error.

ID Field Values

The id field of lpInBuf may be one of the following values:

SITC_REGISTRY_LOCATION

This IOCTL sets the default location for where to write the registry

when RegFlushKey() is called by an application. The registry may be

saved to Flash, a CompactFlash storage card or a SecureDigital storage

card. lpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of “1”

for the CompactFlash card or “2” for the SecureDigital card to specify

the location.

SITC_REGISTRY_SAVE_ENABLE

This function enables or disables the save registry to non-volatile media

feature of the RegFlushKey() function. lpOutBuf must be set to zero

(FALSE) if the feature is to be disabled or one (TRUE) if the feature is

to be enabled.

SITC_ DOCK_SWITCH

This IOCTL sets a position of the dock switch. The dock switch may

be set to either “modem” or “serial” positions. lpOutBuf must point to a

buffer that contains a byte value of either DOCK_MODEM or

DOCK_SERIAL as defined in OEMIOCTL.H; the value specifies the

position the switch is to be set.

Programming—Chapter 7

271700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SITC_ WAKEUP_MASK

This IOCTL sets a bit mask that represents the mask for the five pro-

grammable wakeup keys. The I/O key is not a programmable wakeup

key. By default it is always the system resume key and all other keys are

set to disable key wakeup. A zero in a bit position masks the wakeup for

that key. A one in a bit position enables wakeup for that key. lpOutBuf

must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of a wakeup mask con-

sisting of the OR’ ed constants as defined in OEMIOCTL.H. Only the

following keys are programmable as wakeup events.

#define SCANNER_TRIGGER 1

#define SCANNER_LEFT 2

#define SCANNER_RIGHT 4

#define GOLD_A1 8

#define GOLD_A2 0x10

SITC_AMBIENT_KEYBOARD

This IOCTL sets the threshold for the keyboard ambient sensor. This

can be a value from 0 (always off ) to 255 (always on). lpOutBuf must

point to a buffer that contains a byte value of the desired setting.

SITC_AMBIENT_FRONTLIGHT

This IOCTL sets the threshold for the frontlight ambient sensor. This

can be a value from 0 (always off ) to 255. lpOutBuf must point to a

buffer that contains a byte value of the desired setting.

ProgrammingChapter —7

272 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID

This IOCTL returns the device ID. There are two types of device IDs sup-

ported, which are differentiated based on the size of the output buffer. The

UUID is returned if the buffer size is set to sizeof(UNIQUE_DEVICEID),

otherwise the oldstyle device ID is returned.

Usage

#include “pkfuncs.h”

#include “deviceid.h”

Syntax

BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID,LPVOID

lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD

nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters

lpInBuf Should be set to NULL. STRICT_ID settings are not

supported.

lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.

lpOutBuf Must point to a UNIQUE_DEVICEID structure as

defined by DEVICEID.H if the UUID is to be returned.

nOutBufSize The size of the UNIQUE_DEVICEID in bytes if the

UUID is to be returned. A DEVICE_ID as defined by

PKFUNCS.H is returned if the size in bytes is greater

than or equal to sizeof(DEVICE_ID).

lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function.

Return Values

Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.

GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.

Programming—Chapter 7

273700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO

Returns the HAL version information of the Pocket PC image.

Usage

#include “oemioctl.h”

Syntax

BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO,LPVOID

lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD

nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters

lpInBuf Should be set to NULL.

lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.

lpOutBuf Must point to a VERSIONINFO structure as defined by

OEMIOCTL.H. The fields should have these values:

Scboemverinfo sizeof (tagOemVerInfo);

Sverinfover 1

Ssig; “ITC\0”

Sid; ‘N’

Stgtcustomer “”

Stgtplat SeaRay

Stgtplatversion Current build version number

Stgtcputype[8]; “Intel\0”

Stgtcpu “PXA250\0”;

Stgtcoreversion “”

Sdate Build time

Stime Build date

nOutBufSize The size of VERSIONINFO in bytes.

lpBytesReturned Returns sizeof(PVERSIONINFO).

Return Values

Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.

GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.

ProgrammingChapter —7

274 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO

Returns the HAL version information of the Pocket PC image.

Usage

#include “oemioctl.h”

Syntax

BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO,LPVOID

lpInBuf, DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD

nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters

lpInBuf Should be set to NULL.

lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.

lpOutBuf Must point to a VERSIONINFO structure as defined by

OEMIOCTL.H. The fields should have these values:

Scboemverinfo Sizeof (tagOemVerInfo);

Sverinfover 1

Ssig; “ITC\0”

Sid; ‘B’

Stgtcustomer “”

Stgtplat SeaRay

Stgtplatversion Current build version number of

the bootstrap loader

Stgtcputype[8]; “Intel\0”;

Stgtcpu “PXA250\0”

Stgtcoreversion “”

Sdate Build time

Stime Build date

nOutBufSize The size of VERSIONINFO in bytes.

lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned to lpOutBuf.

Return Values

Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.

GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.

Programming—Chapter 7

275700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT

Causes the system to perform a warm-boot. The object store is retained.

Usage

#include “oemioctl.h”

Syntax

BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT,LPVOID

lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD

nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters

lpInBuf Should be set to NULL.

lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.

lpOutBuf Should be NULL.

nOutBufSize Should be zero.

Return Values

None.

IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT

Causes the system to perform a cold-boot. The object store is cleared.

Usage

#include “oemioctl.h”

Syntax

BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT,LPVOID

lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD

nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters

lpInBuf Should be set to NULL.

lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.

lpOutBuf Should be NULL.

nOutBufSize Should be zero.

Return Values

None.

ProgrammingChapter —7

276 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO

This IOCTL code allows software to check the type of the most recent re-

set.

Usage

#include “oemioctl.h”

Syntax

BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO,LPVOID

lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD

nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters

lpInBuf Should be set to NULL.

lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.

lpOutBuf Must point to a HAL_RESET_INFO structure:

typedef struct {

DWORD ResetReason; // most recent reset type

DWORD ObjectStoreState; // state of object store

} HAL_RESET_INFO, * PHAL_RESET_INFO;

// Reset reason types

#define HAL_RESET_TYPE_UNKNOWN 0

#define HAL_RESET_REASON_HARDWARE 1 // cold

#define HAL_RESET_REASON_SOFTWARE 2 // suspend

#define HAL_RESET_REASON_WATCHDOG 4

#define HAL_RESET_BATT_FAULT 8 // power fail

#define HAL_RESET_VDD_FAULT 16 // warm boot

// Object store state flags

#define HAL_OBJECT_STORE_STATE_UNKNOWN 0

#define HAL_OBJECT_STORE_STATE_CLEAR 1

nOutBufSize The size of HAL_RESET_INFO in bytes.

lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function.

Return Values

Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.

GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.

Programming—Chapter 7

277700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE

This IOCTL code allows software to check which device CE booted from.

Usage

#include “oemioctl.h”

Syntax

BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE,LPVOID

lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD

nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters

lpInBuf Should be set to NULL.

lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.

lpOutBuf Must point to a buffer large enough to hold a DWORD

(4 bytes) that contains the boot device. The following

boot devices are supported:

#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_UNKNOWN 0

#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_ROM_XIP 1

#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_ROM 2

#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_PCMCIA_ATA 3

#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_PCMCIA_LINEAR 4

#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_IDE_ATA 5

#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_IDE_ATAPI 6

nOutBufSize The size of lpOutBuf in bytes (4).

lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function.

Return Values

Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.

GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.

ProgrammingChapter —7

278 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT

Causes the system to perform a warm-boot. The object store is retained.

Usage

#include “oemioctl.h”

Syntax

BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD

nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD

lpBytesReturned );

Parameters

lpInBuf Should be set to NULL.

lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.

lpOutBuf Should be NULL.

nOutBufSize Should be zero.

Return Values

None.

Programming—Chapter 7

279700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION

Returns processor information.

Usage

#include “pkfuncs.h”

Syntax

BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION,LPVOID

lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD

nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters

Parameters:

lpInBuf Should be set to NULL.

lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.

lpOutBuf Should be a pointer to the PROCESSOR_INFO

structure. The PROCESSOR_INFO structure stores

information that describes the CPU more descriptively.

typedef __PROCESSOR_INFO {

WORD wVersion; // Set to value 1

WCHAR szProcessorCore[40]; // “ARM\0”

WORD wCoreRevision; // 4

WCHAR szProcessorName[40]; // “PXA250\0”

WORD wProcessorRevision; // 0

WCAHR szCatalogNumber[100]; // 0

WCHAR szVendor[100]; // “Intel Corporation\0”

DWORD dwInstructionSet; // 0

DWORD dwClockSpeed; // 400

}

nOutBufSize Should be set to sizeof(PROCESSOR_INFO) in bytes.

lpBytesReturned Returns sizeof(PROCESSOR_INFO);

Return Values

Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.

GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.

ProgrammingChapter —7

280 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID

Returns Xscale processor ID.

Usage

#include “oemioctl.h”

Syntax

BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID,LPVOID lpInBuf, DWORD

nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD

lpBytesReturned );

Parameters

lpInBuf Should point to a CPUIdInfo structure defined in

OEMIOCTL.H.

lpInBufSize Should be sizeof(CPUIdInfo).

lpOutBuf Should be NULL.

nOutBufSize Should be set to 0.

lpBytesReturned Returns sizeof(PROCESSOR_INFO);

Return Values

Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.

GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.

Reboot Functions

There are several methods, via Kernel I/O Control functions, that an ap-

plication program can use to force the 700 Series Computer to reboot.

IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT

IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT performs a warm-boot. See page 278.

IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT

Invoking the KernelIOControl function with

IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT forces a cold reboot. This resets the 700

Series Computer and reloads Windows CE as if a power-up had been

performed. The contents of the Windows CE RAM-based object store are

discarded. See page 275.

IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT

This function is supported on the 700 Series Computers. It performs a

warm boot of the system, preserving the object store. See page 275.

Programming—Chapter 7

281700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Remapping the Keypad

Note; Use caution when remapping the keypad. Improper remapping may

render the keypad unusable. Data within the 700 Series Computer could

also be lost, should any problems occur.

Applications have the ability to remap keys on the 700 Color Keypad. This

will allow applications to enable keys that would otherwise not be availa-

ble, such as the [F1] function key. Also, to disable keys that should not be

available, such as the alpha key because no alpha entry is required. Care

should be exercised when attempting to remap the keypad because im-

proper remapping may cause the keypad to become unusable. This can be

corrected by cold booting the device which will cause the default keymap

to be loaded again.

Note that remapping the keys in this way affects the key mapping for the

entire system, not just for the application that does the remapping.

There are three “planes” supported for the 740 Keypad. Keys that are to be

used in more than one shift plane must be described in each plane.

Unshifted Plane

The unshifted plane contains values from the keypad when not pressed

with other keys, such as the following:

S[1] 1

S[5] 5

S[9] 9

Gold Plane

The gold plane contains values from the keypad when a key is simulta-

neously pressed with the [Gold] key, such as the following:

S[Gold] +[1] Send

S[Gold] +[5] A3

S[Gold] +[9] PageDown

Alpha Plane

The alpha plane contains values from the keypad when the keypad has

been placed in alpha mode by pressing the blue alpha key, such as the fol-

lowing:

S[Alpha] +[1] Caps

S[Alpha] +[5] JKL

S[Alpha] +[9] WXYZ

ProgrammingChapter —7

282 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Key Values

Key values for each plane are stored in the registry. All units ship with a

default key mapping already loaded in the registry. Applications that wish

to change the default mapping need to read the appropriate key from the

registry into an array of Words, modify the values required and then write

the updated values back into the registry. The registry access can be done

with standard Microsoft API calls, such as RegOpenKeyEx(), RegQuery-

ValueEx(), and RegSetValueEx().

SThe unshifted plane mapping can be found in the registry at:

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\Vkey

SThe gold plane mapping can be found in the registry at:

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\VkeyGold

SThe alpha plane mapping can be found in the registry at:

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\VkeyAlpha

How Key Values Are Stored in Registry

To know which fields to update in the registry, you must know what Scan

Codes are assigned to each physical key (see the table below). The Scan

Code is used at the lowest level of the system to let the keypad driver know

which physical key has been pressed. The keypad driver takes that scan

code and looks it up in a table (a copy of the one stored in the registry) to

determine which values to pass on to the operating system.

Each registry key is just an array that describes to the keypad driver what

value needs to be passed for each physical key. The key values are indexed

by the scan code, this is a zero-based index. For example in the unshifted

plane, the [4] key has a scan code of 0x06. This means that the seventh

word under the “Vkey” registry key will have the value for the [4] key.

Taking a sample of the “Vkey” registry key shows the following values:

00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,34,00,00,00,. . .

The value is 34,00. The values are in reverse byte order because that is the

way the processor handles data. When writing an application, nothing

needs to be done to swap the bytes, as this will happen automatically when

the data is read into a byte value. This is something you just need to be

aware of this when looking at the registry. Knowing this, we can see that

the value that the keypad driver will pass to the system is a hex 34. Look-

ing that up on an UNICODE character chart, we see that it maps to a “4”.

If you wanted the key, labeled “4”, to output the letter “A” instead, you

would need to change the seventh word to “41” (the hexadecimal represen-

tation of “A” from the UNICODE chart), then put the key back into the

registry.

Note: Do not remap scan codes 0x01, 0x41, 0x42, 0x43, 0x44. Remap-

ping these scan codes could render your 700 Series Computer unusable

until a cold-boot is performed.

If you wish to disable a certain key, remap its scan code to 0x00.

Programming—Chapter 7

283700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Change Notification

Just changing the registry keys will not immediately change the key

mappings. To notify the keypad driver that the registry has been updated,

signal the “ITC_KEYBOARD_CHANGE” named event using the

CreateEvent() API.

Advanced Keypad Remapping

It is also possible to map multiple key presses to one button and to map

named system events to a button. The multiple key press option could be

useful to cut down on the number of keys needed to press in a given situa-

tion or to remap which key behaves like the action key. Mapping events to

a button could be useful to change which buttons will fire the scanner,

control volume, and allow for suspending and resuming the device. If you

need help performing one of these advanced topics please contact Intermec

Technical Support.

Scan Codes

At the lowest driver level, the 740 Keypad identifies keys as scan codes.

These scan codes are sent via the keypad microcontroller, and cannot be

changed without modifying the keypad firmware.

Key/Meaning Scancode

Reserved 0x00

I/O Button 0x01

Scanner Trigger 0x02

Scanner Left 0x03

Scanner Right 0x04

.0x05

40x06

None 0x07

Left Arrow 0x08

None 0x09

Backspace 0x0A

Gold Key 0x0B

None 0x0C

ESC 0x0D

Down Arrow 0x0E

10x0F

70x10

Alpha Key 0x11

None 0x12

Up Arrow 0x13

Right Arrow 0x14

20x15

80x16

00x17

50x18

None 0x19

ProgrammingChapter —7

284 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Key/Meaning Scancode

Action Key 0x1A

30x1B

90x1C

ENTER 0x1D

60x1E

None 0x1F-0x40

Charge Detect 0x41

LCD Frontlight 0x42

Ambient Light 0x42

Threshold Crossed 0x42

Headset Detected 0x43

Keypad Backlight 0x44

Ambient Light 0x44

Threshold Crossed 0x44

Sample View of Registry Keys

The following is a sample view of the current default key mapping. See the

registry on your device for the latest key mappings.

[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD]

”ResumeMask”=dword:7

”Vkey”=hex: 00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,34,00,00,00,\

25,00,00,00,08,00,03,02,00,00,1B,00,28,00,31,00,\

37,00,01,02,00,00,26,00,27,00,32,00,38,00,30,00,\

35,00,00,00,01,03,33,00,39,00,0D,00,36,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,07,05,01,05,03,05,02,05

”VkeyGold”=hex: 00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,34,00,00,00,\

09,01,00,00,BF,00,03,02,00,00,BD,00,75,00,72,00,\

21,00,01,02,00,00,76,00,09,00,73,00,38,01,5B,00,\

35,00,00,00,BB,01,09,05,22,00,32,01,36,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,07,05,01,05,03,05,02,05

”VkeyAlpha”=hex: 00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,47,00,00,00,\

25,00,00,00,08,00,03,02,00,00,1B,00,28,00,02,02,\

50,00,01,02,00,00,26,00,27,00,41,00,54,00,20,00,\

4A,00,00,00,01,03,44,00,57,00,0D,00,4D,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,07,05,01,05,03,05,02,05

285700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Control Panel Applets

This appendix contains information about the Data Collection, SNMP,

and User Information Control Panel applets that may be on your 700 Se-

ries Color Mobile Computer.

SNMP and Data Collection settings that can appear under Settings are

dependent on what hardware configuration is done for each 700 Series

Computer at the time of shipment. These settings will currently only ap-

pear if a scanner or an imager option is present.

Likewise, other control panel applets that are specifically related to the

802.11b radio module will appear when a 802.11b radio module is

installed in a 700 Series Computer. Control panel applets that are specific

for Wireless Printing, CDMA/1xRTT, and GSM/GPRS radio modules

will only appear when each respective hardware configuration is done on

the 700 Series Computer. See Chapter 4, “Network Support,” for more infor-

mation about the radio modules or the wireless printing.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

286 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Configuration Parameters

A configuration parameter changes the way the 700 Series Color (700C)

Mobile Computer operates, such as configuring a parameter to have the

700 Series Computer emit a very loud beep in a noisy environment. Use

any of the following methods to execute configuration parameters:

SChange Data Collection and SNMP parameters via control panel ap-

plets later in this appendix.

SAccess the 700 Series Computer via the Unit Manager through a web

browser on your desktop PC via the SRDEVMGMT.CAB file. To use

the Unit Manager, install this CAB file from the 700 Color Software

Tools CD-ROM. Unit Manager applications are available on the 700

Series Color Unit Manager CD-ROM. For more information, consult

your Intermec sales representative.

SSend parameters from an SNMP management station. See “SNMP Con-

figuration” starting on page 123.

SScan EasySet bar codes. You can use the EasySet bar code creation soft-

ware from Intermec Technologies Corporation to print configuration

labels. Scan the labels to change the scanner configuration and data

transfer settings.

Changing a Parameter Setting

Menus of available parameters for each group are listed. Use the scroll bars

to go through the list. Expand each menu (+) to view its parameter set-

tings. Tap a parameter to select, or expand a parameter (+) to view its sub-

parameters.

Note that each parameter or subparameter is shown with its default setting

or current setting in (< >) brackets. Tap a parameter or subparameter to

select that parameter, then do any of the following to change its setting:

Tap Apply to apply any changes. Note that these illustrations are from a

Symbologies parameter.

STyping a new value in an entry field.

SChoosing a new value from the drop-down list.

SSelecting a different option. The selected option contains a bullet.

STap Defaults, then Apply to restore factory-default settings. Tap Yes

when you are prompted to verify this action.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

287700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

STap Refresh to discard changes and start again. Tap Yes when you are

prompted to verify this action.

About Configuration Parameters

You can find the following information about each configuration parame-

ter:

SName and Purpose:

Describes the parameter and its function.

SAction:

Describes what to do with a parameter once that parameter is selected.

SSNMP OID:

Lists the SNMP OID for the parameter.

SSyntax or Options:

Syntax lists the two-character code for the parameter, if the parameter is

configurable by scanning a bar code or by sending parameters through a

network. Both Syntax and Options list acceptable values for the para-

meter. Default settings are noted in italic.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

288 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Data Collection Control Panel Applet

See “Scanner Control and Data Transfer”intheIntermec Windows CE/Pocket

PC Software Developer’ s Kit (SDK) User’ s Manual shipped with the Soft-

ware Developer’ s Kit (SDK) for information about data collection func-

tions.

Note: Icons are shown to the left.

To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Settings

→the System tab →the Data Collection icon to access its control panel

applet.

Use the left and right arrows to scroll through the tabs along the bottom of

the control panel applet, then tap a tab to access its menus. These tabs rep-

resent the following groups of settings or parameters:

SSymbologies

SSymbology Options (starting on page 309)

SBeeper/LED (starting on page 317)

SImager (starting on page 323)

SVirtual Wedge (starting on page 325)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

289700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Symbologies

You can change bar code symbology parameter settings in your 700 Series

Computer via the Data Collection control panel applet. The following

parameters are for bar code symbologies. Additional information about the

more common bar code symbologies are in Appendix C, “Bar Code

Symbologies.” Note that these parameters are listed in the order of their

appearance within this tab.

Most of these symbologies apply to both the imager and the laser scanner

tools. However, when using an imager, the Macro PDF (page 300), Micro

PDF 417 (page 302), Matrix 2 of 5 (page 304), Telepen (page 305),and

Code 11 (page 306) symbologies are not supported. Likewise, when using

a laser scanner, the QR Code (page 307) and Data Matrix (page 308)

symbologies are not supported.

The following table shows which bar code symbologies are supported ei-

ther by an imager or by a laser scanner.

Bar Code Symbology Imager Laser Scanner

Code 39 XX

Interleaved 2 of 5 X X

Standard 2 of 5 XX

Matrix 2 of 5 X

Code 128 XX

Code 93 X X

Codabar XX

MSI X

Plessey X

UPC X X

EAN/EAN 128 XX

Code 11 X

PDF 417 XX

Micro PDF 417 X

Telepen X

Data Matrix X

QR Code X

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

290 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Code 39

Code 39 is a discrete, self-checking, variable length symbology. The char-

acter set is uppercase A-Z, 0-9, dollar sign ($), period (.), slash (/), percent

(%), space ( ), plus (+), and minus (-).

Action

Tap (+) to expand the Code 39 parameter, select the setting to be changed,

then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from the

drop-down list.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.3.1

Options

Decoding 0 Not active

1 Active (default)

Format 0 Standard 43 characters (default)

1 Full ASCII

Start/Stop 0 Not transmitted (default)

1 Transmitted

Start/Stop characters (Not supported when using an imager):

0 $ (dollar sign) only

1 * (asterisk) only (default)

2 & and * (dollar sign and asterisk)

Check digit 0 Not used (default)

1 Mod 43 transmitted

2 Mod 43 not transmitted

3 French CIP transmitted

4 French CIP not transmitted

5 Italian CPI transmitted

6 Italian CPI not transmitted

Bar code length 0 Any length (default)

1 Minimum length

Minimum length 000-254 Minimum length 1-254 (6)

Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

291700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Standard 2 of 5

Standard 2 of 5 is a discrete and self-checking symbology that uses the bars

to encode information and the spaces to separate the individual bars.

Action

Tap (+) to expand the Standard 2 of 5 parameter, select the setting to be

changed, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from

the drop-down list.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.4.1

Options

Decoding 0 Not active (default)

1 Active

Format 0 Identicon, 6 start/stop bars (default)

1 Computer Identics, 4 start/stop

Check digit 0 Not used (default)

1 Mod 10 transmitted

2 Mod 10 not transmitted

Bar code length 0 Any length

1 Minimum length (default)

2 Fixed lengths

Minimum length 001-254 Minimum length 1-254 (6)

Fixed length 1 000-254 Fixed bar code length 0-254 (0)

Fixed length 2 000-254 Fixed bar code length 0-254 (0)

Fixed length 3 000-254 Fixed bar code length 0-254 (0)

Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered. If Bar

code length =“2”thenFixed length 1,Fixed length 2,orFixed length 3

is entered.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

292 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Codabar

Codabar is a self-checking, discrete symbology.

Action

Tap (+) to expand the Codabar parameter, select a setting to be changed,

then select an option from the drop-down list to change this setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.5.1

Options

Decoding 0 Not active (default)

1 Active

Start/Stop 0 Not transmitted (default)

1 abcd transmitted

2 ABCD transmitted

3 abcd/tn*e transmitted

4 DC1`DC4 transmitted

CLSI library system (Not supported when using an imager):

0 Not active (default)

1 Active

Check digit 0 Not used (default)

1 Transmitted

2 Not transmitted

Bar code length 0 Any length

1 Minimum length (default)

2 Fixed lengths

Minimum length 003-254 Minimum length 3-254 (6)

Fixed length 1 000-254 Fixed length 0-254 (0)

Fixed length 2 000-254 Fixed length 0-254 (0)

Fixed length 3 000-254 Fixed length 0-254 (0)

Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered. If Bar

code length =“2”thenFixed length 1,Fixed length 2,orFixed length 3

is entered.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

293700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

UPC/EAN

UPC/EAN are fixed-length, numeric, continuous symbologies that use

four element widths.

Action

Tap (+) to expand the UPC/EAN parameter, select the setting to be

changed, then select an option to change this setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.6.1

Options

UPC A 0 Not active

1 Active (default)

UPC E 0 Not active

1 Active (default)

EAN 8 0 Not active

1 Active (default)

EAN 13 0 Not active

1 Active (default)

Add-on digits 0 Not required (default)

1 Required

Add-on 2 digits 0 Not active (default)

1 Active

Add-on 5 digits (Not supported when using an imager):

0 Not active (default)

1 Active

UPC A check digit 0 Not transmitted

1 Transmitted (default)

UPC E check digit 0 Not transmitted

1 Transmitted (default)

EAN 8 check digit 0 Not transmitted

1 Transmitted (default)

EAN 13 check digit 0 Not transmitted

1 Transmitted (default)

UPC A number system 0 Not transmitted

1 Transmitted (default)

UPC E number system 0 Not transmitted

1 Transmitted (default)

UPC A re-encoding 0 UPC A transmitted as EAN 13 (default)

1 UPC A transmitted as UPC A

UPC E re-encoding 0 UPC E transmitted as UPC E (default)

1 UPC E transmitted as UPC A

EAN 8 re-encoding 0 EAN 8 transmitted as EAN 8 (default)

1 EAN 8 transmitted as EAN 13

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

294 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Code 93

Code 93 is a variable length, continuous symbology that uses four element

widths.

Action

Tap t he Code 93 parameter, then select an option to change this parameter

setting. Tap (+) to access the Code 93 Lengths parameter.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.7.1

Options

0 Not active (default)

1 Active

Code 93 Length

Sets the Code 93 bar code length.

Action

Tap (+) to expand the Code 93 parameter, then tap (+) to expand the

Code 93 Lengths parameter. Tap the setting to be changed, then tap an

option to change this setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.19.1

Options

Bar code length 0 Any length (default)

1 Minimum length

Minimum length 001-254 Minimum length 1-254 (6)

Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

295700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Code 128

Code 128 is a variable-length, continuous, high-density, alphanumeric

symbology that uses multiple element widths and supports the extended

ASCII character set.

Action

Tap t he Code 128 parameter, then select an option to change this parame-

ter setting. The following illustration is for a 700 Series Computer using a la-

ser scanner.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.9.1

Options

0 Not active (default)

1 Active

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

296 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Code 128 Options

Set the following for the Code 128 parameter. Note that the EAN 128 ]C1

and CIP 128 French Pharmaceutical options are not available when you use

an imager with your 700 Series Computer.

Action

Tap (+) to expand the Code 128 Options parameter, select a setting, then

select an option to change this setting.

SNMP OID

None.

Options

EAN 128 ]C1 Identifier (disabled when using an imager)

0Remove

1 Include (default)

CIP 128 French Pharmaceutical (disabled when using an imager)

0 Not active (default)

1 Active

Bar code length 0 Any length (default)

1 Minimum length

Minimum length 001-254 Minimum length 1-254 (6)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

297700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Code 128 FNC1 Character

The Code 128 FNC1 character (EAN 128 norms) can be any ASCII char-

acter and is used as a separator when multiple identifiers and their fields

are concatenated. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with

your 700 Series Computer.

Non-printable ASCII characters can be entered using the following syntax

where HH is the hexadecimal value of the character.

\xHH

For example, the GS character, whose hexadecimal value is 1D, would be

entered as \x1D. In addition,the following characters have their own iden-

tifiers:

SBEL \a

SBS \b

SFF \f

SLF \n

SCR \r

SHT \t

SVT \v

Action

Tap (+) to expand the Code 128 parameter, then type the ASCII charac-

ters to be set for the Code 128 FNC1 character parameter.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.21.1

Options

Any ASCII character (default is the GS function character - ID hex)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

298 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Plessey

Plessey is a pulse-width modulated symbology like most other bar codes. It

includes a start character, data characters, an eight-bit cyclic check digit,

and a termination bar. The code is continuous and not self-checking. You

need to configure two parameters for Plessey code: Start Code and Check

Digit. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700

Series Computer.

Action

Tap (+) to expand the Plessey parameter, select the setting to be changed,

then select an option to change this setting or select an option from the

drop-down list.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.10.1

Options

Decoding 0 Not active (default)

1 Active

Check digit 0 Not transmitted (default)

1 Transmitted

Bar code length 0 Any length (default)

1 Minimum length

Minimum length 001-254 Minimum bar code length 1-254 (6)

Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

299700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

MSI

MSI is a symbology similar to Plessey code (page 298) that includes a start

pattern, data characters, one or two check digits, and a stop pattern. Note

that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Com-

puter.

Action

Tap (+) to expand the MSI parameter, select the setting to be changed,

then select an option to change this setting or select an option from the

drop-down list.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.15.1

Options

Decoding 0 Not active (default)

1 Active

Check digit 0 Mod 10 transmitted (default)

1 Mod 10 Not transmitted

2 Double Mod 10 transmitted

3 Double Mod 10 not transmitted

Bar code length 0 Any length

1 Minimum length (default)

Minimum length 001-254 Minimum length 1-254 (6)

Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

300 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

PDF 417

PDF 417 is a stacked two-dimensional symbology that provides the ability

to scan across rows of code. Each row consists of start/stop characters, row

identifiers, and symbol characters, which consist of four bars and four

spaces each and contain the actual data. This symbology uses error correc-

tion symbol characters appended at the end to recover loss of data.

Because the virtual wedge translates incoming data into keypad input, the

size of the keypad buffer limits the effective length of the label to 128

characters. Longer labels may be truncated. For PDF 417 labels of more

than 128 characters, you can develop an application that bypasses the key-

pad buffer.

Action

Tap t he PDF 417 parameter, then select an option to change this parame-

ter setting. Tap (+) to access either the Macro PDF options parameter or

the Micro PDF 417 parameter.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.17.1

Options

0 Not active

1 Active (default)

Macro PDF options

Macro PDF is used when a long message requires more than one PDF 417

label. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700

Series Computer.

SSelect Buffered to store a multi-label PDF 417 message in the Sabre

buffer, thus transmitting the entire message when all labels have been

read.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

301700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SSelect Unbuffered for multi-label PDF 417 messages that are too long

for the Sabre buffer (memory overflow). Each part of the PDF 417 label

is transmitted separately, and the host application must then assemble

the message using the macro PDF control header transmitted with each

label. Control Header is only present in macro PDF codes and is always

transmitted with unbuffered option.

Action

Tap (+) to expand the PDF 417 parameter, tap (+) to expand the Macro

PDF parameter, select a setting to be changed, then select an option to

change this setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.22.1

Options

Macro PDF 0 Unbuffered

1 Buffered (default)

Control header 0 Not transmitted (default)

1 Transmitted

File name 0 Not transmitted (default)

1 Transmitted

Segment count 0 Not transmitted (default)

1 Transmitted

Time stamp 0 Not transmitted (default)

1 Transmitted

Sender 0 Not transmitted (default)

1 Transmitted

Addressee 0 Not transmitted (default)

1 Transmitted

File size 0 Not transmitted (default)

1 Transmitted

Checksum 0 Not transmitted (default)

1 Transmitted

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

302 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Micro PDF 417

Micro PDF 417 is a multi-row symbology derived from and closely based

on PDF 417 (page 300). A limited set of symbology sizes is available, to-

gether with a fixed level of error correction for each symbology size. Note

that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Com-

puter.

Action

Tap (+) to expand the PDF 417 parameter, tap (+) to expand the Micro

PDF 417 parameter, select a setting to be changed, then select an option

to change this setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.27.1

Options

Decoding 0 Not active (default)

1 Active

Code 128 Emulation 0 Not active (default)

1 Active

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

303700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Interleaved 2 of 5

Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) is a high-density, self-checking, continuous,

numeric symbology used mainly in inventory distribution and the auto-

mobile industry.

Note: An Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code label must be at least three characters

long for the 700 Series Computer to scan and decode correctly.

Action

Tap (+) to expand the Interleaved 2 of 5 parameter, select the setting to be

changed, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from

the drop-down list.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.23.1

Options

Decoding 0 Not active (default)

1 Active

Check digit 0 Not used (default)

1 Mod 10 transmitted

2 Mod 10 not transmitted

3 French CIP transmitted

4 French CIP not transmitted

Bar code length 0 Any length

1 Minimum length (default)

2 Fixed lengths

Minimum length 003-254 Minimum length 3-254 (6)

Fixed length 1 003-254 Fixed length 3-254 (0)

Fixed length 2 003-254 Fixed length 3-254 (0)

Fixed length 3 003-254 Fixed length 3-254 (0)

Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered. If Bar

code length =“2” then Fixed length 1,Fixed length 2,orFixed length 3 is

entered.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

304 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Matrix2of5

Matrix 2 of 5 is a numerical symbology. Note that this is not available when

you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.

Action

Tap (+) to expand the Matrix 2 of 5 parameter, select the setting to be

changed, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from

the drop-down list.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.24.1

Options

Decoding 0 Not active (default)

1 Active

Bar code length 0 Any length

1 Minimum length (default)

Minimum length 001-254 Minimum length 1-254 (6)

Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

305700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Telepen

Telepen is an alphanumeric, case-sensitive, full ASCII symbology. Note that

this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.

Action

Tap (+) to expand the Telepen parameter, select the setting to be changed,

then tap an option to change this setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.25.1

Options

Decoding 0 Not active (default)

1 Active

Format 0 ASCII (default)

1 Numeric

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

306 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Code 11

Code 11 is a high density, discrete numeric symbology that is extensively

used in labeling telecommunications components and equipment. Note

that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Com-

puter.

Action

Tap (+) to expand the Code 11 parameter, select the setting to be changed,

then tap an option to change this setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.26.1

Options

Decoding 0 Not active (default)

1 Active

Check digit verification 1 1 digit (default)

2 2 digits

Check digit transmit 0 Disable (default)

1 Enable

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

307700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

QR Code

QR Code (Quick Response Code) is a two-dimensional matrix symbology

containing dark and light square data modules. It has position detection

patterns on three of its four corners and features direct encodation of the

Japanese Kana-Kanji character set. It can encode up to 2509 numeric or

1520 alphanumeric characters and offers three levels of error detection.

Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Se-

ries Computer.

Action

Tap (+) to expand the QR Code parameter, select the setting to be

changed, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from

the drop-down list.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.35.1

Options

Decoding 0 Not active

1 Active (default)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

308 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Data Matrix

A two-dimensional matrix symbology, which is made of square modules

arranged within a perimeter finder pattern. The symbology utilizes Error

Checking and Correcting (ECC) algorithm with selectable levels for data

error recovery and Cyclic Redundancy Check algorithm to validate the da-

ta. The character set includes either 128 characters conforming to ISO

646 (ANSI X3.4 - 1986) or 256 extended character set. Maximum capac-

ity of a symbol is 2335 alphanumeric characters, 1556 8-bit byte charac-

ters or 3116 numeric digits. Note that this is not available when you use a

laser scanner with your 700 Series Computer.

Action

Tap (+) to expand the Data Matrix parameter, select the setting to be

changed, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from

the drop-down list.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.34.1

Options

Decoding 0 Not active

1 Active (default)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

309700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Symbology Options

To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Settings

→the System tab →the Data Collection icon to access its control panel

applet.

Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Symbology Options tab, then

tap this tab to access its parameters. The following are parameters for bar

code symbology options. Note that these are listed in the order of their

appearance within the Symbology Options tab.

Symbology ID

Identifies the bar code symbology in which data has been encoded by pre-

pending a user-specified symbology identifier to the data. You can prepend

one of these types of character strings to identify the symbology:

SUser-defined ASCII Character (Option 1):

A user-defined symbology identifier is a single ASCII character. You can

assign a custom identifier character to each bar code symbology. Note

that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series

Computer.

SAIM ISO/IEC Standard (Option 2 - Required to define symbology IDs):

The AIM Standard has a three-character structure which indicates the

symbology and optional features. See the AIM ISO/IEC Standard for

more information.

Action

Select Symbology ID, then select an option to change this parameter set-

ting. Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, then select any of

the user ID parameters listed. See the top of the next page for a sample screen

of the Code 39 user ID.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.22.1

Options

0 Disable (default)

1 User defined (disabled when using an imager)

2 ISO/IEC Standard

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

310 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Code 39 User ID

If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own

ASCII character to identify Code 39 bar code data. Note that this is not

available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.

Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 39 user

ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.

SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.3.1

Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*).

Code 128 User ID

If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own

ASCII character to identify Code 128 bar code data. Note that this is not

available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.

Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 128 user

ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.

SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.5.1

Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*).

Codabar User ID

If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own

ASCII character to identify Codabar bar code data. Note that this is not

available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.

Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Codabar user

ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.

SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.2.1

Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is D.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

311700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Code 93 User ID

If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own

ASCII character to identify Code 93 bar code data. Note that this is not

available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.

Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 93 user

ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.

SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.4.1

Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*).

Interleaved 2 of 5 User ID

If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own

ASCII character to identify Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code data. Note that this

is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.

Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Interleaved 2

of 5 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parame-

ter setting.

SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.10.1

Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is I (not lowercase L).

PDF-417 User ID

If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own

ASCII character to identify PDF 417 bar code data. Note that this is not

available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.

Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the PDF 417 user

ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.

SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.12.1

Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is an asterisk (*).

MSI User ID

If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own

ASCII character to identify MSI bar code data. Note that this is not avail-

able when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.

Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the MSI user ID

parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.

SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.11.1

Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is D.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

312 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Plessey User ID

If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own

ASCII character to identify Plessey bar code data. Note that this is not avail-

able when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.

Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Plessey user ID

parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.

SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.13.1

Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is D.

Standard 2 of 5 User ID

If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own

ASCII character to identify Standard 2 of 5 bar code data. Note that this is

not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.

Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Standard 2 of

5userIDparameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter

setting.

SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.23.1

Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is D.

UPC A User ID

If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own

ASCII character to identify UPC-A (Universal Product Code) bar code

data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700

Series Computer.

Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the UPC A user ID

parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.

SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.6.1

Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is A.

UPC E User ID

If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own

ASCII character to identify UPC-E bar code data. Note that this is not

available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.

Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the UPC E user ID

parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.

SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.7.1

Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is E.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

313700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

EAN 8 User ID

If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own

ASCII character to identify EAN-8 bar code data. Note that this is not

available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.

Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the EAN 8 user ID

parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.

SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.8.1

Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is \xFF.

EAN 13 User ID

If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own

ASCII character to identify EAN-13 (European Article Numbering) bar

code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your

700 Series Computer.

Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the EAN 13 user

ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.

SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.9.1

Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is F.

Matrix 2 of 5 User ID

If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own

ASCII character to identify Matrix 2 of 5 bar code data. Note that this is

not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.

Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Matrix 2 of 5

user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter

setting.

SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.24.1

Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is D.

Telepen User ID

If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own

ASCII character to identify Telepen bar code data. Note that this is not

available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.

Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Telepen user

ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.

SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.25.1

Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is an asterisk (*).

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

314 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Code 11 User ID

If “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own

ASCII character to identify Code 11 bar code data. Note that this is not

available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.

Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 11 user

ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.

SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.16.1

Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*).

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

315700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Prefix

Prepends a string of up to 20 ASCII characters to all scanned data.

Action

Tap t he Prefix parameter, then enter a prefix value to change this parame-

ter setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.29.1

Options

Acceptable values are up to 20 ASCII characters.

Embedded null (<NUL >) characters are not allowed.

Default is no characters (disabled).

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

316 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Suffix

Appends a string of up to 20 ASCII characters to all scanned data.

Action

Tap t he Suffix parameter, then enter a suffix value to change this parame-

ter setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.30.1

Options

Acceptable values are up to 20 ASCII characters. Embedded null (<NUL

>) characters are not allowed. Default is no characters (disabled).

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

317700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Beeper/LED

To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Settings

→the System tab →the Data Collection icon to access its control panel

applet.

Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Beeper/LED tab, then tap this

tab to access its parameters.

Most of these functions are not available when using an imager. The following

table shows which functions are supported either by an imager or by a laser

scanner.

Beeper Function Imager Laser Scanner

Beeper Volume XX

Beeper Frequency X

Good Read Beeps X

Good Read Beep Duration X

The following are parameters for features on the 700 Series Computer.

Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

318 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Beeper Volume

Sets the volume for the good read beep.

Action

Tap t he Beeper volume parameter, then select an option to change this pa-

rameter setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.6.1

Laser Scanner Options

0Low

1High(default)

2 Medium

3 Off

4 Vibrate

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

319700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Imager Options

1 Beeper (default)

4 Vibrate

Silencing the Beeper Volume

To turn the beeper off, tap Start →Settings →the Personal tab →

Sounds and Notifications →the Volume tab, drag the System volume

slider bar to the left “Silent” position, then tap ok to exit this applet.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

320 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Beeper Frequency

Sets the frequency for the good read beep. Note that this is not available

when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.

Action

Tap t he Beeper frequency parameter, then enter a frequency value to

change this parameter setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.7.1

Options

1000-4095 (default is 2090)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

321700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Good Read Beeps

Sets the number of good read beeps. Note that this is not available when you

use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.

Action

Tap t he Good read beeps parameter, then select an option to change this

parameter setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.8.1

Options

0 No beeps

1 One beep (default)

2 Two beeps

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

322 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Good Read Beep Duration

Sets the duration of the good read beep. Note that this is not available when

you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.

Action

Tap t he Good read beep duration parameter, then enter a duration value

to change this parameter setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.9.1

Options

0`2550 Beep duration in milliseconds. (default is 80)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

323700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Imager

To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Settings

→the System tab →the Data Collection icon to access its control panel

applet.

Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Imager tab, then tap this tab

to access its parameters.

The following are parameters for the imager. Note that these are listed in

the order of their appearance within the Imager tab.

Aimer LED duration

The Aimer LED duration controls the time the Aimer LED is turned on

when the scan button is pressed. After this time, images are captured for

decoding. The purpose is to position the Aimer LED on the bar code sym-

bol before attempting to decode the bar code. Note that this is not available

when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Series Computer.

Action

Tap t he Aimer LED duration parameter, then enter a value to change this

setting. Note that values must be in 50 ms increments, such as 500, 650,

or 32500. Values not entered in 50 ms increments will be rounded down.

For example, 2489 ms would be rounded down to 2450 ms, 149 ms

would be rounded down to 100 ms, etc..

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.3.1.1.21.1

Options

0-65500 ms (Default is 0)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

324 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Image Dimension

The image dimensions control the horizontal size of the image for decod-

ing. This can restrict the image to one bar code when otherwise, there

might be more than one bar code in the image to be decoded. Note that

this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Series Com-

puter.

Action

Tap t he Image dimension parameter, select the position to be changed,

then tap an option or enter a value to change this position.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.3.1.1.22.1

Options

Left position 0 Not supported

Right position 0 Not supported

Top position 0-478 Position in pixels (0)

Bottom position 0-479 Position in pixels (479)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

325700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Virtual Wedge

To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Settings

→the System tab →the Data Collection icon to access its control panel

applet.

Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Virtual Wedge tab, then tap

this tab to access its parameters.

The following are parameters for the virtual wedge scanner. Note that these

are listed in the order of their appearance within the Virtual Wedge tab.

Virtual Wedge

Enables or disables the virtual wedge for the internal scanner. The virtual

wedge retrieves scanned Automatic Data Collection (ADC) data and sends

it to the keypad driver so that the 700 Series Computer can receive and

interpret the data as keypad input.

Because the virtual wedge translates incoming data into keypad input, the

size of the keypad buffer limits the effective length of the label to 128

characters. Longer labels may be truncated. For labels of more than 128

characters, you need to develop an application that bypasses the keypad

buffer.

Action

Tap t he Virtual Wedge parameter, then tap an option to change this pa-

rameter setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.2.1

Options

0 Disable

1 Enable (default)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

326 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Preamble

Sets the preamble that precedes any data you scan with the 700 Series

Computer. Common preambles include a data location number or an op-

erator number.

Action

Tap t he Preamble parameter, then enter a preamble value to change this

parameter setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.3.1

Syntax

ADdata

where data is acceptable values up to 31 ASCII characters. Embedded null

(<NUL >) characters are not allowed. Default is no characters (disabled).

Note: When you enter the AD command without data, the preamble is

disabled. If you want to use quotation marks or the following combina-

tions of characters as part of the appended data, separate those characters

from the AD command with quotes. If you do not use quotes as described

here, the 700 Series Computer will interpret the characters as another con-

figuration command:

EXAMPLE:

To use the two-character string BV as a preamble, scan this command (as a

Code 39 label) or send this command through the network: $+AD“BV”

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

327700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Postamble

Sets the postamble that is appended to any data you scan with the 700 Se-

ries Computer. Common postambles include cursor controls, such as tabs

or carriage return line feeds.

Action

Tap t he Postamble parameter, then enter a postamble value to change this

parameter setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.4.1

Syntax

AEdata

where data is any acceptable values up to 31 ASCII characters. Embedded

null (<NUL >) characters are not allowed. Default is the tab character (\t).

Note: When you enter the AE command without data, the postamble is

disabled. If you want to use quotation marks or the following combina-

tions of characters as part of the appended data, separate those characters

from the AE command with quotes. If you do not use quotes as described

here, the 700 Series Computer will interpret the characters as another con-

figuration command.

EXAMPLE:

To use the two-character string BV as a postamble, scan this command (as

a Code 39 label) or send this command through the network: $+AE“BV”

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

328 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Grid

Sets the virtual wedge grid, which filters the data coming from this 700

Series Computer. The data server supports data filtering, which allows you

to selectively send scanned data. The virtual wedge grid is similar to the

“format” argument of the C Runtime Library scan function.

Action

Tap t he Grid parameter, then enter a grid value to change this parameter

setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.5.1

Syntax

AF<symID> filter-expression= > editing-expression

where:

S<symID>

The AIM symbology ID.

Sfilter-expression

Any character string that includes valid filter expression values, and edit-

ing-expression is any character string that includes valid editing expres-

sion values.

S<width>

Any positive integer or NULL. A NULL width means that the field type

(defined next) applies all the way to the end of the data string. A non-

NULL width means that the field applies to that many characters of da-

ta. The grid can be up to 240 characters in length. Default is NULL.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

329700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Code Page

Sets the virtual wedge code page. The code page controls the translation

from the character set of the raw collected data to Unicode, which is the

character set expected by Windows CE applications. The default code page

is 1252, which is the Windows Latin 1 (ANSI) character set.

Action

Tap t he Code Page parameter, then select an option to change this param-

eter setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.6.1

Options

The only acceptable value for the code page parameter is “1252,” which is

the default.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

330 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SNMP Control Panel Applet

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) parameters include iden-

tification information, security encryption, security community strings,

and traps.

To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Settings

→the System tab →the SNMP icon to access its control panel applet.

Tap a tab to access its menus. These tabs represent three groups of settings

or parameters:

SSecurity (starting on the next page)

STraps (starting on page 336)

SIdentification (starting on page 338)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

331700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Security

To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Settings

→the System tab →the SNMP icon →the Security tab to access its

parameters.

The following are parameters that affect encryption and community

strings. Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance within the

Security tab.

Read Only Community

Sets the read-only community string for this 700 Series Computer, which

is required for processing of SNMP get and get next requests.

Action

Tap t he Read Only Community parameter, then enter a community string

to change this parameter setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.2.0

Options

The read-only community string can be up to 128 ASCII characters. De-

fault is Public.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

332 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Read/Write Community

Sets the read/write community string, which is required for processing of

SNMP set requests by this 700 Series Computer. An SNMP packet with

this name as the community string will also process SNMP get and next

requests.

Action

Tap t he Read/Write Community parameter, then enter a community

string to change this parameter setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.3.0

Options

The read/write community string can be up to 128 ASCII characters. De-

fault is Private.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

333700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Read Encryption

Sets the packet-level mode of security for SNMP read-only requests. If you

enable read encryption, all received SNMP get and get next packets have

to be encrypted or the packet will not be authorized. If encryption is en-

abled, you can only use software provided by Intermec Technologies.

Note: To enable security encryption, you also need to set the Security En-

cryption Key (page 335).

Action

Tap t he Read Encryption parameter, then select an option to change this

parameter setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.4.0

Options

1 On SNMP get and get next packets must be encrypted

2 Off SNMP packets do not have to be encrypted (default)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

334 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Write Encryption

Sets the packet-level mode of security for SNMP read/write requests. If

you enable write encryption, all SNMP packets that are received with the

read/write community string have to be encrypted or the packet will not

be authorized. You need to use software from Intermec Technologies that

supports encryption.

Note: To enable security encryption, you also need to set the Security En-

cryption Key (page 335).

Action

Tap t he Write Encryption parameter, then select an option to change this

parameter setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.5.0

Options

1 On SNMP packets must be encrypted

2 Off SNMP packets do not have to be encrypted (default)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

335700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Encryption Key

Identifies the key that this 700 Series Computer uses to encrypt or deci-

pher SNMP packets. Encryption is used only by software provided by In-

termec Technologies. If encryption is enabled, SNMP management plat-

forms will not be able to communicate with the 700 Series Computer. The

encryption key is returned encrypted.

Action

Tap t he Encryption Key parameter, then enter a security encryption key

value to change this parameter setting.

Note: You also need to set either Read Encryption (page 333) or Write

Encryption (page 334) or both.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.6.0

Options

The encryption key can be from 4 to 20 ASCII characters. Default is

NULL.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

336 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Traps

To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Settings

→the System tab →the SNMP icon →the Traps tab to access its

parameters.

The following are authentication and threshold parameters for traps. Note

that these are listed in the order of their appearance within the Traps tab.

Authentication

Determines whether to send authentication traps. When trap authentica-

tion is enabled, an authentication trap is sent if an SNMP packet is re-

ceived by the master agent with an invalid community string.

Action

Tap t he Authentication parameter, then select an option to change this

parameter setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.2.2.0

Options

1On(default)

2 Off

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

337700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Threshold

Determines the maximum number of traps per second that the master

agent generates. If the threshold is reached, the trap will not be sent.

Action

Tap t he Threshold parameter, then enter a threshold value to change this

parameter setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.2.3.0

Options

Any positive integer value. Default is 10.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

338 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Identification

To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Settings

→the System tab →the SNMP icon →the Identification tab to access

its parameters.

The following are parameters for contact, location, and name information

for support purposes. Note that these are listed in the order of their appear-

ance within the Identification tab.

Contact

Sets the contact information for the person responsible for this 700 Series

Computer.

Action

Tap t he Contact parameter, then enter the name of your contact represen-

tative to change this parameter setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.2.1.1.4.0

Options

The identification contact may be up to 255 ASCII characters. Default is

no characters or blank.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

339700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Name

Sets the assigned name for this 700 Series Computer.

Action

Tap t he Name parameter, then enter the name of your 700 Series Com-

puter to change this parameter setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.2.1.1.5.0

Options

The identification name may be up to 255 ASCII characters. Default is no

characters or blank.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

340 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Location

Sets the identification location for this 700 Series Computer, such as

“Shipping.”

Action

Tap t he Location parameter, then enter the location of where your 700

Series Computer to change this parameter setting.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.2.1.1.6.0

Options

The identification location may be up to 255 ASCII characters. Default is

no characters or blank.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

341700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Unit Information Control Panel Applet

Unit Information is a read-only control panel applet that provides informa-

tion about your 700 Series Computer, such as software version builds,

available CAB files, and the internal battery status.

This control panel applet is only available in the 700 Series Computer if

Intermec Content is enabled, the Plus region is enabled and installed, and

a laser scanner is installed.

To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Settings

→the System tab →the Unit Information icon to access its control panel

applet.

Tap a tab to access its menus. These tabs represent three groups of settings

or parameters:

SVersions (starting on the next page)

SBattery Status (starting on page 343)

SCAB Files (starting on page 344)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

342 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Versions

You can view the latest software build version on your 700 Series

Computer by accessing the Unit Information control panel applet.

To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Settings

→the System tab →the Unit Information icon →the Versions tab to

view the latest software build version. Tap ok to exit this information.

Below are some of the software applications you may find on this screen:

S700 Platform Build:

Shows the latest development or released version of the software build

for the 700 Series Computer.

SS9C:

Provides the name and version of the scanner file built into this 700 Se-

ries Computer, along with the current CPU version.

SDataCollection Build:

Shows the latest development or released version of the software build

for the Data Collection control panel applet.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

343700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Battery Status

You can view the battery status for your 700 Series Computer by accessing

the Unit Information control panel applet. Unit Manager applications are

available on the 700 Series Color Unit Manager CD-ROM.Formore

information, consult your Intermec sales representative.

To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Settings

→the System tab →the Unit Information icon →the Battery Status tab

to view the current status. Tap ok to exit this information.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

344 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

CAB Files

You can view the latest developer or released version of each CAB file from

Intermec Technologies Corporation that are installed in your 700 Series

Computer via the Unit Information control panel applet. Custom CAB

files are not displayed in this applet. See the Software Tools User’ s Manual for

more information about these files.

To access the information from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →

Settings →the System tab →the Unit Information icon →the CAB

Files tab to view the current CAB file versions. Tap ok to exit this

information.

When a CAB file is built, a registry entry is created with a build number

for that file. This CAB Files control panel applet looks for a registry key

for each CAB file installed. When the registry entry is found, the CAB file

name and version number information are displayed. If a CAB file has not

been installed, then its information is not displayed.

Below is a list of CAB files from Intermec Technologies that are available

for your 700 Series Computer with their latest developer or released ver-

sion of the software build. Should you need to add any of these to your

700 Series Computer, contact an Intermec representative.

SBtMainStack:

Installation of the Main Bluetooth Stack is handled automatically as part

of the operating system boot-up procedure. See Chapter 4, “Network

Support,” for more information about Bluetooth wireless printing.

SComm Port Wedge:

The software build for the Comm Port Wedge. Note that the Comm Port

Wedge CAB file is available on the 700C Tools CD.

SNPCPTest:

This installs a NorandPortable Communications Protocol (NPCP)

Printing test application which will print to an Intermec4815, 4820,

or 6820 Printer. See Chapter 5, “Printer Support,” for more information.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

345700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SPDWPM0C:

This is the installer for the Wireless Printing Demo application. To run

this demonstration, tap Start →Programs →the Wireless Printing

Demo icon. Press Help in the demo application for more information.

SS9C Upgrade:

Installs the files needed to upgrade the S9C scanner firmware. See the

Recovery CD Help for more information about upgrading the firmware.

SSDK:

Installs the Intermec Software Developer’ s Kit (SDK). See the SDK

User’ s Manual for more information.

SUnit Manager:

Installs the Unit Manager application which provides tools for remotely

managing the 700 Series Computer. Unit Manager applications are

available on the 700 Series Color Unit Manager CD-ROM. For more in-

formation, consult your Intermec sales representative.

SUnit Manager Help:

Installs the online help for the Unit Manager application.

SWinCfg:

Configures the NRINET.INI file, launches the NRINet client, and

loads and unloads the LAN and WLAN device drivers. See the Windows

95 and Windows CE Configuration Utilities Reference Manual (P/N:

978-054-010) for more information.

SWireless Printing Sample:

Installs a sample application that developers can use for reference when

they are developing their own Wireless Printing applications. The source

code for this application is included as part of the Wireless Printing

SDK on the 700C Tools CD. See the SDK User’ s Manual for more infor-

mation.

SActiveX Control Tools:

This lists some of the CAB files that may be available with which to

install ActiveX Control Tools. See the SDK Online Help for more informa-

tion.

SAXCommunication:

Communication controls that transmit or receive messages from in-

put connections.

SAXFileTransfer:

File transfer controls that transmit and receive files using the Trivial

File Transfer Protocol (TFTP).

SAXReaderCommand:

Reader command functions that modify and retrieve configuration

information from your 700 Series Computer.

SAXVWedge:

The virtual wedge control that retrieves scanned ADC data and sends

it to the keyboard driver to interpret data as keyboard input.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A

346 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

347700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Unit Manager

Configuration parameters are also configurable using a Unit Manager ap-

plication which accesses the 700 Series Computer through a web browser

on your desktop PC via the SRDEVMGMT.CAB file.

Unit Manager applications are available on the 700 Series Color Unit

Manager CD-ROM. For more information, consult your Intermec sales

representative.

Note: Parameter information, such as SNMP OID and options, is detailed

in Appendix A, “Control Panel Applets.”

Unit ManagerAppendix —B

348 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Data Collection

Within the Unit Manager, click Configuration from the left navigation

bar, then click the Data Collection icon to access any of these tabs:

Symbologies, Symbology ID, Beeper/LED, or Virtual Wedge.

Symbologies

Within the Unit Manager, select Configuration Management →Data

Collection, then click the Symbologies tab to access the following parame-

ters. Options for these parameters are listed on the page provided. These

are listed in alphabetical order.

SCodabar (page 292)

SCode 11 (page 306)

SCode 128 (page 295)

SCode 128 Options (page 296)

SCode 128 FNC1 Character (page 297)

SCode 39 (page 290)

SCode 93 (page 294)

SCode 93 Length (page 294)

SData Matrix (page 308)

SInterleaved 2 of 5 (page 303)

SMatrix 2 of 5 (page 304)

SMSI (page 299)

SPDF 417 (page 300)

SMacro PDF (page 300)

SMicro PDF 417 (page 302)

SPlessey (page 298)

SQR Code (page 307)

SStandard 2 of 5 (page 291)

STelepen (page 305)

SUPC/EAN (page 293)

Unit ManagerAppendix —B

349700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Symbology ID

Within the Unit Manager, select Configuration Management →Data

Collection, then click the Symbology ID tab to access the following

parameters. Options for these parameters are listed on the page provided.

These are listed in alphabetical order.

SPrefix (page 315)

SSuffix (page 316)

SSymbology ID (page 309)

SCodabar user ID (page 310)

SCode 11 user ID (page 314)

SCode 128 user ID (page 310)

SCode 39 user ID (page 310)

SCode 93 user ID (page 311)

SEAN-13 user ID (page 313)

SEAN-8 user ID (page 313)

SInterleaved 2 of 5 user ID (page 311)

SMatrix 2 of 5 user ID (page 313)

SMSI user ID (page 311)

SPDF 417 user ID (page 311)

SPlessey user ID (page 312)

SStandard 2 of 5 user ID (page 312)

STelepen user ID (page 313)

SUPC-A user ID (page 312)

SUPC-E user ID (page 312)

Beeper/LED

Within the Unit Manager, select Configuration Management →Data

Collection, then click the Beeper/LED tab to access the following

parameters. Options for these parameters are listed on the page provided.

These are listed in alphabetical order.

SBeeper Frequency (page 320)

SBeeper Volume (page 318)

SGood Read Beep Duration (page 322)

SGood Read Beeps (page 321)

Unit ManagerAppendix —B

350 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Imager

Within the Unit Manager, select Configuration Management →Data

Collection, then click the Imager tab to access the following parameters.

Options for these parameters are listed on the page provided. These are

listed in alphabetical order.

SAimer LED Duration (page 323)

SImage Dimension (page 324)

Virtual Wedge

Within the Unit Manager, select Configuration Management →Data

Collection, then click the Virtual Wedge tab to access the following

parameters. Options for these parameters are listed on the page provided.

These are listed in alphabetical order.

SCode Page (page 329)

SGrid (page 328)

SPostamble (page 327)

SPreamble (page 326)

SVirtual Wedge (page 325)

SNMP

Within the Unit Manager, click Configuration from the left navigation

bar, then click the SNMP icon to access any of these tabs: Security, Traps,

or Identification.

Security

Within the Unit Manager, select Configuration Management →SNMP,

then click the Security tab to access the following parameters. Options for

these parameters are listed on the page provided. These are listed in alpha-

betical order.

SEncryption Key (page 335)

SRead Encryption (page 333)

SRead Only Community (page 331)

SRead/Write Community (page 332)

SWrite Encryption (page 334)

Unit ManagerAppendix —B

351700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Traps

Within the Unit Manager, select Configuration Management →SNMP,

then click the Traps tab to access the following parameters. Options for

these parameters are listed on the page provided. These are listed in alpha-

betical order.

SAuthentication (page 336)

SThreshold (page 337)

Identification

Within the Unit Manager, select Configuration Management →SNMP,

then click the Identification tab to access the following parameters. Op-

tions for these parameters are listed on the page provided. These are listed

in alphabetical order.

SContact (page 338)

SLocation (page 340)

SName (page 339)

Unit ManagerAppendix —B

352 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Unit

Within the Unit Manager, click Configuration from the left navigation

bar, then click the Unit icon to access any of these tabs: Date/Time, Dis-

play, Keypad, Power Management, or Speaker.

Date/Time

Sets the current date and time.

Action

Click the Date/Time tab, then select Date or Time and make changes in

the entry field, or tap (+) to expand either the Date or Time parameter,

select the setting to be changed, then select a value from the drop-down

list or enter a new value to change this setting.

SNMP OID

Date: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.501.2.1.0

Time: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.501.2.2.0

Options

Date Year 0000`999 (1999)

Month 1-12 (6)

Day 1-31 (1)

Time Hour 0-23 (0)

Minute 0-59 (00)

Second 0-59 (00)

Unit ManagerAppendix —B

353700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Backlight Timeout

Sets the length of time that the display backlight remains on. If you set a

longer timeout value, you use the battery power at a faster rate.

Action

Click the Display tab, then select an option from the Backlight timeout

drop-down list.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.13.1.0

Syntax

DFdata

where data is any of the following:

10 10 seconds

30 30 seconds

60 1 minute (default)

120 2 minutes

180 3 minutes

240 4 minutes

300 5 minutes

Unit ManagerAppendix —B

354 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Key Clicks

Enables or disables the keypad clicks. The 700 Series Computer emits a

click each time you press a key or decode a row of a two-dimensional

symbology.

Action

Click the Keypad tab, then select an option from the Key clicks drop-

down list.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.12.1.0

Syntax

KCdata

where data is any of the following:

0 Disable clicks

1 Enable soft key clicks

2 Enable loud key clicks (default)

Unit ManagerAppendix —B

355700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Automatic Shutoff

Sets the length of time the 700 Series Computer remains on when there is

no activity. When you turn on the 700 Computer, it either resumes exactly

where it was when you turned it off or boots and restarts your application.

Action

Click the Power Management tab, then select an option from the Auto-

matic shutoff drop-down list.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.11.3.0

Syntax

EZdata

where data is any of the following:

1 1 minute

2 2 minutes

3 3 minutes (default)

4 4 minutes

5 5 minutes

Unit ManagerAppendix —B

356 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Volume

Changes the volume of all audio signals.

Action

Click the Speaker tab, then select an option from the Volume drop-down

list.

SNMP OID

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.3.0

Syntax

BVdata

where data is any of the following:

0 Off

1 Very quiet

2 Quiet

3 Normal (default)

4Loud

5 Very loud

Unit ManagerAppendix —B

357700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Using Reader Commands

After the 700 Series Computer is connected to your network, you can send

the 700 Series Computer a reader command from an application to per-

form a task, such as changing the time and date. Some reader commands

temporarily override the configuration settings and some change the con-

figuration settings.

Change Configuration

The Change Configuration command must precede any configuration

command. If you enter a valid string, the 700 Series Computer configura-

tion is modified and the computer emits a high beep. To send the Change

Configuration command through the network, use the $+ [command]

syntax where command is the two-letter command syntax for the configu-

ration command followed by the value to be set for that command.

You can also make changes to several different commands by using the

$+ [command]...[command n] syntax. There are seven configuration

command settings that can be changed in this way. See each command for

information on respective acceptable “data” values.

Command Syntax

Audio Volume BVdata

Automatic Shutoff EZdata

Backlight Timeout DFdata

Key Clicks KCdata

Virtual Wedge Grid AFdata

Virtual Wedge Postamble AEdata

Virtual Wedge Preamble ADdata

Note: See Appendix A, “Control Panel Applets” for more information about

the Virtual Wedge Postamble and Virtual Wedge Preamble commands.

Example 1

To change the Beep Volume to Off, you can send this string to the 700

Series Computer through the network: $+BV0

where:

$+ Indicates Change Configuration.

BV Specifies the Audio Volume parameter.

0Specifies a value of Off.

Example 2

To change the Beep Volume to Very Quiet and the Virtual Wedge Grid to

123: $+BV1AF123

where:

$+ Indicates Change Configuration

BV1 Specifies Audio Volume, set to Very Quiet (1)

AF123 Specifies Virtual Wedge Grid, set to a value of 123.

Unit ManagerAppendix —B

358 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Set Time and Date

This command sets the date and time on the 700 Series Computer. The

default date and time is June 1, 1999 at 12:00 AM.

From the network, send the following:

/+ yyyymmddhhmmss

where acceptable values for the date are:

yyyy 0000-9999 Year

mm 01-12 Month of the year

dd 01-31 Day of the month

hh 00-23 Hour

mm 00-59 Minutes

ss 00-59 Seconds

You can also set the time and date by using Configuration Management in

Unit Manager, or by using the Clock control panel applet in the Settings

menu. To access this control panel applet, tap Start →Settings →the

System tab →the Clock icon to access its control panel applet.

359700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Bar Codes

This appendix contains a brief explanation of some of the bar code

symbologies that the 700 Series Color (700C) Mobile Computer decodes

and explains some of the general characteristics and uses of these bar code

types. It also includes several bar code labels that can be scanned into your

700 Series Computer.

Bar CodesAppendix —C

360 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Bar Code Symbologies

Specific bar code algorithms can be enabled using the setup menus or the

host computer. Once the computer correctly decodes a bar code, the com-

puter encodes data with descriptive information about the symbol. Re-

sponse time is improved by limiting the computer to the bar codes being

used.

Bar Code Data String Formats

Data Bar Code Type Data Format Data Length

UPC short (UPC-E) nddddddc 8

EAN short (EAN-8) fndddddc 8

UPC long (UPC-A) nddddddddddc 12

EAN long (EAN-13) fnddddddddddc 13

UPC short add-on 2 nddddddcaa 10

EAN short add-on 2 fndddddcaa 10

UPC long add-on 2 nddddddddddcaa 14

EAN long add-on 2 fnddddddddddcaa 15

UPC short add-on 5 nddddddcaaaaa 13

EAN short add-on 5 fndddddcaaaaa 13

UPC long add-on 5 nddddddddddcaaaaa 17

EAN long add-on 5 fnddddddddddcaaaaa 18

Interleaved 2 of 5 d......d Scan device dependent

Standard 2 of 5 d......d Scan device dependent

Plessey d......dc Scan device dependent

Codabar sd....ds Scan device dependent

Code 11 d......d Scan device dependent

Code 39 d......d Scan device dependent

Extended Code 39 d......d Scan device dependent

Code 93 d......d Scan device dependent

Code 128 d......d Scan device dependent

Note: These bar code data definitions apply to the Data Format column in

the previous table

a Add-on code digits

c Check digits

d Bar code digits

f EAN flag 1 characters

n Number system digits

s Start and stop digits

If MOD 10 or MOD 11 check digits are enabled, the digit falls at the end

of a bar code data string. Each check digit enabled extends the bar code

data string length by one character.

Bar CodesAppendix —C

361700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

The 700 Series Computer recognizes eleven of the most widely used bar

code symbologies. With bar code symbologies, like languages, there are

many different types. A bar code symbology provides the required flexibil-

ity for a particular inventory tracking system.

A symbology may be for particular industries, such as food and beverage,

automotive, railroad, or aircraft. Some of these industries have established

their own bar code symbology because other symbologies did not meet

their needs.

Without going into great detail on the bar code structure, note that no two

products use the same bar code. Each product gets a unique bar code.

Industries that use a particular type of bar code symbology have formed

regulating committees or are members of national institutes that issue and

keep track of bar codes. This ensures that each organization that contrib-

utes to a particular industry conforms to its standard. Without some form

of governing body, bar coding would not work.

SUPC (Universal Product Code) with/without add-ons

SEAN (European Article Numbering Code) with/without add-ons

SCodabar

SC11 (Code 11)

SC39 (Code 39)

SC93 (Code 93)

SC128 (Code 128)

SI 2 of 5 (Interleaved 2 of 5 Code)

SS 2 of 5 (Standard 2 of 5)

SPlessey

SMSI (a variant of Plessey)

Bar CodesAppendix —C

362 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

UPC

The UPC (Universal Product Code) is the symbology used throughout the

grocery and retail industries. This bar code symbology contains two pieces

of numerical information encoded on the bar code, producer identifica-

tion, and product identification information.

The UPC symbol is 12 characters long. The first character of the UPC

symbol is a number system character, such as “0” for grocery items and “3”

for drug- and health-related items.

The UPC symbology is for retail environments such as grocery stores, con-

venience stores, and general merchandise stores.

Some retail items are so small that a standard UPC bar code cannot fit on

the packaging. When this occurs there is a permitted shorter version of the

UPC symbology, referred to as UPC-E. UPC-E is six characters long (eight

including number system and check digit), approximately half the size of a

standard UPC bar code.

EAN

EAN (European Article Numbering) symbology is similar to UPC symbol-

ogy, except that it contains 13 characters and uses the first two to identify

countries.

The EAN symbology is used in the retail environment throughout most of

Europe. Though similar to UPC symbology, these are not interchangeable.

Codabar

Codabar was for retail price-labeling systems. Today it is widely accepted

by libraries, medical industries, and photo finishing services.

Codabar is a discrete, self-checking code with each character represented

by a stand-alone group of four bars and three intervening spaces.

Four different start or stop characters get defined and designated “a”, “b”,

“c”, and “d”. These start and stop characters are constructed using one

wide bar and two wide spaces. A complete Codabar symbol begins with

one of the start or stop characters followed by some number of data char-

acters and ending in one of the start or stop characters.

Any of the start or stop characters may be used on either end of the sym-

bol. It is possible to use the 16 unique start or stop combinations to identi-

fy label type or other information.

Since Codabar is variable-length, discrete, and self-checking, it is a versatile

symbology. The width of space between characters is not critical and may

vary significantly within the same symbol. The character set consists of “0”

through “9”, “-”, “$”, “:”, “/”, “.”, and “+”.

The specific dimensions for bars and spaces in Codabar optimize perfor-

mance of certain early printing and reading equipment. Codabar has 18

different dimensions for bar and space widths. So many different dimen-

sions often result in labels printed out of specification and cause Codabar

printing equipment to be more expensive.

Bar CodesAppendix —C

363700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Code 11

Code 11 satisfies the requirements for a very high density, discrete numeric

bar code. The name Code 11 derives from 11 different data characters that

can be represented, in addition to a start or stop character.

The character set includes the 10 digits and the dash symbol. Each charac-

ter is represented by a stand-alone group of three bars and two intervening

spaces. Although Code 11 is discrete, it is not self-checking. A single print-

ing defect can transpose one character into another valid character. One or

two check digits obtain data security.

The specifications for Code 11 suggest that this code should have a narrow

element width of 7.5 mils. This results in an information density of 15

characters per inch.

Code 39

Code 39 (C39) is the most widely used symbology among the industrial

bar codes. Most major companies, trade associations, and the federal gov-

ernment find this code to fit their needs. The main feature of this symbol-

ogy is the ability to encode messages using the full alphanumeric character

set, seven special characters, and ASCII characters.

Programming for this symbology can be for any length that the application

requires. The application program for the 700 Series Computer handles

symbology at least one character but no more than 32 characters in length.

When programming the computer for Code 39, it is important to set the

symbology limit as close as possible (minimum and maximum bar code

lengths being scanned). Doing so keeps the computer bar code processing

time to a minimum and conserves battery power.

Bar code readers can respond to Uniform Symbology Specification symbols

in non-standard ways for particular applications. These methods are not

for general applications, because of the extra programming required. Code

39 Full ASCII is one example of non-standard code.

Note: See page 368 to scan several Code 39 bar code labels available to

change settings on your 700 Series Computer.

Encoded Code 39 (Concatenation)

If the first data character of a symbol is a space, the reader may be pro-

grammed to append the information contained in the remainder of the

symbol to a storage buffer. This operation continues for all successive sym-

bols that contain a leading space, with messages being added to the end of

previously stored ones. When a message is read which does not contain a

leading space, the contents are appended to the buffer, the entire buffer is

transmitted, and the buffer is cleared.

Encoded Code 39 (Full ASCII)

If the bar code reader is programmed for the task, the entire ASCII charac-

ter set (128 characters) could be coded using two character sequences: a

symbol (“$”,“.”,“%”,“/”) followed by a letter of the alphabet.

Bar CodesAppendix —C

364 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Code 93

The introduction of Code 93 provided a higher density alphanumeric

symbology designed to supplement Code 39. The set of data characters in

Code 93 is identical with that offered with Code 39. Each character con-

sists of nine modules arranged into three bars and three spaces.

Code 93 uses 48 of the 56 possible combinations. One of these characters,

represented by a square, is reserved for a start or stop character, four are

used for control characters, and the remaining 43 data characters coincide

with the Code 39 character set. An additional single module termination

bar after the stop character concludes the final space.

Code 93 is a variable length, continuous code that is not self-checking. Bar

and spaces widths may be one, two, three, or four modules wide. Its struc-

ture uses edge-to-similar-edge decoding. This makes the bar code immune

to uniform ink spread, which allows liberal bar width tolerances.

Code 93 uses two check characters. Its supporters believes this makes it the

highest density alphanumeric bar code. The dual check digit scheme pro-

vides for high data integrity. All substitution errors in a single character are

detected for any message length.

Code 128

Code 128 (C128) is one of the newest symbologies used by the retail and

manufacturing industries. It responds to the need for a compact alphanu-

meric bar code symbol that could encode complex product identification.

The fundamental requirement called for a symbology capable of being

printed by existing data processing printers (primarily dot-matrix printers)

that produce daily, work-in-progress, job, and product traceability docu-

ments. The ability to print identification messages between 10 and 32

characters long, on existing forms and labels deemed an important require-

ment.

Code 128 uniquely addresses this need as the most compact, complete,

alphanumeric symbology available.

Additionally, the Code 128 design with geometric features, improves scan-

ner read performance, does self-checking, and provides data message man-

agement function codes.

Code 128 encodes the complete set of 128 ASCII characters without ad-

ding extra symbol elements. Code 128 contains a variable-length symbolo-

gy and the ability to link one message to another for composite message

transmission. Code 128, being a double-density field, provides two numer-

ic values in a single character.

Code 128 follows the general bar code format of start zone, data, check

digit, stop code, and quiet zone. An absolute minimum bar or space di-

mension of nine mils (0.010 inch minimum nominal ±0.001 inch toler-

ance) must be maintained.

Characters in Code 128 consist of three bars and three spaces so that the

total character set includes three different start characters and a stop char-

acter.

Bar CodesAppendix —C

365700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

UCC/EAN-128 Shipping Container Labeling is a versatile tool that can

ease movement of products and information. The Shipping Container La-

beling bar code can take any form and usually has meaning only within the

company or facility where applied.

Because this random data can get mistaken later for an industry standard

code format, the UCC and EAN chose a symbology uniquely identified

from these other bar codes. This standard is for maximum flexibility, to

handle the diversity of distribution in global markets by cost efficiency.

The UCC/EAN-128 Container Labeling specification calls for a FUNC1

to immediately follow the bar code’ s start character. FUNC1 also follows

any variable-length application field. The specification also calls for the

computer to send “]C1” for the first FUNC1. The specification requires

that the computer send a “<GS>” (hex 1D) for subsequent FUNC1 codes

in the bar code.

Because “<GS>” is not compatible with computer emulation data streams,

the Uniform Code Council has been asked to change the specification.

This change is made to send the same three character sequence “]C1” to

identify the embedded FUNC1 codes.

This implementation should provide for clean application coding by iden-

tifying the same sequences for the same scanned codes. If the communica-

tion of Norand bar code types is enabled, the Shipping Container Label

codes precede with a “J”. These strings will appear on the computer dis-

play. The application may have to allow for strings longer than 48 charac-

ters (maximum length indicated in the specification). Actual length vari-

ance depends on the number of variable-length data fields. Allowing for 60

characters should be sufficient. Within the Code 128 specification, the

computer can link bar codes together. If this is to happen, allow for more

characters (computer limit is 100 characters).

The Application Identifier Standard, that is part of the UCC/EAN Ship-

ping Label concept, complements, rather than replaces, other UCC/EAN

standards. Most UCC/EAN standards primarily identify products.

Several industries expressed the need to standardize more than product

identification. The UCC/EAN Code 128 Application Identifier Standard

supplies this tool. The standard adds versatility for inter-enterprise ex-

changes of perishability dating, lot and batch identification, units of use

measure, location codes, and several other information attributes.

For more detailed information on Code 128 UCC/EAN Shipping Label

bar code and Application Identifier Standard, refer to the UCC/EAN-128

Application Identifier Standard specification.

Bar CodesAppendix —C

366 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

I2of5(Interleaved)

I 2 of 5 (Interleaved 2 of 5 Code) is an all-numeric symbology, widely used

for warehouse and heavy industrial applications. Its use has been particu-

larly prevalent in the automobile industry. The I 2 of 5 symbology can be

placed on smaller labels than what the standard UPC symbology requires.

I 2 of 5 also provides a little more flexibility on the type of material it can

print on. Interleaved 2 of 5 Code has its name because of the way the bar

code is configured.

I 2 of 5 bars and spaces both carry information. The bars represent the

odd number position digits, while spaces represent the even number posi-

tion digits. The two characters are interleaved as one. Messages encoded

with this symbology have to use an even number of characters since two

numeric characters always get interleaved together.

S2of5(Standard2of5)

The code S 2 of 5 (Standard 2 of 5 Code) is designed primarily for:

SWarehouse inventory handling

SIdentification of photo finishing envelopes

SAirline tickets

SBaggage and cargo handling

The code S 2 of 5 is simple and straightforward. All information is con-

tained in the widths of the bars, with the spaces serving only to separate

the individual bars.

Bars can either be wide or narrow, and the wide bars are usually three

times the widths of the narrow bars. Spaces may be any reasonable width

but are typically equal to the narrow bars. Narrow bars are identified as

zero bits and wide bars as one bits.

Remember the code structure by associating the bar positions from left to

right with weighting factors 1, 2, 4, 7, and parity. Exceptions to this rule

are zero, start, and stop. This code is a discrete code, since the white spaces

between the characters are not part of the code. Because the white spaces

carry no information, their dimensions are not critical.

The S 2 of 5 code is self-checking, meaning a scanner passing through a

printing void would detect the proper ratio of wide bars to total bars.

When the scanner spots an error, a non-read will occur.

Bar CodesAppendix —C

367700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Plessey

Plessey finds its origin in the pulse width modulated (PWM) code devel-

oped in England. It is widely used for shelf markings in grocery stores.

Pulse width modulated codes represent each bit of information by a bar

and space pair. A zero bit consists of a narrow bar followed by a wide

space, while a one bit consists of a wide bar followed by a narrow space. It

is mainly a numeric symbology (0-9) with six extra characters available for

assigning any symbol or letter desired.

Plessey codes are not self-checking and employ a variety of check charac-

ters. Plessey employs a polynomial-based Cyclic Redundancy Check

(CRC). For start and stop characters, Plessey employs a 1101 and previous-

ly used a 0101.

This symbology is very limited about what information can be encoded. It

is not considered for new applications.

MSI Code (Variant of Plessey)

In addition to Plessey characteristics, the MSI Code employs a Modulus

10 Check. For start and stop checks, MSI employs a single bit pair of 1 as

a start symbol and a single bit pair of 0 as a stop symbol. MSI reverses the

1-2-4-8 BCD pattern for bit pair weighting to 8-6-2-1.

Bar CodesAppendix —C

368 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Bar Code Labels

You can change some settings on your 700 Series Computer by scanning

the following Code 39 bar code labels.

SYou can use the Unit Manager application to set the Automatic Shutoff,

Volume, Backlight Timer, or Key Clicks parameters (starting on page

352).

SYou can use the Unit Manager application or the Data Collection con-

trol panel to set the three Virtual Wedge parameters (starting on page

325).

Note: When you use a bar code creation utility to make a scannable bar

code label, the utility probably adds opening and closing asterisks automat-

ically. Asterisks are included here for translation purposes.

Audio Volume

Note: The Audio Volume parameter information is on page 356.

Turn Audio Off

*$+BV0*

Set Audio Volume to very quiet

*$+BV1*

*$+VB1*

Set Audio Volume to quiet

*$+BV2*

Set Audio Volume to normal (default)

*$+BV3*

Set Audio Volume to loud

*$+BV4*

Set Audio Volume to very loud

*$+BV5*

Bar CodesAppendix —C

369700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Automatic Shutoff

Note: The Automatic Shutoff parameter information is on page 355.

Set Automatic Shutoff to 1 minute

*$+EZ1*

Set Automatic Shutoff to 2 minutes

*$+EZ2*

Set Automatic Shutoff to 3 minutes (default)

*$+EZ3*

Set Automatic Shutoff to 4 minutes

*$+EZ4*

Set Automatic Shutoff to 5 minutes

*$+EZ5*

Backlight Timeout

Note: The Backlight Timeout parameter information is on page 353.

Backlight Timeout 10 seconds

*$+DF10*

Backlight Timeout 30 seconds

*$+DF30*

Backlight Timeout 1 minute (default)

*$+DF60*

Bar CodesAppendix —C

370 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Backlight Timeout 2 minutes

*$+DF120*

Backlight Timeout 3 minutes

*$+DF180*

Backlight Timeout 4 minutes

*$+DF240*

Backlight Timeout 5 minutes

*$+DF300*

Key Clicks

Note: The Key Clicks parameter information is on page 354.

Disable key clicks

*$+KC0*

Enable soft key clicks

*$+KC1*

Enable loud key clicks (default)

*$+KC2*

Bar CodesAppendix —C

371700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Virtual Wedge Grid, Preamble, Postamble

The following parameters are user-configurable strings. Refer to a full

ASCII chart for more information.

Grid

For Virtual Wedge Grid, the first part of the bar code would be the follow-

ing, which can include a string of up to 240 characters. Parameter informa-

tion starts on page 328.

*$+AF

Preamble

For Virtual Wedge Preamble, the first part of the bar code would be below,

followed by a string of up to 31 characters (no <NUL>) and an asterisk.

Default is no characters. Parameter information is on page 326.

*$+AD

Postamble

For Virtual Wedge Postamble, the first part of the bar code would be be-

low, followed by a string of up to 31 characters (no <NUL>) and an aster-

isk. Default is no characters. Parameter information is on page 327.

*$+AE

Bar CodesAppendix —C

372 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

373700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Index

The Classes and Functions Index covers classes and functions for the 700 Series

Color Mobile Computer.

The General Index covers all topics. Those in italics are figures, those in bold are

tables.

The Files Index is to assist you in locating descriptions for device drivers, applica-

tions, utilities, batch files, or other files within this publication.

Index

374 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Classes and Functions

add_registry_section, [AddReg]

flags, 244

registry_root_string, 244

value_name, 244

AddReg, [DefaultInstall], 240

[AddReg], add_registry_section

flags, 244

registry_root_string, 244

value_name, 244

AddWep(), 103

AppName, [CEStrings], 237

BuildMax, [CEDevice], 238

BuildMin, [CEDevice], 238

CancelReadImage, IImage, 226

CancelReadRequest

IADC, 152

IBarCodeReaderControl, 160

[CEDevice]

BuildMax, 238

BuildMin, 238

ProcessorType, 238

UnsupportedPlatforms, 238

VersionMax, 238

VersionMin, 238

CESelfRegister, [DefaultInstall], 240

CESetupDLL, [DefaultInstall], 240

CEShortcuts, [DefaultInstall], 240

[CEShortcuts], shortcut_list_section

shortcut_filename, 245

shortcut_type_flag, 245

target_file/path, 245

target_file_path, 245

CESignature

[SourceDiskNames], 240

[Version], 236

[CEStrings]

AppName, 237

InstallDir, 237

Close, IImage, 228

CloseHandle()

DTR printing, 134, 135

IrDA printing, 128

NPCP printing, 129, 130

ConfigureProfile(), 106

ControlLED, IBarCodeReaderControl, 161

Copyfiles, [DefaultInstall], 240

[CopyFiles], file_list_section

destination_filename, 243

flags, 243

source_filename, 243

create/delete ADC COM objects, 149

CreateEvent(), 283

CreateFile()

DTR printing, 134, 135

IrDA printing, 128

NPCP printing, 129, 130

[DefaultInstall]

AddReg, 240

CESelfRegister, 240

CESetupDLL, 240

CEShortcuts, 240

Copyfiles, 240

DeregisterDevice(), 129

DTR printing, 134

[DestinationDirs], file_list_section, 242

DeviceIOControl(), 98

DTR printing, 134

NPCP printing, 129

DeviceIoControl(), NPCP printing, 130, 131

disk_ordinal, [SourceDiskNames], 240

DllRegisterServer, 240

DllUnregisterServer, 240

EnableWep(), 105

EncryptWepKeyForRegistry(), 106

file_list_section

[CopyFiles]

destination_filename, 243

flags, 243

source_filename, 243

[DestinationDirs], 242

filename, [SourceDiskFiles], 241

GetAssociationStatus(), 104

GetAuthenticationMode(), 104

GetBSSID(), 101

GetCodabar, IS9CConfig, 173

GetCode11, IS9CConfig2, 205

GetCode128, IS9CConfig, 180

GetCode39, IS9CConfig, 176, 200

GetCode93, IS9CConfig, 179

GetConfig, ISCP, 217

GetCustomSymIds, IS9CConfig2, 207

GetGlobalAmble, IS9CConfig2, 211

GetI2of5, IS9CConfig, 183

GetLinkSpeed(), 102

GetMac(), 101

GetMatrix2of5, IS9CConfig, 185

GetMSI, IS9CConfig, 187

GetNetworkMode(), 103

GetNetworkType(), 102

GetPDF417, IS9CConfig, 188

GetPDF417Ext, IS9CConfig2, 213

GetPlessey, IS9CConfig, 192

GetPowerMode(), 105

GetRSSI(), 103

GetRTSThreshold(), 106

GetSSID(), 101

Index

375700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

GetStandard2of5, IS9CConfig, 194

GetSymIdXmit, IS9CConfig2, 214

GetTelepen, IS9CConfig, 197

GetTXPower(), 102

GetUpcEan, IS9CConfig, 198

GetWepStatus(), 104

IADC, 151

CancelReadRequest, 152

Initialize, 153

QueryAttribute, 154

QueryData, 155

Read, 156

SetAttribute, 157

IBARCODEREADER.H, IBarCodeReaderControl func-

tions, 159

IBarCodeReaderControl, 159

CancelReadRequest, 160

ControlLED, 161

Initialize, 162

IssueBeep, 163

QueryAttribute, 164

Read, 165

SetAttribute, 167

TriggerScanner, 171

IImage

CancelReadImage, 226

Close, 228

Open, 227

ReadImage, 225

ReadSigCapBuffer, 221

ReadSigCapFile, 224

Start, 226

Stop, 227

Imager, settings, IS9CConfig3, 216

Initialize

IADC, 153

IBarCodeReaderControl, 162

InstallDir, [CEStrings], 237

IS9CConfig, 172

GetCodabar, 173

GetCode128, 180

GetCode39, 176, 200

GetCode93, 179

GetI2of5, 183

GetMatrix2of5, 185

GetMSI, 187

GetPDF417, 188

GetPlessey, 192

GetStandard2of5, 194

GetTelepen, 197

GetUpcEan, 198

SetCodabar, 174

SetCode128, 181

SetCode39, 177

SetCode93, 179

SetI2of5, 184

SetMatrix2of5, 186

SetMSI, 187

SetPDF417, 189

SetPlessey, 192

SetStandard2of5, 195

SetTelepen, 197

IS9CConfig2, 204

GetCode11, 205

GetCustomSymIds, 207

GetGlobalAmble, 211

GetPDF417Ext, 213

GetSymIdXmit, 214

SetCode11, 205

SetCustomSymIds, 208

SetGlobalAmble, 212

SetPDF417Ext, 213

SetSymIdXmit, 214

IS9CConfig3, 216

ISCP

GetConfig, 217

SetConfig, 218

isOrinoco(), 106

IssueBeep, IBarCodeReaderControl, 163

ITCDeviceClose, 150

ITCDeviceOpen, 140, 149

ITCUUID.LIB, IBarCodeReaderControl functions, 159

KernelIoControl(), 264

Open, IImage, 227

OSVERSIONINFO.dwBuildNumber, 238

OSVERSIONINFO.dwVersionMajor, 238

OSVERSIONINFO.dwVersionMinor, 238

ProcessorType, [CEDevice], 238

Provider, [Version], 236

QueryAttribute

IADC, 154

IBarCodeReaderControl, 164

QueryData, IADC, 155

RadioConnect(), 101

RadioDisconnect(), 101

Read, 140

IADC, 156

IBarCodeReaderControl, 165

ReadFile(), NPCP printing, 129

ReadImage, IImage, 225

ReadSigCapBuffer, IImage, 221

ReadSigCapFile, IImage, 224

RegFlushKey(), 81, 262, 270

RegisterDevice(), 129

DTR printing, 134

RegOpenKeyEx(), 282

RegQueryValueEx(), 282

RegSetValueEx(), 282

Index

376 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

SetAttribute

IADC, 157

IBarCodeReaderControl, 167

SetAuthenticationMode(), 104

SetChannel(), 105

SetCodabar, IS9CConfig, 174

SetCode11, IS9CConfig2, 205

SetCode128, IS9CConfig, 181

SetCode39, IS9CConfig, 177

SetCode93, IS9CConfig, 179

SetConfig, ISCP, 218

SetCustomSymIds, IS9CConfig2, 208

SetGlobalAmble, IS9CConfig2, 212

SetI2of5, IS9CConfig, 184

SetMatrix2of5, IS9CConfig, 186

SetMSI, IS9CConfig, 187

SetNetworkMode(), 103

SetPDF417, IS9CConfig, 189

SetPDF417Ext, IS9CConfig2, 213

SetPlessey, IS9CConfig, 192

SetRTSThreshold(), 106

SetSSID(), 105

SetStandard2of5, IS9CConfig, 195

SetSymIdXmit, IS9CConfig2, 214

SetTelepen, IS9CConfig, 197

SHFullScreen(), 262, 263

shortcut_list_section, [CEShortcuts]

shortcut_filename, 245

shortcut_type_flag, 245

target_file/path, 245

target_file_path, 245

Signature, [Version], 236

[SourceDiskFiles], filename, 241

[SourceDiskNames]

CESignature, 240

disk_ordinal, 240

SourceDisksNames.MIPS, 241

SourceDisksNames.SH3, 241

Start, IImage, 226

StartScanList(), 107

Stop, IImage, 227

string_key, [Strings], 237

[Strings], string_key, 237

SYSTEMINFO.dwProcessorType, 238

Trigger settings, IS9CConfig3, 216

TriggerScanner, IBarCodeReaderControl, 171

UnsupportedPlatforms, [CEDevice], 238

[Version]

CESignature, 236

Provider, 236

Signature, 236

VersionMax, [CEDevice], 238

VersionMin, [CEDevice], 238

WriteFile()

DTR printing, 134, 135

IrDA printing, 128

NPCP printing, 129, 130

Index

377700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

General Index

Numbers

1470 Imager. See Imager

1551/1553 Tethered Scanner. See Tethered scanner

1D laser scanner, about, 137

2D Imager

about, 137

data collection features, 146

aimer LED, 146

scaled illumination LED, 146

window size and position, 146

image acquisition features, 147

overview, 146

4820 printer, NPCP driver, 129

6804DM printer

DTR driver, 134

IrDA driver, 128

6804T printer

DTR driver, 134

IrDA driver, 128

6805A printer

DTR driver, 134

IrDA driver, 128

6806 printer

DTR driver, 134

IrDA driver, 128

6808 printer

DTR driver, 134

IrDA driver, 128

printer support, 127

681T printer, DTR driver, 134

6820 printer

IrDA driver, 128

NPCP driver, 129

printer support, 127

6920 Communications Server, ManifestName parameter,

254

700 Platform Build, version number, 342

740 Color Computer, 281

781 printers

DTR driver, 134

printer support, 127

782T printer, printer support, 127

802.11 CR radio CORE module, 107

802.11 WEP Encryption, profile security information, 91

802.11b

antenna color code, 85

API, 100

channel, 89

communications setup, 87

configuration profiles, 100

CORE module, 107

network type, 89

profiles, 87

basic information, 89

certificates, 95

exporting, 96

import/export, 96

importing, 97

read-only, 94

scan list, 97, 98

security information, 90

selected, 97

SSID (network name), 89

WEP encryption, 91

802.1x TLS, profile security information, 92

802.1x TTLS, profile security information, 93

Abstract Syntax Notation.1. See ASN.1

ActiveSync

ActiveSync Help, 30

adding programs, 26

adding programs to Start menu, 28

Folder behavior connected to e-mail server, 46

installing applications, 77

Microsoft Reader, 58

Pocket Internet Explorer

favorite links, 62

Mobile Favorites folder, 62

Pocket PC, 29

Pocket PC icon, 13

Pocket PC status icons, 12

URL, 29

ActiveX control tools, unit information control panel, CAB

files, 345

AD command, with/without data, 326

ADC COM interfaces, 138

functions

create/delete objects, 149

IADC, 151

IBarCodeReaderControl, 159

IS9CConfig, 172

IS9CConfig2, 204

IS9CConfig3, 216

Adding a profile, 88

Adding bookmarks, Microsoft Reader, 61

Adding drawings to text, Microsoft Reader, 61

Adding programs

ActiveSync, 26

Pocket Internet Explorer, 27

Pocket PC, 26

to the Start menu, 28

via ActiveSync, 28

via File Explorer, 28

Adjusting settings, Pocket PC, 26

Adobe Acrobat Reader, URL, 116

AE command, with/without data, 327

Aimer LED duration, configuration parameter, 323

Alpha plane on keypad, 281

Annotations index, Microsoft Reader, 61

Antenna, radio type, 85

APIs

802.11b, 100

AT command interface, 115

IrSock, 128

Appointments, via Calendar, 31

Index

378 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

APS linear imager, about, 137

ASCII

printing, 128

printing to a port, port print method, 128

raw text to printer, 128

ASN.1, 125

Asset management, DeviceURL parameter, 253

AT command interface, 115

terminal application, 114

testing, 117

Attaching notes to text, Microsoft Reader, 61

Audio files, Windows Media Player, 57

Audio system

external headset jack, 2

internal microphone, 2

speaker, 2

AutoCab, command line syntax, 82

AutoFTP, 260

AutoIP, 122

Automatic Data Collection. See ADC COM interfaces

Automatic Private IP. See AutoIP

Automatic shutoff

bar code configuration, 369

configuration parameter, 355

Autostart FTP, 260

AvantGo channels, Pocket Internet Explorer, 64

AXCommunication, 345

AXFileTransfer, 345

AXReaderCommand, 345

AXVWedge, 345

Backlight timeout

bar code configuration, 369

configuration parameter, 353

Bar Code

scanning labels, 368

supported symbologies, 147, 289

symbologies, 360

Codabar, 362

Code 11, 363

Code 128, 364

Code 39, 363

Code 39 concatenation, 363

Code 39 full ASCII, 363

Code 93, 364

data string formats, 360

EAN, 362

I 2 of 5, 366

MSI code, 367

Plessey, 367

S 2 of 5, 366

UPC, 362

Bar code configuration

audio volume, 368

automatic shutoff, 369

backlight timeout, 369

Code 39, 368

key clicks, 370

BARCODE_DATA_TYPE_ASCII, IBarCodeReaderCon-

trol::Read, 165

BARCODE_DATA_TYPE_UNICODE, IBarCodeReader-

Control::Read, 165

BARCODE_DATA_TYPE_UNKNOWN, IBarCodeRead-

erControl::Read, 165

Battery

low battery conditions, 3

Pocket PC status icons, 12

status, 2

Battery status, unit information control panel applet, 343

Beeper

configuration parameter

frequency, 320

volume, 318

silencing the volume, 319

supported functions, 317

Unit Manager, 349

when not available

beeper frequency, 320

good read beep duration, 322

good read beeps, 321

biActualImageSize, pImgBuffer, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer,

222

biBitCount, pImgBuffer, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 222

biHeight, pImgBuffer, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 222

biMaxImageBytes, pImgBuffer, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer,

222

biWidth, pImgBuffer, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 222

Block recognizer, Pocket PC input panel, 17

BlockSize, FTP Server, 252

Bluealps CORE module, 120

Bluetooth

CORE module, 120

unit information control panel, main stack CAB file,

344

Bluetooth compatibility, network support, 120

Bluetooth Device Manager, documentation, 120

Books, Microsoft Reader

adding bookmarks, 61

adding drawings, 61

annotations index, 61

attaching notes, 61

copying, 61

downloading, 58

highlighting, 61

reading, 60

removing, 61

searching, 61

Browing the Internet, Pocket Internet Explorer, 66

BTctrl program, documentation, 120

Build information, 5

byFNC1, IS9CConfig::SetCode128, 181

Index

379700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

CAB files

after the extraction, 248

creating, 236

INF files, 236

with CAB Wizard, 249

information regarding, 4

installation functions, SETUP.DLL, 248

placing files onto storage card, 80

unit information control panel applet, 344

Cabinet Wizard

creating CAB files, 249

troubleshooting, 250

using the application, 236

Cabling, scanner, 232

Calendar

creating

an appointment, 32

meeting requests, 33

Pocket Outlook, 31

Pocket PC icon, 13

scheduling a meeting, 33

using the summary screen, 33

Capacitor, internal super, 3

Capturing thoughts and ideas, via Notes, 40

Card support

CompactFlash cards, 5

modems, 4

MultiMediaCards, 5

radios, 4

SecureDigital cards, 5

CDMA/1xRTT, 110

antenna color code, 85

AT command set, 116

CORE module, 111

CEImager

location of the executable file, 80

migrating AUTORUN.DAT files, 80

Channel, 802.11 radio module, 89

ClassID field values

VN_CLASS_ASIC, 266

VN_CLASS_BOOTSTRAP, 266

VN_CLASS_KBD, 266

Clock

Pocket PC settings, 26

setting date and time, 358

Closing drivers, NPCP, 130

CMIP, 123

Codabar, 362

configuration parameter, 292

user ID, 310

default S9C settings, 175

enumerations, 175

IS9CConfig::GetCodabar, 173

IS9CConfig::SetCodabar, 174

modifier characters, 219

Code 11, 363

configuration parameter, 306

user ID, 314

default S9C settings, 206

enumerations, 206

IS9CConfig2::GetCode11, 205

IS9CConfig2::SetCode11, 205

modifier characters, 219

Code 128, 364

configuration parameter, 295

FNC1 character, 297

user ID, 310

default S9C settings, 181

enumerations, 182

IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 223

IImage::ReadSigCapFile, 224

IS9CConfig::GetCode128, 180

IS9CConfig::SetCode128, 181

modifier characters, 219

Code 39, 363

configuration parameter, 290

user ID, 310

default S9C settings, 177

enumerations, 178

IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 223

IImage::ReadSigCapFile, 224

IS9CConfig::GetCode39, 176

IS9CConfig::SetCode39, 177

modifier characters, 219

Code 93, 364

configuration parameter, 294

length, 294

user ID, 311

default S9C settings, 179

enumerations, 180

IS9CConfig::GetCode93, 179

IS9CConfig::SetCode93, 179

modifier characters, 219

Code Division Multiple Access. See CDMA/1xRTT

Codes

11, 363

128, 364

39, 363

39 concatenation, 363

39 full ASCII, 363

93, 364

Cold boot, IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 275

COM port

configuration, 231

wedge settings, 231

COM1, NPCP parameter, 129

COM1 port, 128

Comm port wedge

disabling, 231

enabling, 230

error messages, 232

limitations, 233

settings, 231

unit information control panel, 344

Command line syntax, AutoCab, 82

Common Object Resource Environment. See CORE

Index

380 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Communications

DTR, 135

NPCP, 132

Communications options, 83

CompactFlash cards

card support, 5

installing applications, 78

Composing Messages, via Inbox, 45

Computer shutdown, 3

Concatenation, 363

Configuration Management. See Unit Manager

Configuration parameters

aimer LED duration, 323

automatic shutoff, 355

backlight timeout, 353

beeper

frequency, 320

volume, 318

codabar, 292

user ID, 310

code 11, 306

user ID, 314

code 128, 295

FNC1 character, 297

user ID, 310

code 39, 290

user ID, 310

code 93, 294

length, 294

user ID, 311

data matrix, 308

date/time, 352

EAN

13 user ID, 313

8 user ID, 313

good read

beep duration, 322

beeps, 321

identification

contact, 338

location, 340

name, 339

image dimension, 324

interleaved 2 of 5, 303

user ID, 311

key clicks, 354

macro PDF, 300

matrix 2 of 5, 304

user ID, 313

micro PDF 417, 302

MSI, 299

user ID, 311

PDF 417, 300

user ID, 311

plessey, 298

user ID, 312

prefix, 315

QR code, 307

security

encryption key, 335

read encryption, 333

read-only community string, 331

read/write community string, 332

write encryption, 334

SNMP, security subnet mask, 309

standard 2 of 5, 291

user ID, 312

suffix, 316

telepen, 305

user ID, 313

trap

authentication, 336

threshold, 337

UPC

A user ID, 312

E user ID, 312

UPC/EAN, 293

virtual wedge, 325

code page, 329

grid, 328

postamble, 327

preamble, 326

volume, 356

Connecting directly to e-mail server, via Inbox, 42

Connecting to

an ISP, 68

e-mail server, 72

work, 70

Connections

Intermec Technologies 700C-SMC45-1 Notepad Computer with 3 Radio Lans User Manual back let85x11

Intermec Technologies Corporation Notepad Computer with 3 Radio Lans back let85x11

Contents

User Manual

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation